Council Directive 89/173/EEC of 21 December 1988 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to certain components and characteristics of wheeled agricultural or forestry tractors
89/173/EEC • 31989L0173
Legal Acts - L
- 77 Inbound citations:
- •
- 7 Cited paragraphs:
- •
- 40 Outbound citations:
Avis juridique important
Council Directive 89/173/EEC of 21 December 1988 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to certain components and characteristics of wheeled agricultural or forestry tractors Official Journal L 067 , 10/03/1989 P. 0001 - 0118 Finnish special edition: Chapter 13 Volume 18 P. 0003 Swedish special edition: Chapter 13 Volume 18 P. 0003
COUNCIL DIRECTIVE of 21 December 1988 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to certain components and characteristics of wheeled agricultural or forestry tractors (89/173/EEC) THE COUNCIL OF THE EUROPEAN COMMUNITIES, Having regard to the Treaty establishing the European Economic Community, and in particular Article 100a thereof, Having regard to the proposal from the Commission (1), In cooperation with the European Parliament (2), Having regard to the opinion of the Economic and Social Committee (3), Whereas it is important to adopt measures with the aim of progressively establishing the internal market over a period expiring on 31 December 1992; whereas the internal market shall comprise an area without internal frontiers in which the free movement of goods, persons, services and capital is ensured; Whereas the technical requirements which tractors must fulfil in pursuance of national laws concern, inter alia, their dimensions and masses, speed governors, the protection of their drive components, projections and wheels, brake control for towed vehicles, windscreens and other glazing, the mechanical coupling between tractor and towed vehicle and the location and method of affixing statutory plates and markings to the body of the tractor; Whereas those requirements differ from one Member State to another; whereas it is consequently necessary for the same OJ No C 326, 18. 12. 1988. requirements to be adopted by all of the Member States, either in addition or in place of the existing regulations, in order, in particular, to permit implementation, for each type of tractor, of the EEC type-approval procedure covered by Council Directive 74/150/EEC of 4 March 1974 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to the type-approval of wheeled agricultural or forestry tractors (4), as last amended by Directive 82/890/EEC (5); Whereas with regard, in particular, to the technical requirements relating to safety glass - windscreens and other glazing - it is appropriate to embrace with some amendments those adopted by the United Nations' Economic Commission for Europe in its Regulation No 43 (´Uniform provisions concerning the approval of safety glazing and glazing materials') forming an addendum to the agreement of 20 March 1958 concerning the adoption of uniform conditions of approval and thus reciprocal recognition of approval for motor vehicle equipment and parts (6), HAS ADOPTED THIS DIRECTIVE: Article 1 1. (Agricultural or forestry) tractor means any motor vehicle fitted with wheels or endless tracks and having at least two axles, the main function of which lies in its tractive power and which is specially designed to, push, carry or Doc. " y x E/ECE/234 E/ECE/TRANS/505 aa a s REV 1/ADD 42/REV/1. power certain tools, machinery or trailers intended for agricultural or forestry use. It may be equipped to carry a load and passengers. 2. This Directive shall apply only to tractors defined in paragraph 1 which are fitted with pneumatic tyres and which have two axles and a maximum design speed of between 6 and 30 km/h. Article 2 1. No Member State may refuse EEC type-approval or national type-approval of a tractor or refuse its registration or prohibit the sale, entry into service or use of a tractor or grounds relating to: - dimensions and towable masses, - speed governors and protection of drive components, projections and wheels, - windscreens and other glazing, - mechanical couplings between tractor and towed vehicle, including the vertical load on the coupling point, - location and method of affixing statutory plates and inscriptions to the body of the tractor, - brake control for towed vehicles, where these comply with the requirements of the Annexes relating thereto and where the windscreens and other glass panes or the mechanical couplings bear an EEC component type-approval mark. 2. By way of derogation from the provisions of paragraph 1 relating to use of the tractor, Member States may, for reasons concerning towable mass(es), continue to apply their national provisions reflecting in particular the special requirements relating to the nature of the land relief on their territory, within the limits of the towable masses listed in section 2.2 of Annex I in so far as this does not involve alterations to the tractor or a further supplementary national type-approval. Article 3 1. Each Member State shall grant EEC component type- approval for any type of windscreen or other glass-pane and/or of mechanical coupling which satisfies the construction and testing requirements laid down in Annexes III and/or IV. 2. The Member State which has granted EEC component type-approval shall take the measures required in order to verify, in so far as is necessary and if need be in cooperation with the competent authorities in the other Member States, that production models conform to the approved type. Such verification shall be limited to spot checks. Article 4 Member States shall, for each type of windscreen or other glass pane or of mechanical coupling which they approve pursuant to Article 3, issue to the manufacturer of the tractor, windscreen or mechanical coupling or to his authorized representative, an EEC component type-approval mark conforming to the models shown in Annex III or IV. Member States shall take all appropriate measures to prevent the use of marks liable to create confusion between the type of equipment which has been granted EEC component type-approval pursuant to Article 3 and equipment of other types. Article 5 1. No Member State may prohibit the placing on the market of windscreens and other glass panes or mechanical couplings on grounds relating to their construction if they bear the EEC component type-approval mark. 2. Nevertheless a Member State may prohibit the placing on the market of windscreens or mechanical couplings bearing the EEC component type-approval mark which do not conform to the approved type. That State shall forthwith inform the other Member States and the Commission of the measures taken, specifying the reasons for its decision. Article 6 The competent authorities of each Member State shall within one month send to the competent authorities of the other Member States a copy of the component type-approval certificates, examples of which are given in Annex III or IV, completed for each type of windscreen or mechanical coupling which they approve or refuse to approve. Article 7 1. If the Member State which has granted EEC component type-approval finds that a number of windscreens or mechanical couplings bearing the same EEC component type-approval mark do not conform to the type which it has approved, it shall take the necessary measures to ensure that production models conform to the approved type. The competent authorities of that State shall advise those of the other Member States of the measures taken, which may, if necessary, where there is serious and repeated failure to conform, extend to withdrawal of EEC component type-approval. The said authorities shall take the same measures if they are informed by the competent authorities of another Member State of such failure to conform. 2. The competent authorities of the Member States shall inform each other within one month of any withdrawal of EEC component type-approval and of the reasons for such a measure. Article 8 Any decision taken pursuant to the provisions adopted in implementation of this Directive to refuse or withdraw EEC component type-approval for a windscreen or mechanical coupling or to prohibit their placing on the market or use, shall set out in detail the reasons on which it is based. Such decisions shall be notified to the party concerned, who shall at the same time be informed of the remedies available to him under the laws in force in the Member States and of the time limits allowed for the exercise of such remedies. Article 9 Any amendments necessary to adapt the requirements of the Annexes to technical progress shall be adopted in accordance with the procedure laid down in Article 13 of Directive 74/150/EEC. Article 10 1. Member States shall bring into force the provisions necessary in order to comply with this Directive by 31 December 1989. They shall forthwith inform the Commission thereof. 2. Member States shall notify to the Commission the texts of the main provisions of national law which they adopt in the field covered by this Directive. Article 11 This Directive is addressed to the Member States. Done at Brussels, 21 December 1988. For the Council The President V. PAPANDREOU EWG:L777UMBE00.94 FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 1238 mm; 205 Zeilen; 9000 Zeichen; Bediener: MARK Pr.: C; Kunde: L777UMBE00 (1) OJ No C 218, 17. 8. 1987, p. 1. (2) OJ No C 281, 19. 10. 1987, p. 180 and(3) OJ No C 319, 30. 11. 1987, p. 25.(4) OJ No L 84, 28. 3. 1974, p. 10. (5) OJ No L 378, 31. 12. 1982, p. 45. (6) Doc. E/ECE/TRANS/505 (() ANNEX I DIMENSIONS AND TOWABLE MASSES 1. DEFINITIONS 1.1. ´Length' means: - the length of the tractor measured between the vertical planes at right angles to the longitudinal axis of the tractor and passing the outermost points thereof, but excluding: - all mirrors, - all starting handles, - all front or lateral position (side) lamps. 1.2. ´Width' means: - the width of the tractor measured between the vertical planes parallel to the longitudinal axis of the tractor and passing through the outermost points thereof, but excluding: - any mirrors, - any direction indicators, - any front, lateral or rear position (side) lamps; any parking lamps, - any distortion of the tyres caused by the weight of the tractor, - any folding components such as lift-up footrests and flexible mud-flaps. 1.3. ´Height' means: - the vertical distance between the ground and the point on the tractor the greatest distance from the ground, excluding the aerial. When this height is determined, the tractor must be: - fitted with new tyres having the greatest rolling radius specified by their manufacturer. 1.4. ´Permissible towable mass' means the mass which a type of tractor may tow. It may, for example, consist of one or more trailers towed or agricultural or forestry implements. A distinction is drawn between the technically permissible towable mass stated by the manufacturer and the authorized towable mass as laid down in section 2.2 below. 1.5. ´Towing device' means a component on the tractor designed to provide a mechanical link between a tractor and towed vehicle. 1.6. ´Unladen mass of tractor in running order (Mt)' means the mass defined in point 2.4 of Annex I to Directive 74/150/EEC. 1.7. Technically permissable towable mass(es): - unbraked towable mass, - independently braked towable mass (as defined in point 1.12 of Annex I to Council Directive 76/432/EEC (¹), - inertia braked towable mass (as defined in point 1.14 of Annex I to Directive 76/432/EEC), - towable mass fitted with hydraulic or pneumatic braking: such braking may be of the continuous, semi-continuous or independent power-operated type as defined in points 1.9, 1.10 and 1.11, respectively, of Annex I to Directive 76/432/EEC. (¹) OJ No L 122, 8. 5. 1976, p. 1. 2. REQUIREMENTS 2.1. Dimensions The maximum dimensions of a tractor are as follows: 2.1.1. length: 12 m; 2.1.2. width: 2,5 m; 2.1.3. height: 4 m. 2.1.4. The measurements intended to check these dimensions are carried out as follows: - with the tractor unladen and in running order as indicated in point 1.6, - on a flat horizontal surface, - with the tractor stationary and the engine switched off, - with the new tyres at the normal pressure recommended by the manufacturer, - with doors and windows closed, - with the steering wheel in the straight-ahead position, - without any agricultural or forestry implement attached to the tractor. 2.2 Permissible towable mass 2.2.1. The permissible towable mass must not exceed: 2.2.1.1. the technically permissible towable mass as defined in point 1.7, recommended by the tractor manufacturer; 2.2.1.2. the towable mass laid down for towing device pursuant to EEC component-type approval. 2.2.2. Where a Member State applies Article 2 (2), towable mass(es) must be specified on the tractor's registration certificate. EWG:L777UMBE02.95 FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 507 mm; 63 Zeilen; 3393 Zeichen; Bediener: MARK Pr.: C; Kunde: 43649 Montan England 02 10. 3. 89 Official Journal of the European Communities Appendix MODEL Name of administration ANNEX TO THE EEC TYPE-APPROVAL CERTIFICATE FOR A TYPE OF TRACTOR WITH REGARD TO DIMENSIONS AND TOWABLE MASSES (Articles 4 (2) and 10 of Council Directive 74/150/EEC of 4 March 1974 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to the EEC type-approval of wheeled agricultural or forestry tractors) EEC type-approval No: . 1. Component(s) or characteristic(s): 1.1. Dimensions: 1.1.1. length: . m 1.1.2. width: . m 1.1.3. height: . m 1.2. Towable masses: 1.2.1. unbraked towable mass: .................... kg 1.2.2. independently braked towable mass: .................... kg 1.2.3. inertia-braked towable mass: .................... kg 1.2.4. towable mass fitted with an assisted braking system (hydraulic or pneumatic): .................... kg 2. Make of tractor or business name of manufacturer: . 3. Type and where appropriate commercial name of tractor: . 4. Manufacturer's name and address: . . 5. If applicable, name and address of manufacturer's authorized representative: . . 6. Date of submission of tractor for EEC type-approval: . 7. Technical service conducting the type-approval tests: . . 8. Date of report issued by that service: . 9. Number of report issued by that service: . 10. EEC type-approval for dimensions and towable masses is granted/refused (¹). 11. Place: . 12. Date: . 13. Signature: . 14. The following documents, bearing the EEC type-approval number indicated above are attached to this certificate: ................................... dimensioned drawings; ................................... drawing or photograph of the tractor. The data must be supplied to the competent authorities of the other Member States if they so request. 15. Remarks: . .(¹) Delete where inapplicable. EWG:L777UMBE03.96 FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 253 mm; 47 Zeilen; 1816 Zeichen; Bediener: MARK Pr.: C; Kunde: 43649 Montan England 03 ANNEX II SPEED GOVERNOR AND PROTECTION OF DRIVE COMPONENTS, PROJECTIONS AND WHEELS 1. SPEED GOVERNOR 1.1. If a speed governor is fitted as standard by the manufacturer, it must be installed and designed in such a way that the tractor complies with Directive 74/152/EEC (;) on maximum design speed. 2. PROTECTION OF DRIVE COMPONENTS, PROJECTIONS AND WHEELS 2.1. General 2.1.1. Drive components, projections and wheels on tractors must be designed, fitted and protected in such a way as to prevent accidents to persons under normal conditions of use. 2.1.2. The requirements of point 2.1.1 are regarded as being fulfilled if the requirements set out in section 2.3 have been complied with. Solutions other than those described in section 2.3 are authorized if the manufacturer provides proof that they are at least equivalent to the requirements of section 2.3. 2.1.3. Protective devices must be firmly attached to the tractor. ´Firmly attached' means that removal of such devices should be possible only with the aid of tools. 2.1.4. Cowls, lids and hoods, which could cause injury if they are slammed shut, must be made in such a way as to preclude their shutting accidentally (e.g. by means of safety devices or suitable mounting or design). 2.1.5. A single protective device may protect a number of dangerous points. However, if adjustment, maintenance or interference suppression devices - which can be actuated only when the engine is running - are fitted beneath a single protective device, then further protective devices must be fitted. 2.1.6. Securing devices (e.g. spring clips or flaps) - to secure quick-release mounting components (e.g. socket pins), and such components of - protective devices which open without the aid of tools (e.g. engine cowl) must be firmly attached either to the tractor mounting or to the protective device. 2.2. Definitions 2.2.1. ´Protective device' means a device intended to protect dangerous parts. Within the meaning of this Directive, protective devices include shields, covers or guards. 2.2.1.1. ´Shield' means a protective device located immediately in front of a dangerous part and which, either on its own or with other parts of the machine, protects on all sides against contact with the dangerous part. 2.2.1.2. ´Hood or cowl' means a protective device located in front of the dangerous part and which protects against contact with the dangerous part on the covered side. 2.2.1.3. ´Guard' means a protective device which, by means of a rail, grill or similar device provides the necessary safety distance preventing contact with the dangerous part. 2.2.2. ´Dangerous part' means any point which, owing to the arrangements or design of the fixed or movable part of a tractor, involves a risk of injury. The dangerous parts are, in particular, pinching, shearing, cutting, piercing, penetrating, snatching, entry and attack points. 2.2.2.1. ´Pinching point' means any dangerous point where parts move in relation to each other or to fixed parts in such a way as may cause persons or certain parts of their bodies to be pinched. 2.2.2.2. ´Shear point' means any dangerous point where parts move along each other or along other parts in such a way as may cause persons or certain parts of their bodies to be pinched or shorn. (;) OJ No L 84, 28. 3. 1974, p. 33. 2.2.2.3. ´Cutting, piercing or penetration point' means any dangerous point where parts, either moving or fixed, sharp edged, pointed or blunt may injure persons or certain parts of their bodies. 2.2.2.4. ´Snatching point' means any dangerous point where sharp-edged projections, teeth, pins, screws and bolts, grease nipples, shafts, shaft ends and other parts move in such a way that persons, certain parts of their bodies or clothing may be snatched and pulled along. 2.2.2.5. ´Entry or attack point' means any dangerous point whose parts, by moving, narrow an aperture in which persons, certain parts of their bodies or clothes may be caught. 2.2.3. ´Reach' means the maximum distance which can be reached by persons or certain parts of their bodies upwards, downwards, inwards, above, around or across without the aid of any object (Figure 1). 2.2.4. ´Safety distance' means the distance corresponding to the reach or to the body dimension plus a safety margin (Figure 1). 2.2.5. ´Control' means any device whose direct actuation enables the state or operation of the tractor or of any equipment linked to it to be altered. 2.3. Safety distances for avoiding contact with dangerous parts 2.3.1. The safety distance is measured from those points which may be reached to actuate, service and inspect the tractor, and also from ground level. ´Servicing and inspecting the tractor' solely means work normally carried out by the driver himself in accordance with the instructions for use. In determining the safety distances the basic principle is that the tractor is in the state for which it has been designed and that no means has been used in order to reach the dangerous part. Safety distances are set out in points 2.3.2.1 to 2.3.2.5. In certain specific areas or for certain specific component parts an appropriate safety level is provided if the tractor corresponds to the requirements set out in points 2.3.2.6 to 2.3.2.14. 2.3.2. Protection of dangerous points Upwards The upward safety margin is 2 500 mm (see Figure 1) in the case of persons standing upright. 2.3.2.2. Downwards, above The safety margin for reaching above a barrier is: a = from ground level up to the dangerous point; b = height of barrier or protective device; c = horizontal distance between dangerous point and barrier (see Figure 2). When reaching both downwards and above the safety distances set out in Table 1 must be maintained. TABLE 1 (mm) a: Distance from ground of dangerous point Height between barrier and protective device b 2 400 2 200 2 000 1 800 1 600 1 400 1 200 1 000 Horizontal distance c from dangerous point 2 400 - 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 2 200 - 250 350 400 500 500 600 600 2 000 - - 350 500 600 700 900 1 100 1 800 - - - 600 900 900 1 000 1 100 1 600 - - - 500 900 900 1 000 1 300 1 400 - - - 100 800 900 1 000 1 300 1 200 - - - - 500 900 1 000 1 400 1 000 - - - - 300 900 1 000 1 400 800 - - - - - 600 900 1 300 600 - - - - - - 500 1 200 400 - - - - - - 300 1 200 200 - - - - - - 200 1 100 2.3.2.3. Reach around The safety margin shown in Table 2 below must, at the minimum, be maintained if the part of the body concerned is not to reach a dangerous point. In applying the safety margin it is assumed that the main body joint concerned is pushed firmly against the edge of the protective device. The safety margins are not considered to have been maintained until one is satisfied that part of the body may quite definitely not advance or penetrate further. TABLE 2 Part of the body Safety distance Figure Hand From the first knuckle to the fingertips · 120 Part of the body Safety distance Figure Hand From the wrist to the fingertips · 230 Limb Safety distance Illustration Arm From the elbow to the fingertips · 550 Arm From the shoulder to the fingertips · 850 2.3.2.4. Penetration and reach across If penetration is possible into or across openings and up to dangerous parts, the minimum safety distances set out in Tables 3 and 4 must be maintained. Parts which move in relation to one another or moving parts set alongside fixed parts are not regarded as risk factors provided they are no more than 8 mm apart. TABLE 3 Safety distances for elongated and parallel openings a is the smaller dimension of the aperture. bis the safety distance from danger point. Fingertip Finger Hand to ball of thumb Arm to armpit - 4 < a 9 8 8 < a 9 12 12 < a 9 20 20 < a 9 30 30 < a 9 135 maximum > 135 b 8 15 b 8 80 b 8 120 b 8 200 b 8 850 - TABLE 4 Safety distances for square or circular apertures a is the aperture/diameter or length of side. b is the safety distance from danger point. Fingertip Finger Hand to thumb root Arm to armpit - 4 < a 9 8 8 < a 9 12 12 < a 9 25 25 < a 9 40 40 < a 9 250 maximum 250 b 8 15 b 8 80 b 8 120 b 8 200 b 8 850 - 2.3.2.5. Safety distances at pinching points A pinching point is not considered dangerous for the part of the body shown if the safety distances are not less than those set out in Table 5, and if it is ensured that the adjacent, wider part of the body cannot be introduced. TABLE 5 Limb Body Leg Foot Arm Hand, joint, first Finger Safety distances 500 180 120 100 25 Illustration 2.3.2.6. Controls The gap between two pedals and the holes through which controls pass are not regarded as being pinching or shearing points. 2.3.2.7. Rear three-point coupling 2.3.2.7.1. Behind a plane passing through the median plane of the pivot points of the lifting rods in a three-point coupling system a minimum safety margin of 25 mm must be maintained between the moving parts for each point or of the lifting device's travel - but not for the extreme upper and lower positions 0,1 n, together with a distance of 25 mm or a minimum angle of 30g for the parts in shear which cause a change in angularity (see Figure 3). Travel nm, reduced by 0,1 n at both its upper and lower ends is defined as follows (see Figure 4): 2.3.2.7.2. For travel n of the hydraulic lifting unit, lower position A of the coupling point of the lower link is limited by dimension ´14' in accordance with ISO Standard 730, Part 1, while upper position B is limited by the maximum hydraulic travel. Travel nm corresponds to travel n reduced upwards and downwards by 0,1 n, and constitutes the vertical distance between Am and Bm. 2.3.2.7.3. Moreover, within travel nm a minimum safety margin of 25 mm in relation to the adjacent parts must be maintained around the profile of the lifting rods. 2.3.2.7.4. If, in the case of a three-point coupling, coupling devices are used which do not require the presence of an operator between the tractor and the implement carried (for example, in the case of a quick coupling), the provisions of point 2.3.2.7.3 do not apply. 2.3.2.7.5. The operating manual should contain specific information on the dangerous points located at the front of the plane defined in the first sentence of point 2.3.2.7.1. 2.3.2.8. Front three-point coupling 2.3.2.8.1. At each point of the lifting unit's travel n - but not for the extreme upper and lower reaches 0,1 n - a minimum safety margin of 25 mm must be maintained between the moving parts together with a minimum angle of 30g or a safety margin of 25 mm in the case of the change of angularity caused by the parts in shear with each other. Travel nm reduced by 0,1 n at both its upper and lower ends, is defined as follows (see also Figure 4). 2.3.2.8.2. For travel n of the hydraulic lifting unit, extreme lower position A of the coupling point of the lower link is limited by dimension ´14' in accordance with ISO Standard 8759, Part 2, while extreme upper position B is limited by the maximum hydraulic travel. Traven nm reduced upwards and downwards by 0,1 n and the vertical distance between Am and Bm. 2.3.2.8.3. If, for the lower links of a front three-point coupling, coupling devices (such as a rapid-action coupling) are used which do not require the presence of a person between the tractor and the implement attached during coupling, the requirements under 2.3.2.8.1 do not apply within the reach of a radius of 250 mm from the points at which the lower links are coupled to the tractor. However, a minimum safety margin of 25 mm from neighbouring parts within the defined travel nm must in any case be maintained around the outside of the travel rods/cylinders. 2.3.2.9. Driving seat and environment When he is in a sitting position, all pinching of shearing points must be out of range of the driver's hands or feet. This requirement is considered to have been met if the following conditions are fulfilled: 2.3.2.9.1. The driver's seat is at the mid-point in its longitudinal and vertical adjustment range. The driver's reach limit is divided into zones A and B. A central spherical point of these zones is 60 mm in front of and 580 mm above the seat reference point (see Figure 5). Zone A consists of a sphere having a diameter of 550 mm while zone B is located between that sphere and a sphere having a radius of 1 000 mm. 2.3.2.9.2. A safety distance of 120 mm in zone A and 25 mm in zone B is maintained near the pinching and shearing points, whilst a minimum angle of 30g is maintained in the case of shearing parts causing a change in angularity. 2.3.2.9.3. In zone A, only the pinching and shearing points caused by parts set in motion by an outside energy source must be taken into account. 2.3.2.9.4. If a dangerous point is due to the presence of structural parts adjacent to the seat, a safety distance of a least 25 mm is maintained between that structural part and the seat. There is no dangerous point between the seat backrest and the adjacent structural parts located behind that backrest if the adjacent structural parts are smooth and the seat backrest itself is rounded in the surrounding area and has no sharp points. 2.3.2.10. Passenger seat (if any) 2.3.2.10.1. If parts may constitute a danger for the feet, provision must be made for protective devices within a hemispherical radius of 800 mm starting from the forward edge of the seat cushion and pointing downwards. 2.3.2.10.2. As described in section 2.3.2.9 (see Figure 6) the dangerous points in zones A and B must be protected within a sphere whose centre is 670 mm above the centre of the front edge of the passenger seat. 2.3.2.11. Narrow-track tractors (tractors with a track as defined in the second indent of Article 1 of Directive 87/402/EEC). 2.3.2.11.1. In the case of narrow-track tractors, the requirements of section 2.3.2.9 do not apply to the zone situated below a plane inclined at 45g to the rear and transverse to the direction of travel, and passing through a point located 230 mm behind the seat index point (see Figure 7). If there are any dangerous points in this zone, corresponding warnings must be affixed to the tractor. 2.3.2.11.2. Sections II.1 and II.2 of Annex I to Direcitve 80/720/EEC apply to access to the driver's seat. 2.3.2.11.3. Section I.6 of Annex I to Directive 80/720/EEC applies to control devices. 2.3.2.11.4. In front of a reference plane which passes at right angles to the longitudinal axis of the vehicle and through the centre of the load-free pedal (clutch and/or service brake), very hot exhaust components must be protected if located within 300 mm in the upper zone (700 mm above ground level) and within 150 mm in the lower zone (see Figure 8). Laterally, the area to be protected is limited by the external outline of the tractor and the external outline of the exhaust system. Very hot exhaust system components passing beneath the entry step must be covered in their vertical projection or otherwise thermally protected. EWG:L777UMBE04.94 FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 2030 mm; 408 Zeilen; 15101 Zeichen; Bediener: MARK Pr.: C; Kunde: ................................ 10. 3. 89 Official Journal of the European Communities Appendix MODEL Name of administration ANNEX TO THE EEC TYPE-APPROVAL CERTIFICATE FOR A TRACTOR TYPE WITH REGARD TO THE SPEED GOVERNOR AND PROTECTION OF THE DRIVE COMPONENTS, PROJECTIONS AND WHEELS (Articles 4 (2) and 10 of Council Directive 74/150/EEC of 4 March 1974 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to the EEC type-approval of wheeled agricultural or forestry tractors) EEC type-approval No: . 1. Component(s) or characteristic(s): 1.1. speed governor (where present) 1.2. protection of the drive units, projection and wheels 2. Make of tractor (or business name of manufacturer): . . 3. Type and where appropriate commercial name of tractor: . . 4. Manufacturer's name and address: . . 5. If applicable, name and address of manufacturer's authorized representative: . . 6. Description of component(s) and/or characteristic(s) mentioned under 1 above: . 7. Date of submission of tractor for EEC type-approval: . 8. Technical service conducting the type-approval tests: . . 9. Date of report issued by that service: . 10. Number of report issued by that service: . 11. EEC type-approval for the speed governor and protection of the drive components, projections and wheels is granted/refused (¹) 12. Place: . 13. Date: . 14. Signature: . 15. The following documents, bearing the EEC type-approval number indicated above, are attached to this certificate: ................................... dimensioned drawing; ................................... drawing or photograph of the relevant parts of the tractor. These data must be supplied to the component authorities of the other Member States if they so request. 16. Remarks: . . . (¹) Delete where inapplicable. EWG:L777UMBE05.96 FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 253 mm; 47 Zeilen; 1746 Zeichen; Bediener: MARK Pr.: C; Kunde: 43649 Montan England 05 ANNEX III A WINDSCREEN AND OTHER GLAZING EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS, DEFINITIONS, APPLICATION FOR COMPONENT TYPE-APPROVAL, COMPONENT TYPE-APPROVAL, MARKINGS, GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS, TESTS AND CONFORMITY OF PRODUCTION 1. EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS 1.1. Agricultural and forestry tractors may be equipped as chosen by their manufacturer with: 1.1.1. windscreens and glass panes other than windscreens covered by the provisions of this Annex; 1.1.2. windscreens covered by the requirements for glass panes other than windscreens in this Annex, with the exception of the requirements of point 9.1.4.2 of Annex III C to this Directive (glass panes with a regular light transmittance of less than 70 %). 2. DEFINITIONS For the purposes of this Directive: 2.1. ´toughened-glass pane' means a glass pane consisting of a single layer of glass which has been subjected to special treatment to increase its mechanical strength and condition its fragmentations after shattering; 2.2. ´laminated-glass pane' means a glass pane consisting of two or more layers of glass held together by one or more interlayers of plastic material; it may be: 2.2.1. ´ordinary', where none of the layers of glass of which it is composed have been treated, or 2.2.2. ´treated', where at least one of the layers of glass of which it is composed has been specially treated to increase its mechanical strength and to condition its fragmentation after shattering; 2.3. ´safety glazing coated with plastic material' means a glass pane as defined in point 2.1 or 2.2 with a layer of plastic material on its inner surface; 2.4. ´glass-plastic safety glazing' means a pane of laminated glass having one layer of glass and one or more layers of plastic material at least one of which acts as interlayer. The plastic layers shall be on the inner face when the glazing is fitted on the tractor; 2.5. ´group of windscreens' means a group comprising windscreens of differing sizes and shapes subjected to an examination of their mechanical properties, their mode of fragmentation and their behaviour in environmental resistance tests; 2.5.1. ´flat windscreen' means a windscreen exhibiting no nominal curvature resulting in a height of segment exceeding 10 mm per linear metre; 2.5.2. ´curved windscreen' means a windscreen exhibiting nominal curvature resulting in a height of segment exceeding 10 mm per linear metre; 2.6. ´double window' means a set of two panes installed separately in the same opening on the tractor; 2.7. ´double glazing' means a unit composed of two panes permanently assembled in the factory and separated by a uniform gap; 2.7.1. ´symmetrical double glazing' means double glazing in which the two constituent panes are of the same type (toughened or laminated glass, etc.), and exhibit identical principal and secondary characteristics; 2.7.2. ´asymmetrical double glazing' means double glazing in which the two constituent panes are of a different type (toughened or laminated glass, etc.) or exhibit different principal and/or secondary characteristics; 2.8. ´principal characteristic' means a characteristic which appreciably modifies the optical and/or mechanical properties of a pane of glass in a way not without significance to the function which the glass pane is to perform in a tractor. This term also covers the trade name or mark; 2.9. ´secondary characteristic' means a characteristic capable of modifying the optical and/or mechanical properties of a pane of glass in a way which is of significance to the function which the glass pane is intended to perform in a tractor. The extent of such modification is assessed in relation to the indices of difficulty; 2.10. ´indices of difficulty' covers a two-stage grading system applying to the variations observed in practice in each secondary characteristic. A change from index ´1' to index ´2' indicates the need for additional tests; 2.11. ´developed area of a windscreen' means the minimum rectangular area of glass from which a windscreen can be manufactured; 2.12. ´rake angle of a windscreen' means the angle included between a vertical line and a straight line passing through the top and bottom extremities of the windscreen, both lines lying in a vertical plane along the longitudinal axis of the tractor. 2.12.1. Measurement of the rake angle is performed on an unladen tractor standing on level ground. 2.12.2. Tractors equipped with hydropneumatic, hydraulic or pneumatic suspension or with a device for automatic adjustment of ground clearance according to load are tested in the normal running conditions specified by the manufacturer; 2.13. ´height of segment, h' means the maximum distance, measured at right angles approximately to the glass pane, separating the inner surface of the pane from a pane passing through the ends of the pane, (see Annex III N, Figure 1); 2.14. ´type of glass pane' means a glass pane, as defined in points 2.1 to 2.4, not exhibiting any essential differences in respect, in particular, of the principal and secondary characteristics mentioned in Annexes III D to III L. 2.14.1. Although a change in the principal characteristics implies that the product is of a new type, it is recognized that in certain cases a change in shape and dimension does not necessarily require a complete set of tests to be carried out. For certain of the tests prescribed in the individual Annexes, glass panes may be grouped together if it is evident that they have similar principal characteristics. 2.14.2. Glass panes exhibiting differences only as regards their secondary characteristics may be deemed to be of the same type; certain tests may, however, be carried out on samples of such panes if the performance of those tests is explicitly stipulated in the test conditions; 2.15. ´curvature, r' means the approximate value of the smallest radius of arc of the windscreen as measured in the area of maximum curvature. 3. APPLICATION FOR COMPONENT TYPE-APPROVAL 3.1. The application for EEC component type-approval for a type of glass pane is submitted by the manufacturer of the safety-glass pane or by his duly accredited representative for each type of safety glass. The application may be made in one Member State only. 3.2. For each type of safety glass, the application is accompanied by the undermentioned documents in triplicate and by the following particulars: 3.2.1. a technical description comprising all principal and secondary characteristics; and, 3.2.1.1. in the case of glazing other than windscreens, drawings in a format not exceeding A4 or folded to that format, showing: - the maximum area, - the smallest angle between two adjacent sides of the glass pane, and - the maximum height of segment, if any; 3.2.1.2. In the case of windscreens: 3.2.1.2.1. a list of the models of windscreen for which component type-approval is sought, giving the name of the tractor manufacturers and the type(s) of tractor; 3.2.1.2.2. drawings on a scale 1:10 and diagrams of the windscreens and their installation in the tractor in sufficient detail to show: 3.2.1.2.2.1. the position of the windscreen relative to the R point as defined in point 1.2 of the Annex ´Field of vision' to Council Directive 74/347/EEC of 25 June 1974 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to the field of vision and windscreen wipers for wheeled agricultural or forestry tractors. 3.2.1.2.2.2. the rake angle of the windscreen; 3.2.1.2.2.2. the rake angle of the seat back-rest; 3.2.1.2.2.3. the position and size of the zone in which the optical qualities are verified and, where appropriate, the area subjected to differential toughening; 3.2.1.2.2.4. the developed area of the windscreen; 3.2.1.2.2.5. the maximum height of segment of the windscreen; and 3.2.1.2.2.6. the curvature of the windscreen (for windscreen-grouping purposes only); 3.2.1.3. in the case of double glazing, drawings in a format not exceeding A4 or folded to that format, showing, in addition to the information referred to in point 3.2.1.1: - the type of each constituent glass pane, - the type of bonding (organic, glass-glass or glass-metal), - the nominal thickness of the gap between the two glass panes. 3.3 In addition, the applicant must submit a sufficient number of test pieces and samples of the finished glass panes of the models considered, the number being if necessary determined by agreement with the technical service for conducting the tests. 3.4. The competent authority must verify the existence of satisfactory arrangements for ensuring effective control of conformity of production before component type-approval is granted. 4. MARKINGS 4.1. Every safety-glass pane, including the samples and test-pieces submitted for component type-approval, must bear the trade name or mark of the manufacturer. The marking must be clearly legible and indelible. 5. COMPONENT TYPE-APPROVAL 5.1. If the samples submitted for component type-approval meet the requirements of sections 5 to 7 below, approval of the pertinent type of safety-glass pane is granted. 5.2. A component type-approval number is assigned to each type as defined in Annexes III E, III G, III K and III L, or, in the case of windscreens, to each group approved. Its first two digits (at present 00 for this Directive in its original form) indicate the series of amendments incorporating the most recent major technical amendments made to this Directive at the time of issue of the approval. A Member State may not assign the same number to another type or group of safety-glass panes. 5.3. Component type-approval or extension or refusal of approval for a type of safety-glass pane pursuant to this Directive is communicated to the Member States by means of a notice prepared in accordance with the model set out in Annex III B to this Directive and its Appendices. 5.3.1. In the case of windscreens, the EEC component type-approval notice must be accompanied by a document listing every windscreen model in the approved group, together with the characteristics of the group, in accordance with Appendix 8 to Annex III B. 5.4. In addition to the marking specified in point 4.1, an EEC component type-approval mark must be affixed conspicuously to all safety-glass panes, and double-glazed units conforming to a type approved under this Directive. Any special component type-approval mark assigned to each pane of a double-glazed unit may also be affixed. This component type-approval mark consists of: 5.4.1. a rectangle surrounding the lower-case letter ´e' followed by the distinguishing number of the country which has granted the approval (¹); 5.4.2. the component type-approval number to the right of the rectangle prescribed in point 5.4.1. 5.5. The following additional symbols are affixed near the above EEC type-approval mark: 5.5.1. in the case of a windscreen: III: for toughened glass (I/P if faced) (²), III: for ordinary laminated glass (II/P if faced) (²), III: for treated laminated glass (III/P if faced) (²), IV: for glass-plastic glazing; 5.5.2. V: in the case of a glass pane other than a windscreen covered by the provisions of point 9.1.4.2 of Annex III C; 5.5.3. VI: in the case of a double-glazed unit; 5.5.4. T: in the case of windscreens which comply with the requirements for glass panes other than windscreens, except those coming under the provisions of point 9.1.4.2 of Annex III C to this Directive (glass panes with a regular light transmittance of less than 70 %). However, in the case of windscreens complying with the requirements for glass panes other than windscreens, the symbol ´T' may only be marked after the head-form test defined in point 3.3.2 of Annex III G to this Directive, the height of drop being 4,0 m + 25/-0 mm. 5.6. The EEC component type-approval mark and the symbol must be clearly legible and indelible. 5.7. Appendix I to this Annex gives examples of component type-approval marks. 6. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 6.1. All glass panes, and particularly those intended for the manufacture of windscreens, must be of sufficient quality to reduce the risk of bodily injury as far as possible in the event of the glass shattering. The glass must be sufficiently resistant to the incidents likely to occur in normal traffic, and to atmospheric and temperature conditions, chemical action, combustion and abrasion. 6.2. Safety glass must in addition be sufficiently transparent, must not cause any noticeable distortions of objects as seen through the windscreen, and must not give rise to any confusion between the colours used in road-traffic signs and signals. In the event of the windscreen shattering, the driver must still be able to see the road clearly enough to be able to brake and stop his tractor safely. 7. PARTICULAR REQUIREMENTS All types of safety glass must, depending on the category to which they belong, comply with the following particular requirements: 7.1. as regards toughened-glass windscreens, the requirements contained in Annex III D; 7.2. as regards uniformly toughened glass panes other than windscreens, the requirements contained in Annex III E; 7.3. as regards ordinary laminated-glass windscreens, the requirements contained in Annex III F; 7.4. as regards ordinary laminated-glass panes other than windscreens, the requirements contained in Annex III G; 7.5. as regards treated laminated-glass windscreens, the requirements contained in Annex III H; 7.6. as regards safety-glass panes faced with plastic material, in addition to the relevant requirements listed above, the requirements contained in Annex III I; (¹) 1 for the Federal Republic of Germany, 2 for France, 3 for Italy, 4 for the Netherlands, 6 for Belgium, 9 for Spain, 11 for the United Kingdom, 13 for Luxembourg, 18 for Denmark, 21 for Portugal, IRL for Ireland and EL for Greece. (²) As defined in point 2.3. 7.7. as regards glass-plastic windscreens, the requirements contained in Annex III J; 7.8. as regards glass-plastic panes other than windscreens, the requirements contained in Annex III K; 7.9. as regards double-glazed units, the requirements contained in Annex III L. 8. TESTS 8.1. The following tests are prescribed: 8.1.1. Fragmentation The purpose of this test is: 8.1.1.1. to verify that the fragments and splinters produced by fracture of the pane of glass are such as to minimize the risk of injruy, and 8.1.1.2. in the case of windscreens, to check residual visibility after shattering. 8.1.2. Mechanical strength 8.1.2.1. Ball-impact test This test takes two forms, one using a 227 g ball and the other a 2 260 g ball. 8.1.2.1.1. 227-g-ball test: the purpose of this test is to assess the adhesion of the interlayer in laminated glass and the mechanical strength of uniformly toughened glass. 8.1.2.1.2. 2 260-g-ball test: the purpose of this test is to assess the ball-penetration resistance of laminated glass. 8.1.2.2. Headform test The purpose of this test is to verify the glass pane's compliance with requirements relating to the limitation of injury in the event of impact of the head against the windscreen, laminated glass or glass-plastic panes other than windscreens, and also double-glazed units used as side windows. 8.1.3. Resistance to the environment 8.1.3.1. Abrasion test The purpose of this test is to determine whether the resistance of a safety-glass pane to abrasion exceeds a specified value. 8.1.3.2. High-temperature test The purpose of this test is to verify that no bubbles or other defects occur in the interlayer in a laminated glass or glass-plastic pane when the latter is exposed to high temperatures over an extended period of time. 8.1.3.3. Resistance-to-radiation test The purpose of this test is to determine whether the light transmittance of laminated-glass, glass-plastic or plastic-coated glass panes exposed to radiation over an extended period of time is significantly reduced thereby or whether the glazing is significantly discoloured. 8.1.3.4. Resistance-to-humidity test The purpose of this test is to determine whether a laminated-glass, glass-plastic or plastic-coated glass pane will withstand, without significant deterioration, the effects of prolonged exposure to atmosphere humidity. 8.1.3.5. Resistance to temperature change The purpose of this test is to determine whether the plastic material(s) used in safety glazing as defined in points 2.3 and 2.4 will withstand, without significant deterioration, the effects of prolonged exposure to extreme temperatures. 8.1.4. Optical qualities 8.1.4.1. Light-transmission test The purpose of this test is to determine whether the regular transmittance of safety-glass panes exceeds a specified value. 8.1.4.2. Optical-distortion test The purpose of this test is to verify that the distortion of objects as seen through the windscreen is not such as to be likely to confuse the driver. 8.1.4.3. Secondary-image-separation test The purpose of this test is to verify that the angular separation of the secondary image from the primary image does not exceed a specified value. 8.1.4.4. Identification-of-colours test The purpose of this test is to verify that there is no risk of confusion of colours as seen through a windscreen. 8.1.5. Fire-resistance test The purpose of this test is to verify that the inner face of a safety-glass pane as defined in points 2.3 and 2.4 has a sufficiently low burn rate. 8.1.6. Resistance to chemical agents The purpose of this test is to determine that the inner face of a safety-glass pane as defined in points 2.3 and 2.4 will withstand the effects of exposure to chemicals likely to be present or used within the tractor (e.g. cleaning compounds) without deterioration. 8.2. Tests prescribed for glass panes of the categories defined in points 2.1 to 2.4 8.2.1. Safety-glass panes are subject to the tests listed in the following table: WINDSCREENS GLASS PANES OTHER THAN WINDSCREENS Toughened glass Ordinary laminated glass Treated laminated glass Glass- plastic I I/P II II/P III III/P IV Tough- ened glass Lami- nated glass Glass- plastic Fragmentation D/2 D/2 - - H/4 H/4 - E/2 - - Mechanical strength: - 227 g ball - - F/4.3. F/4.3. F/4.3. F/4.3. F/4.3. E/3.1. G/4 G/4 - 2 260 g ball - - F/4.2. F/4.2. F/4.2. F/4.2. - - - - Headform test (¹) D/3 D/3 F/3 F/3 F/3 F/3 J/3 - G/3 (³) K/3 (³) Abrasion: - outer face - - F/5.1. F/5.1. F/5.1. F/5.1. F/5.1. - F/5.1. F/5.1. - inner face - I/2 - I/2 - I/2 I/2 I/2 (²) I/2 (²) I/2 High temperature - - C/5 C/5 C/5 C/5 C/5 - C/5 C/5 Radiation - C/6 C/6 C/6 C/6 C/6 C/6 - C/6 C/6 Humidity - C/7 C/7 C/7 C/7 C/7 C/7 C/7 (²) C/7 C/7 Light transmission C/9.1. C/9.1. C/9.1. C/9.1. C/9.1. C/9.1. C/9.1. C/9.1. C/9.1. C/9.1. Optical distortion C/9.2. C/9.2. C/9.2. C/9.2. C/9.2. C/9.2. C/9.2. - - - Secondary image C/9.3. C/9.3. C/9.3. C/9.3. C/9.3. C/9.3. C/9.3. - - - Identification of colours C/9.4. C/9.4. C/9.4. C/9.4. C/9.4. C/9.4. C/9.4. - - - Resistance to temperature changes - C/8 - C/8 - C/8 C/8 C/8 (²) C/8 (²) C/8 Fire resistance - C/10 - C/10 - C/10 C/10 C/10 (²) C/10 (²) C/10 Resistance to chemicals - C/11 - C/11 - C/11 C/11 C/11 (²) C/11 (²) C/11 (¹) Furthermore this test must be carried out on double-glazed units pursuant to point 3 of Appendix L. (²) If coated on the inner side with plastic material. (³) This list must be performed with a drop of 4 m + 25/-0 mm instead of 1,5 m + 25/-0 mm when the panes are used as tractor windscreens. NB: A reference such as K 3/3 in the table indicates Annex III K and point 3 of that Annex, where the relevant test is described and the acceptance requirements specified. EWG:L777UMBE06.94 FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 1525 mm; 466 Zeilen; 19471 Zeichen; Bediener: MARK Pr.: C; Kunde: L 777 Umb E 06 10. 3. 89 Official Journal of the European Communities 8.2.2. A safety-glass pane is granted component type-approval if it meets all the requirements prescribed in the relevant provisions referred to in the above table. 9. MODIFICATION OR EXTENSION OF APPROVAL FOR A TYPE OF SAFETY-GLASS PANE 9.1. All modifications to a type of safety-glass pane, or, in the case of windscreens, all additions of windscreens to a group, must be notified to the administrative department which approved the type of safety-glass pane. The department may then either: 9.1.1. consider that the modifications made are unlikely to have an appreciable adverse effect and, in the case of windscreens, that the new type comes within the approved group of windscreens, and that at all events the safety-glass pane still complies with the requirements, or 9.1.2. require a further test report from the technical service responsible for conducting the tests. 9.2. Communication 9.2.1. Confirmation, refusal or extension of component type-approval are communicated to the Member States in accordance with the procedure specified in section 5.3. 9.2.2. The competent authority which has granted an extension of component type-approval must place a serial number on each communication relating to the extension. 10. CONFORMITY OF PRODUCTION 10.1. Safety glazing granted type-approval under this and the following Annexes must be so manufactured as to conform to the approved type and meet the requirements set out in sections 6, 7 and 8. 10.2. To verify that the requirements of 10.1 have been met, constant checks must be carried out on production. 10.3. The holder of the component type-approval must in particular: 10.3.1. ensure that procedures exist for controlling the quality of the product, 10.3.2. have access to the equipment necessary for checking conformity to each approved type, 10.3.3. record data of test results and make the ancillary documents (1) available for a period to be determined in agreement with the administrative department, 10.3.4. analyze the results of each type of test to verify and ensure consistency of the product characteristics, allowing for the permissible variations in industrial production, 10.3.5. ensure that, for each type of product, at least the tests prescribed in Annex III O are carried out, and 10.3.6. ensure that where any samples or test-pieces show non-conformity with the type of test concerned, further samples are taken and tested. All necessary steps must be taken to re-establish conformity in the production concerned. 10.4. The competent authority may at any time verify the methods for checking conformity applicable to each production unit (see point 1.3 of Annex III O). 10.4.1. At every inspection, the test data and production records must be presented to the inspector. 10.4.2. The inspector may take samples at random to be tested in the manufacturer's laboratory. The minimum number of samples may be determined in the light of the results of the manufacturer's own checks. 10.4.3. Where the quality standard appears unsatisfactory or where it appears necessary to verify the validity of the tests carried out under point 10.4.2, the inspector may select samples to be sent to the technical service which conducted the component type-approval test. 10.4.4. The competent authority may carry out any test prescribed in this Directive. 10.4.5. The normal frequency of inspection is two per year. If unsatisfactory results are found during any of these inspections, the competent authority must ensure that all necessary steps are taken to re-establish the conformity of production as quickly as possible. 11. PENALTIES FOR NON-CONFORMITY OF PRODUCTION 11.1. Component type-approval granted in respect of a type of safety-glass pane pursuant to this Directive may be withdrawn if the requirement laid down in point 10.1 is not complied with. 11.2. If a Member State withdraws an approval it has previously granted, it must forthwith notify the other Member States thereof by means of a copy of the component type-approval certificate with ´COMPONENT TYPE-APPROVAL WITHDRAWN' added in large letters at the bottom of the certificate, and signed and dated. 12. PRODUCTION DEFINITELY DICSONTINUED If the holder of component type-approval completely ceases to manufacture a type of safety-glass pane approved in accordance with this Directive, he must inform thereof the authority which granted the approval. That authority must in turn notify the other Member States thereof, by means of a copy of the compound type-approval notice conforming to the model shown in Annex III B to this Directive. 13. NAMES AND ADDRESSES OF THE TECHNICAL SERVICES RESPONSIBLE FOR CONDUCTING COMPONENT TYPE-APPROVAL TESTS AND OF THE ADMINISTRATIVE DEPARTMENTS GRANTING SUCH APPROVAL Each Member State must communicate to the other Member States and the Commission the names and addresses of the technical services responsible for conducting component type-approval tests and of the administrative departments granting EEC component type-approval, to which the component type-approval certificate and certificates indicating refusal or withdrawal of component type-approval issued in the other Member States are to be sent. EWG:L777UMBE6A.96 FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 507 mm; 71 Zeilen; 5369 Zeichen; Bediener: MARK Pr.: C; Kunde: L 777 UMB E 6A 10. 3. 89 Official Journal of the European Communities Appendix EXAMPLES OF COMPONENT TYPE-APPROVAL MARKS (See section 5.5 of Annex III A) Toughened-glass windscreens: The above component type-approval mark, affixed to a toughened-glass windscreen, shows that the component concerned was approved in France (e2) pursuant to this Directive under component type-approval number 001247. Toughened-glass windscreens faced with plastic material The above component type-approval mark affixed to a toughened-glass windscreen faced with plastic material shows that the component concerned was approved in France (e2) pursuant to this Directive under component type-approval number 001247. Ordinary laminated-glass windscreens The above component type-approval mark affixed to an ordinary laminated-glass windscreen shows that the component concerned was approved in France (e2) pursuant to this Directive under component type-approval number 001247. Ordinary laminated-glass windscreens faced with plastic material The above component type-approval mark affixed to an ordinary laminated-glass windscreen faced with plastic material shows that the component concerned was approved in France (e2) pursuant to this Directive under component type-approval number 001247. Threated laminated-glass windscreens The above component type-approval mark affixed to a treated laminated-glass windscreen shows that the component concerned was approved in France (e2) pursuant to this Directive under component type-approval number 001247. Glass-plastic windscreens The above component type-approval mark affixed to a glass-plastic windscreen shows that the component concerned was approved in France (e2) pursuant to this Directive under component type-approval number 001247. Glass panes other than windscreens having a regular light transmittance of less than 70 %: The above component type-approval mark affixed to a glass pane other than a windscreen to which the requirements of Annex III-C section 9.1.4.2., are applicable shows that the component concerned was approved in France (e2) pursuant to this Directive under component type-approval number 001247. Double-glazed units having a regular light transmittance of less than 70 % The above component type-approval mark affixed to a double-glazed unit shows that the component concerned was approved in France (e2) pursuant to this Directive under component type-approval number 001247. Glass panes other than windscreens to be used as windscreens for tractors: The above component type-approval mark affixed to a glass pane shows that the component concerned intended to be used as a windscreen on a tractor was approved in France (e2) pursuant to this Directive under component type-approval number 001247. Glass panes other than windscreens having a regular light transmittance of 70 % more The above component type-approval mark affixed to a glass pane other than a windscreen to which the requirements of point 9.1.4.1 of Annex III C are applicable shows that the component concerned was approved in France (e2) pursuant to this Directive under component type-approval number 001247. EWG:L777UMBE07.95 FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 761 mm; 45 Zeilen; 3270 Zeichen; Bediener: MARK Pr.: C; Kunde: ................................ (1) Fragmentation test results must be recorded even if not photographic print is required. ANNEX III B Name of administration (Maximum format: A 4 (210×297 mm)) Communication on - EEC component type-approval, - refusal of component type-approval, - extension of component type-approval, - withdrawal of component type-approval (1) for a type of safety-glass pane pursuant to Directive 89/173/EEC EEC component type-approval No: . Extension No: . 1. Category of safety-glass pane: . 2. Description of glass pane (see Appendices 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 (2) and, in the case of windscreens, the list conforming with Appendix 8 . . 3. Trade name or mark: . 4. Manufacturer's name and address: . . 5. Name and address of manufacturer's representative where applicable: . . 6. Submitted for component type-approval on: . 7. Technical service responsible for conducting component type-approval tests: . 8. Date of test report: . 9. Number of test report: . 10. Component type-approval granted/refused/extended/withdrawn (3): . 11. Ground(s) for extending type approval: . . . . 12. Remarks: . . . . 13. Place: . 14. Date: . 15. Signature: . 16. A list is attached of the documents comprising the component type-approval file lodged with the administrative department granting the approval; these documents are available on request. Appendix 1 TOUGHENED-GLASS WINDSCREENS (Principal and secondary characteristics as defined in Annex III D or III I) Component type-approval No: . Extension No: . Principal characteristics - Shape category: . - Thickness category: . - Nominal thickness of the windscreen: . - Nature and type of plastic coating(s): . - Thickness of plastic coating(s): . Secondary characteristics - Nature of the material (plate, float, sheet glass): . - Colouring of glass: . - Colouring of plastic coating(s): . - Conductors incorporated (yes/no): - Anti-glare strips incorporated (yes/no): Remarks: . . . . . Documents attached: list of windscreens (see Appendix 8). EWG:L777UMBE08.96 FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 507 mm; 69 Zeilen; 2003 Zeichen; Bediener: MARK Pr.: C; Kunde: 43649 Montan England 08 10. 3. 89 Official Journal of the European Communities Appendix 2 UNIFORMLY TOUGHENED-GLASS PANES OTHER THAN WINDSCREENS (Principal and secondary characteristics as defined in Annex III E or III I) Component type-approval No: . Extension No: . Principal characteristics - Other than windscreens (yes/no): - Windscreen for tractor(s): . - Shape category: . - Nature of toughening process: . - Thickness category: . - Nature and type of plastic coating(s): . Secondary characteristics - Nature of the material (plate, float, sheet glass): . - Colouring of glass: . - Colouring of plastic coating(s): . - Conductors incorporated (yes/no): - Anti-glare strips incorporated (yes/no): Approved criteria - Greatest area (flat glass): . - Smallest angle: . - Greatest developed area (curved glass): . - Greatest height of segment: . Remarks: . . . . . Documents attached: list of windscreens (if applicable) (see Appendix 8). Appendix 3 LAMINATED-GLASS WINDSCREENS (ordinary, treated or plastic-coated) (Principal and secondary characteristics as defined in Annex III F, III H or III I) Component type-approval No: . Extension No: . Principal characteristics - Number of layers of glass: . - Number of layers of interlayer: . - Nominal thickness of the windscreen: . - Nominal thickness of interlayer(s): . - Special treatment of glass: . - Nature and type of interlayer(s): . - Nature and type of plastic coating(s): . Secondary characteristics - Nature of the material (plate, float, shett glass): . - Colouring of glass (colourless/tinted): . - Colouring of plastic coating(s) (total/partial): . - Conductors incorporated (yes/no): - Anti-glare strips incorporated (yes/no): Remarks: . . . . . Documents attached: list of windscreens (see Appendix 8). EWG:L777UMBE09.97 FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 507 mm; 62 Zeilen; 1793 Zeichen; Bediener: MARK Pr.: C; Kunde: 43649 Montan England 09 10. 3. 89 Official Journal of the European Communities Appendix 4 LAMINATED-GLASS PANES OTHER THAN WINDSCREENS (Principal and secondary characteristics as defined in Annex III G or III I) Component type-approval No: . Extension No: . Principal characteristics - Other than windscreens (yes/no): - Windscreens for tractor(s): . - Number of layers of glass: . - Number of layers of interlayer: . - Thickness category: . - Nominal thickness of interlayer(s): . - Special treatment of glass: . - Nature and type of interlayer(s): . - Nature and type of plastic coating(s): . - Thickness of plastic coating(s): . Secondary characteristics - Nature of the material (plate, float, sheet glass): . - Colouring of interlayer (total/partial): . - Colouring of glass: . - Colouring of plastic coating(s): . - Conductors incorporated (yes/no): - Anti-glare strips incorporated (yes/no): Remarks: . . . . . Documents attached: list of windscreens (if applicable) (see Appendix 8). Appendix 5 GLASS-PLASTIC WINDSCREENS (Principal and secondary characteristics as defined in Annex III J) Component type-approval No: . Extension No: . Principal characteristics - Shape category: . - Number of layers of plastic: . - Nominal thickness of glass: . - Treatment of the glass (yes/no): - Nominal thickness of the windscreen: . - Nominal thickness of the layer(s) of plastic acting as interlayer: . - Nature and type of layer(s) of plastic acting as interlayer: . - Nature and type of the outer layer of plastic: . Secondary characteristics - Nature of the material (plate, float, sheet glass): . - Colouring of glass: . - Colouring of the layer(s) of plastic (total/partial): . - Conductors incorporated (yes/no): - Anti-glare strips incorporated (yes/no): Remarks: . . . . . Documents attached: list of windscreens (see Appendix 8). EWG:L777UMBE10.96 FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 507 mm; 61 Zeilen; 1859 Zeichen; Bediener: MARK Pr.: C; Kunde: L 777 EN 10 - 43649 10. 3. 89 Official Journal of the European Communities Appendix 6 GLASS-PLASTIC PANES OTHER THAN WINDSCREENS (Principal and secondary characteristics as defined in Annex III K) Component type-approval No: . Extension No: . Principal characteristics - Other than windscreens (yes/no): - Windscreens for tractor(s): . - Number of layers of plastic: . - Thickness of the glass component: . - Treatment of the glass component (yes/no): - Nominal thickness of the pane: . - Nominal thickness of the layer(s) of plastic acting as interlayer: . - Nature and type of layer(s) of plastic acting as interlayer: . - Nature and type of the outer layer of plastic: . Secondary characteristics - Nature of the material (plate, float, sheet glass): . - Colouring of glass (colourless/tinted): . - Colouring of the layer(s) of plastic (total/partial): . - Conductors incorporated (yes/no): - Anti-glare strips incorporated (yes/no): Remarks: . . . . . Documents attached: list of windscreens (if applicable) (see Appendix 8). Appendix 7 DOUBLE-GLAZED UNITS (Principal and secondary characteristics as defined in Annex III L) Component type-approval No: . Extension No: . Principal characteristics - Composition of double-glazed units (symmetrical/asymmetrical): . - Nominal thickness of the gap: . - Method of assembly: . - Type of each glass as defined in Annexes III E, III G, III I, III K: . Document attached One form for the two panes of a symmetrical double-glazed unit in accordance with the Annex under which the panes have been tested or approved. One form for each glass pane of an asymmetrical double-glazed unit in accordance with the Annexes under which these panes have been tested or approved. Remarks: . . . . . EWG:L777UMBE11.96 FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 507 mm; 53 Zeilen; 1768 Zeichen; Bediener: MARK Pr.: C; Kunde: L 777 EN 11 - 43649 10. 3. 89 Official Journal of the European Communities Appendix 8 CONTENTS OF THE LIST OF WINDSCREENS (¹) For each of the windscreens covered by this component type-approval, at least the following particulars shall be provided: - Tractor manufacturer: . - Type of tractor: . - Developed area (F): . - Height of segment (h): . - Curvature (r): . - Installation angle (a): . - Index point coordinates (A, B, C) relative to the centre of the upper edge of the windscreen: . EWG:L777UMBE12.97 FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 259 mm; 18 Zeilen; 591 Zeichen; Bediener: MARK Pr.: C; Kunde: L 777 EN 12 - 43649 (1) Delete as inapplicable.(2) This list must be attached to Appendices 1, 2 (if applicable), 3 and 5 to this Annex. ANNEX III C GENERAL TEST CONDITIONS 1. FRAGMENTATION TESTS 1.1 The pane of glass to be tested must not be rigidly secured; it may however be fastened on an indentical glass pane by means of adhesive tape applied all round the edge. 1.2. To obtain fragmentation, a hammer of about 75 g or some other appliance giving equivalent results is used. The radius of curvature of the point is 0,2 ± 0,05 mm. 1.3. One test must be carried out at each prescribed point of impact. 1.4. An examination must be made of the fragments on photographic contact paper, exposure commencing not more than 10 seconds and terminating not more than three minutes after impact. Only the darkest lines, representing the initial fracture, are taken into consideration. The laboratory must keep photographic reproductions of the fragmentation obtained. 2. BALL-IMPACT TESTS 2.1. 227-g-ball test 2.1.1. Apparatus 2.1.1.1. Hardened-steel ball with a mass of 227 ± 2 g and a diameter of approximately 38 mm. 2.1.1.2. Device for dropping the ball freely from a height to be specified, or a device for giving the ball a velocity equivalent to that obtained by the free fall. When a device to project the ball is used, the tolerance on velocity must be ± 1 % of the velocity equivalent to that obtained by the free fall. 2.1.1.3. Supporting fixture, such as that shown in Figure 1, composed of steel frames, with machined borders 15 mm wide, fitting one over the other and faced with rubber gaskets about 3 mm thick and 15 mm wide and of hardness 50 IRHD. The lower frame rests on a steel box about 150 mm high. The test-piece is held in place by the upper frame, the mass of which is about 3 kg. The supporting frame is welded on to a sheet of steel about 12 mm thick resting on the floor with an interposed sheet of rubber about 3 mm thick and of hardness 50 IRHD. 2.1.2. Test conditions - Temperature: 20 ± 5 °C. - Pressure: 860 to 1 060 mbar. - Relative humidity: 60 ± 20 %. 2.1.3. Test piece The test piece must be a flat square of side 300 + 10/-0 mm. 2.1.4. Procedure Condition the test piece at the specified temperature for at least four hours immediately proceding the test. Place the test piece in the fixture (2.1.1.3). The plane of the test piece must be perpendicular, within 3°, to the incident direction of the ball. The point of impact must be within 25 mm of the geometric centre of the test piece for a drop height of 6 m or less, and within 50 mm of the centre of the test piece for a drop height greater than 6 m. The ball must strike that face of the test piece which represents the outside face of the safety-glass pane when mounted on the vehicle. The ball is allowed to make only one impact. 2.2. 2 260-g-ball test 2.2.1. Apparatus 2.2.1.1. Hardened-steel ball with a mass of 2 260 ± 20 g and a diameter of approximately 82 mm. 2.2.1.2. Device for dropping the ball freely from a height to be specified, or a device for giving the ball a velocity equivalent to that obtained by the free fall. When a device to project the ball is used, the tolerance on velocity must be ± 1 % of the velocity equivalent to that obtained by the free fall. 2.2.1.3. The supporting fixture is as shown in Figure 1 and identical with that described in point 2.1.1.3. 2.2.2. Test conditions - Temperature: 20 ± 5 °C. - Pressure: 860 to 1 060 mbar. - Relative humidity: 60 ± 20 %. 2.2.3. Test piece The test piece must be a flat square of side 300 + 10/-0 mm or cut out from the flattest part of a windscreen or other curved pane of safety glass. Alternatively, the whole windscreen or other curved pane of safety glass may be tested. In this case care must be taken to ensure adequate contact between the safety-glass pane and the support. 2.2.4. Procedure Condition the test piece at the specified temperature for at least four hours immediately proceding the test. Place the test piece in the fixture (2.1.1.3). The plane of the test piece must be perpendicular, within 3°, to the incident direction of the ball. In the case of glass-plastic glazing the test piece is clamped to the support. The point of impact must be within 25 mm of the geometric centre of the test piece. The ball must strike that face of the test piece which represents the inward face of the safety-glass pane when the latter is mounted on the vehicle. The ball is allowed to make only one impact. 3. HEADFORM TEST 3.1. Apparatus 3.1.1. Headform weight with a spherical or semi-spherical headform made of laminated hardwood covered with replaceable felt and with or without a cross-beam made of wood. There is a neck-shaped intermediate piece between the spherical part and the cross-beam and a mounting rod on the other side of the cross-beam. The dimensions are in accordance with Figure 2. The total mass of the apparatus is 10 ± 0,2 kg. 3.1.2. Device for dropping the headform weight freely from a height to be specified, or device for giving the weight a velocity equivalent to that obtained by the free fall. When a device to project the headform weight is used, the tolerance on velocity must be ± 1 % of the velocity equivalent to that obtained by the free fall. 3.1.3. Supporting fixture, as shown in Figure 3, for testing flat test pieces. The fixture is composed of two steel frames, with machined borders 50 mm wide, fitting one over the other and faced with rubber gaskets about 3 mm thick and 15 ± 1 mm wide and a hardness 70 IRHD. The upper frame is held pressed against the lower frame by at least eight bolts. 3.2. Test conditions 3.2.1. - Temperature: 20 ± 5 °C. 3.2.2. - Pressure: 860 to 1 060 mbar. 3.2.3. - Relative humidity: 60 ± 20 %. EWG:L777UMBE13.94 FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 761 mm; 92 Zeilen; 5736 Zeichen; Bediener: MARK Pr.: C; Kunde: L 777 England 13 10. 3. 89 Official Journal of the European Communities 3.3. Procedure 3.3.1. Test on a flat test piece The flat test piece, having a length of 1 100 + 5/-2 mm and a width of 500 + 5 /-2 mm is kept at a constant temperature of 20 ± 5 °C for at least four hours immediately preceding the test. Fix the test piece in the supporting frames (3.1.3); tighten the bolts so as to ensure that the movement of the test piece during the test does not exceed 2 mm. The plane of the test piece must be substantially perpendicular to the incident direction of the weight. The weight must strike the test piece within 40 mm of its geometric centre on that face which represents the inward face of the safety-glass pane when the latter is mounted on the vehicle, and be allowed to make only one impact. The impact surface of the felt cover is to be replaced after 12 tests. 3.3.3. Tests on a complete windscreen (used only for a drop height of less than or equal to 1,5 m) Place the windscreen freely on a support with an interposed strip of rubber of hardness 70 IRHD and thickness about 3 mm, the width of contact over the whole perimeter being about 15 mm. The support consists of a rigid piece corresponding to the shape of the windscreen so that the headform weight strikes the internal surface. If necessary, the support must rest on a rigid stand with an interposed sheet of rubber of hardness 70 IRHD and thickness about 3 mm. The surface of the windscreen must be substantially perpendicular to the incident direction of the headform weight. The headform weight must strike the windscreen at a point within 40 mm of its geometric centre on that face which represents the inward face of the safety glass pane when the latter is mounted on the vehicle, and be allowed to make only one impact. The impact surface of the felt cover is to be replaced after 12 tests. 4. ABRASION TEST 4.1. Apparatus 4.1.1. Abrading instrument (1), shown diagrammatically in Figure 4 and consisting of: - a horizontal turntable, with centre clamp, which revolves counter-clockwise at 65 to 75 rev/min, and - two weighted parallel arms each carrying a special abrasive wheel freely relating on a ball-bearing horizontal spindle; each wheel rests on the test specimen under the pressure exerted by a mass of 500 g. The turntable of the abrading instrument must rotate regularly, substantially in one plane (the deviation from this plane must not be greater than ± 0,05 mm at a distance of 1,6 mm from turntable periphery). The wheels must be mounted in such a way that when they are in contact with the rotating test piece they rotate in opposite directions so as to exert, twice during each rotation of the test piece, a compressive and abrasive action along curved lines over an annular area of about 30 cm². 4.1.2. Abrasive wheels (2), each 45 to 50 mm in diameter and 12,5 mm thick, composed of a special finely screened abrasive embedded in a medium-hard rubber. The wheels must have a hardness of 72 ± 5 IRHD, as measured at four points equally spaced on the centre line of the abrading surface, the pressure being applied vertically along a diameter of the wheel and the readings being taken 10 seconds after full application of the pressure. The abrasive wheels must be prepared for use by very slow rotation against a sheet of flat glass to ensure that their surface is completely even. 4.1.3. Light source consisting of an incandescent lamp with its filament contained within a parallel pipe measuring 1,5 mm×1,5 mm×3 mm. The voltage must be stabilized within ± 1/1 000. The instrument used to check the voltage must be of appropriate accuracy. 4.1.4. Optical system consisting of a lens with a focal length, f, of at least 500 mm and corrected for chromatic aberrations. The full aperture of the lens must not exceed f/20. The distance between the lens and the light source is adjusted in order to obtain a light beam which is substantially parallel. A diaphragm is inserted to limit the diameter of the light beam to 7 mm ± 1 mm. This diaphragm must be situated at a distance of 100 ± 50 mm from the lens on the side remote from the light source. 4.1.5. Equipment for measuring scattered light (see Figure 5), consisting of a photoelectric cell with an integrating sphere 200 to 250 mm in diameter. The sphere is equipped with entrance and exit ports for the light. The entrance port must be circular and have a diameter at least twice that of the light beam. The exit port of the sphere is provided with either a light trap or a reflectance standard, according to the procedure as described in point 4.4.3 below. The light trap absorbs all the light when no test piece is inserted in the light beam. The axis of the light beam must pass through the centre of the entrance and exit ports. The diameter, b, of the light-exit port must be equal to 2a · tan 4°, where a is the diameter of the sphere. The photoelectric cell must be mounted in such a way that it cannot be reached by light coming directly from the entrance port or from the reflectance standard. The surfaces of the interior of the integrating sphere and the reflectance standard must be of substantially equal reflectance and matt and non-selective. The output of the photoelectric cell must be linear within ± 2 % over the range of luminous intensities used. The design of the instrument must be such that there is no galvanometer deflection when the sphere is dark. The whole apparatus must be checked at regular intervals by means of calibration standards of defined haze. If haze measurements are made using equipment or methods differing from those defined above, the results must be corrected, if necessary, to bring them into agreement with those obtained by the apparatus described above. 4.2. Test conditions 4.2.1. Temperature: 20 ± 5 °C. 4.2.2. Pressure: 860 to 1 060 mbar. 4.2.3. Relative humidity: 60 ± 20 %. 4.3. Test pieces The test pieces must be flat squares whose sides measure 100 mm having both surfaces substantially plane and parallel and if necessary having a fixing hole 6,4 + 0,2/-0 mm in diameter drilled in the centre. 4.4. Procedure The abrasion test is carried out on that surface of the test piece which represents the outside face of the safety-glass pane when the latter is mounted on the vehicle and also on the inward-face in the case of a glasspane with a plastic coating. 4.4.1. Immediately before and after the abrasion, clean the test pieces in the following manner: (a) wipe with a linen cloth under clean running water; (b) rinse with distilled or demineralized water; (c) blow dry with oxygen or nitrogen; (d) remove possible traces of water by dabbing softly with a damp linen cloth. If necessary, dry by pressing lightly between two linen cloths. Any treatment with ultrasonic equipment must be avoided. After cleaning, the test pieces must be handled only by their edges and stored to prevent damage to, or contamination of, their surfaces. 4.4.2. Condition the test pieces for a minimum time of 48 hours at a temperature of 20 ± 5 °C and a relative humidity of 60 ± 20 %. EWG:L777UME13A.96 FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 761 mm; 99 Zeilen; 7411 Zeichen; Bediener: MARK Pr.: C; Kunde: L 777 Umb E 13 A 10. 3. 89 Official Journal of the European Communities 4.4.3. Immediately place the test piece against the entrance port of the integrating sphere. The angle between the normal (perpendicular) to the surface of the test piece and the axis of the beam must not exceed 8°. Take four readings as indicated in the following table: Reading With test piece With light trap With reflectance standard Quantity represented T1 No No Yes Incident light T2 Yes No Yes Total light transmitted by test piece T3 No Yes No Light scattered by instrument T4 Yes Yes No Light scattered by instrument and test piece Repeat readings T1, T2, T3 and T4 with other specified positions of the test piece to determine uniformity. Calculate the total transmittance Tt = T2/T1. Calculate the diffuse transmittance Td as follows: Td = Td = T4-T3 (T2/T1) T1 Calculate the percentage haze, or light, or both, scattered, as follows: Td × 100 % Td Tt × 100 % Measure the initial haze of the test piece at a minimum of four equally spaced points in the unabraded area in accordance with the formula above. Average the results for each test piece. In lieu of the four measurements, an average value may be obtained by rotating the piece uniformly at 3 rev/sec or more. For each safety-glass pane, carry out three tests with the same kind. Use the haze as a measure of the subsurface abrasion, after the test piece has been subjected to the abrasion test. Measure the light scattered by the abraded track at a minimum of four equally spaced points along the track in accordance with the formula above. Average the results for each test piece. In lieu of the four measurements, an average value may be obtained by rotating the piece uniformly at 3 rev/sec or more. 4.5 The abrasion test to be carried out only at the discretion of the laboratory conducting the test with due regard to the information already at its disposal, e.g. changes in the interlayer or material thickness will not normally necessitate further testing. 4.6. Indices of difficulty of the secondary characteristics. No secondary characteristics are involved. 5. HIGH-TEMPERATURE TEST 5.1. Procedure Heat to 100 °C three test samples or three test pieces of at least 300 mm×300 mm taken by the laboratory from three windscreens or three glass panes other than windscreens, as appropriate, one of whose dimensions corresponds to the upper edge of the pane. Maintain this temperature for a period of two hours, then allow the test sample(s) to cool to room temperature. If the safety-glass pane has both external surfaces of inorganic material, the test may be carried out by immersing the test sample vertically in boiling water for the specified period of time, care being taken to avoid undue thermal shock. If specimens are cut from windscreens, one edge of each such test specimen shall be part of an edge of the windscreen. 5.2. Indices of difficulty of the secondary characteristics Colourless Tinted Colouring of the interlayer: 1 2 The other secondary characteristics are not involved. 5.3. Interpretation of results 5.3.1. The test for resistance to high temperature is considered to give a positive result if bubbles or other defects are not formed more than 15 mm from an uncut edge or 25 mm from a cut edge of the test piece or sample or more than 10 mm from any cracks which may occur during the test. 5.3.2. A set of test pieces or samples submitted for component type-approval are considered satisfactory from the point of view of the high-temperature resistance test if either of the following conditions is fulfilled: 5.3.2.1. all the tests give a satisfactory result, or 5.3.2.2. one test having given an unsatisfactory result, a further series of tests carried out on a new set of test pieces or samples give satisfactory results. 6. RESISTANCE-TO-RADIATION TEST 6.1. Test method 6.1.1. Apparatus 6.1.1.1. Radiation source consisting of a medium-pressure mercury-vapour arc lamp with a tubular quartz bulb of ozone-free type; the bulb axis is vertical. The nominal dimensions of the lamp are 360 mm in length by 9,5 mm in diameter. The arc length is 300 ± 4 mm. The lamp must be operated at 750 ± 50 W. Any other source of radiation which produces the same effects as the lamp specified above may be used. To check that the effects of another source are the same, a comparison is made by measuring the amount of energy emitted within a wavelength range of 300 to 450 mm, all other wavelengths being removed by the use of suitable filters. The alternative source is then used with these filters. In the case of safety-glass panes for which there is no satisfactory correlation between this test and the conditions of use it will be necessary to review the test conditions. 6.1.1.2. Power supply transformer and capacitor capable of supplying to the lamp (6.1.1.1) a starting peak-voltage of 1 100 V minimum and an operating voltage of 500 ± 50 V. 6.1.1.3. Device for mounting and rotating the test specimens at 1 to 5 rev/min about the centrally located radiation source in order to ensure even exposure. 6.1.2. Test pieces 6.1.2.1. The size of the test pieces is 76 mm×300 mm. 6.1.2.2. The test pieces are cut by the laboratory from the upper part of the panes in such a way that: - in the case of glass panes other than windscreens the upper edge of the test pieces coincides with the upper edge of the panes, - in the case of windscreens the upper edge of the test pieces coincides with the upper limit of the zone in which regular transmittance is to be checked and determined in accordance with point 9.1.2.2 of this Annex. 6.1.3. Procedure Check the regular light transmittance, determined in accordance with points 9.1.1 to 9.1.2 of this Annex, of three test samples before exposure. Protect a portion of each sample from the radiation, and then place the sample in the test apparatus 230 mm from and parallel lengthwise to the lamp axis. Maintain the temperature of the samples at 45 ± 5 °C throughout the test. That face of each test sample which would constitute a grazed exterior part of the tractor must face the lamp. For the type of lamp specified in point 6.1.1.1 the exposure time is 100 hours. After exposure, measure the regular light transmittance again in the exposed area of each sample. 6.1.4. Each test piece or sample (three in total) is subjected, in accordance with the procedure above, to radiation such that the radiation on each point of the test piece or sample produces on the interlayer used the same effect as that which would be produced by solar radiation of 1 400 W/m² for 100 hours. 6.2. Indices of difficulty of the secondary characteristics Colourless Tinted Colouring of glass 2 1 Colouring of interlayer 1 2 The other secondary characteristics are not involved. 6.3. Interpretation of results 6.3.1. The test for resistance to radiation is deemed to have given a positive result if the following conditions are fulfilled: 6.3.1.1. the total light transmittance measured in accordance with sections 9.1.1 to 9.1.2 of this Annex does not fall below 95 % of the original value before irradiation and, in any case does not fall below: 6.3.1.1.1. 70 % in the case of glass panes other than windscreens which must meet the requirements concerning the driver's field of vision in all directions; 6.3.1.1.2. 75 % in the case of windscreens, within the zone in which regular transmittance is to be checked, as defined in point 9.1.2.2 below. 6.3.1.2. The test piece or sample may however show a slight coloration after irradiation when examined against a white background, but no other defect may be apparent. 6.3.2. A set of test pieces or samples submitted for component type-approval is considered satisfactory from the point of view of the resistance to radiation test if one of the following conditions is fulfilled: 6.3.2.1. all tests give a satisfactory result, or 6.3.2.2. one test having given an unsatisfactory result, a further series of tests carried out on a new set of test pieces or samples give satisfactory results. 7. RESISTANCE-TO-HUMIDITY TEST 7.1. Procedure Keep three test samples or three test pieces at least 300 mm×300 mm square vertically for two weeks in a closed container in which the temperature is maintained at 50 ± 2 °C and the relative humidity at 95 % ± 4 % (3). Test pieces are prepared in such a way that: - one edge of each test piece is part of an original edge of the windscreen, - should several test pieces be tested at the same time, adequate spacing must be provided between them. Precautions must be taken to prevent condensation from the walls or ceiling of the test chamber from falling on the test specimens. 7.2. Indices of difficulty of the secondary characteristics Colourless Tinted Colouring of interlayer 1 2 The other secondary characteristics are not involved. EWG:L777UME13B.96 FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 761 mm; 183 Zeilen; 8901 Zeichen; Bediener: MARK Pr.: C; Kunde: L 777 England 13 B 10. 3. 89 Official Journal of the European Communities 7.3. Interpretation of results 7.3.1. Safety-glass panes are deemed to be satisfactory from the point of view of resistance to humidity if no significant change is observed more than 10 mm from the uncut edges or more than 15 mm from the cut edges, following a stay of two hours in the ambient atmosphere by ordinary and treated laminated glass, and of 48 hours in the ambient atmosphere by plastic-coated glass panes and plastic glazing. 7.3.2. A set of test pieces or samples submitted for component type-approval is considered satisfactory from the point of view of the resistance to humidity test if one of the following conditions is fulfilled: 7.3.2.1. all the tests give a satisfactory result; 7.3.2.2. one test having given an unsatisfactory result, a further series of tests carried out on a new set of samples give satisfactory results. 8. TESTING OF RESISTANCE TO CHANGES IN TEMPERATURE 8.1. Test method Two 300×300 mm test pieces are placed in an enclosed chamber for six hours at a temperature of -40 ± 5 °C; they are then placed in the ambient air at a temperature of 23 ± 2 °C for an hour, or until the test piece has reached a stable temperature. They are then placed in an air flow at a temperature of 72 ± 2 °C for three hours. The test pieces are then examined after they have been returned to the ambient air at 23 ± 2 °C and cooled to that temperature. 8.2. Index of difficulty of the secondary characteristics Colourless Tinted Colourless Tinted Colouring of plastic interlayer or coating 1 2 No other secondary characteristics are involved. 8.3. Interpretation of results The test of resistance to changes in temperature is considered to have given a positive result if the test pieces display no cracking, opacification, exfoliation or other obvious deterioration. 9. OPTICAL QUALITIES 9.1. Light transmission test 9.1.1. Apparatus 9.1.1.1. Light source consisting of an incandescent lamp having its filament contained within a parallelepiped measuring 1,5 mm×1,5 mm×3 mm. The voltage at the lamp filament must be such that the colour temperature is 2 856 K ± 50 K. This voltage is stabilized within ± ¹/1000. The instrument used to check the voltage must be of appropriate accuracy. 9.1.1.2. Optical system consisting of a lens with a focal length of at least 500 mm and corrected for chromatic aberrations. The full aperture of the lens must not exceed f/20. The distance between the lens and the light source must be so adjusted as to obtain a light beam which is substantially parallel. A diaphragm is inserted to limit the diameter of the light beam to 7 ± 1 mm. This diaphragm is situated at a distance of 100 ± 50 mm from the lens on the side remote from the light source. The point of measurement is taken at the centre of the light beam. 9.1.1.3. Measuring equipment. The receiver must have a relative spectral sensitivity in substantial agreement with the relative spectral luminous efficiency for the ICI (4) standard photometric observer for photopic vision. The sensitive surface of the receiver is covered with a diffusing medium and must have at least twice the cross-section of the light beam emitted by the optical system. If an integrating sphere is used, the aperture of the sphere must have a cross-sectional area at least twice that of the parallel portion of the beam. The linearity of the receiver and the associated indicated instrument must be better than 2 % of the effective part of the scale. 9.1.2. Procedure So adjust the instrument indicating the response of the receiver that it indicates 100 divisions when the safety-glass pane is not inserted in the light path. When no light is falling on the receiver, the instrument must read zero. Place the safety-glass pane at a distance from the receiver equal to approximately five times the diameter of the receiver. Insert the safety-glass pane between the diaphragm and the receiver and adjust its orientation in such a way that the angle of incidence of the light beam is equal to 0° ± 5°. The regular transmittance is measured on the safety-glass pane, and for every point measured the number of divisions, n, shown on the indicating instrument, are read. The regular transmittance tr is equal to n/100. 9.1.2.1. In the case of windscreens, alternative test methods may be applied using either a test sample cut from the flattest part of a windscreen or a specially prepared flat square with material and thickness characteristics identical to those of the actual windscreen, the measurements being taken normal (perpendicular) to the glass pane. 9.1.2.2. The test is carried out in the zone I specified in point 9.2.5.2 of this Annex. 9.1.2.3. In the case of tractors for which it is not possible to determine zone I, the test is carried out in zone Im as defined in point 9.2.5.3 of this Annex. 9.1.3. Indices of difficulty of the secondary characteristics not included included Colourless Tinted Colouring of the glass 1 2 Colouring of the interlayer (in the case of laminated windscreens) 1 2 not included included Shade and/or obscuration bands 1 2 The other secondary characteristics are not involved. 9.1.4. Interpretation of results 9.1.4.1. The regular transmittance measured according to section 9.1.2 in the case of windscreens must not be less than 75 %, and in the case of windows other than windscreens not less than 70 %. 9.1.4.2. In the case of windows situated at points which are not essential to the driver's field of vision (glazed roof, for example) the regular transmittance factor of the light from the pane may be less than 70 %. Windows having a regular light transmittance factor of less than 70 % must be marked with an appropriate symbol. 9.2. Optical-distortion test 9.2.1. Scope The method specified is a projection method which permits evaluation of the optical distortion of a safety-glass pane. 9.2.1.1. Definitions 9.2.1.1.1. Optical deviation: the angle between the true and the apparent direction of a point viewed through the safety-glass pane, the magnitude of the angle being a function of the angle of incidence of the line of sight, the thickness and inclination of the glass pane, and the radius of curvature at the point of incidence. 9.2.1.1.2. Optical distortion in a direction MMm: the algebraic difference in angular deviation Da measured between two points M and Mm on the surface of the safety-glass pane, the distance between the two points being such that their projections in a plane at right angles to the direction of vision are separated by a given distance Dx (see Figure 6). Anti-clockwise deviation is to be regarded as positive and clockwise deviation as negative. 9.2.1.1.3. Optical distortion at a point M: the optical distortion maximum for all directions MMm from the point M. EWG:L777UME13C.95 FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 511 mm; 113 Zeilen; 6865 Zeichen; Bediener: JUTT Pr.: C; Kunde: L 777 EN 13c - 43649 10. 3. 89 Official Journal of the European Communities 9.2.1.2. Apparatus This method entails the projection of an appropriate slide (raster) on to the display screen through the safety-glass pane being tested. The change caused in the shape of the projected image by the insertion of the safety-glass pane in the line of light provides a measures of the distortion. The apparatus comprises the following items, arranged as shown in Figure 9. 9.2.1.2.1. Projector, of good quality, with a high-intensity point light source, having for example the following characteristics: - focal length at least 90 mm, - aperture approximately 1/2,5, - 150 W quartz halogen lamp (if used without a filter), - 250 W quartz halogen lamp (if a green filter is used). The projector is shown schematically in Figure 7. A diaphragm of 8 mm diameter is positioned approximately 10 mm from the front lens. 9.2.1.2.2. Slides (rasters) consisting, for example, of an array of bright circular shapes on a dark background (see Figure 8). The slide must be of sufficiently high quality and contrast to enable measurement to be carried out with an error of less than 5 %. In the absence of the safety-glass pane to be examined, the dimensions of the circular shapes must be such that when the circular shapes are projected they R1 + R2 form an array of circles of diameter R1 + R2 R1 Dx where Dx = 4 mm (see Figures 6 and 9). 9.2.1.2.3. Support stand, preferably one permitting vertical and horizontal scanning, as well as rotation of the safety-glass pane. 9.2.1.2.4. Checking template, for measuring changes in dimensions where a rapid assessment is required. A suitable design is shown in Figure 10. 9.2.1.3. Procedure 9.2.1.3.1. General Mount the safety-glass pane on the support stand (9.2.1.2.3) at the designated rake angle. Project the test image through the area being examined. Rotate the safety-glass pane or move it either horizontally or vertically in order to examine the whole of the specified area. 9.2.1.3.2. Assessment using a checking template Where a rapid assessment with a possible margin of error of up to 20 % is sufficient, calculate the value of A (see Figure 10) from the limit value DaL for the change in deviation and the value of R2, the distance from the safety-glass pane to the display screen: A = 0,145 DaL · R2 The relationship between the change in diameter of the projected image Dd and the change in angular deviation Da is given by: Dd = 0,29 Da · R2 where: Dd is expressed in millimetres, A is expressed in millimetres, DaL is expressed in minutes of arc, Da is expressed in minutes of arc, and R2 is expressed in metres. 9.2.1.3.3. Measurement using a photoelectric device Where a precise measurement with a possible margin of error of less than 10 % of the limit value is required, measure Dd on the projection axis, the value of the spot width being taken at the point where the luminance is 0,5 times the maximum spot luminance value. 9.2.1.4. Expression of results Evaluate the optical distortion of the safety-glass panes by measuring Dd at any point of the surface and in all directions in order to find Dd max. 9.2.1.5. Alternative method In addition, a strioscopic technique is permitted as an alternative to the projection techniques, provided that the accuracy of the measurements given in points 9.2.1.3.2 and 9.2.1.3.3 is maintained. 9.2.1.6. The distance Dx must be 4 mm. 9.2.1.7. The windscreen must be mounted at the same rake angle as on the tractor. EWG:L777UME13D.95 FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 761 mm; 63 Zeilen; 3592 Zeichen; Bediener: MARK Pr.: C; Kunde: 43649 l777ume13d 10. 3. 89 Official Journal of the European Communities 9.2.1.8. The projection axis in the horizontal plane must be maintained approximately normal to the trace of the windscreen in that plane. 9.2.2. The measurements are performed in zone I as prescribed in point 9.2.5.2 of this Annex. 9.2.2.1. In the case of tractors for which it is not possible to determine zone I as defined in point 9.2.5.3 of this Annex, the test is carried out in zone Im, as defined in point 9.2.5.3 of this Annex. 9.2.2.2. Tractor type The test must be repeated if the windscreen is to be mounted on a tractor of a type which has a different forward field of vision from that of the tractor type for which the windscreen has already been approved. 9.2.3. Indices of difficulty of the secondary characteristics 9.2.3.1. Nature of the material Polished (plate) glass Float glass Sheet glass Polished (plate) glass Float glass Sheet glass 1 1 2 9.2.3.2. Other secondary characteristics No other secondary characteristics are involved. 9.2.4. Number of samples Four samples must be submitted for testing. 9.2.5. Definition of the zone of vision of tractor windscreens. 9.2.5.1. The zone of vision is defined on the basis of: 9.2.5.1.1. the reference point as defined in point 1.2 of the Annex ´Field of vision' to Council Directive 74/347/EEC of 25 June 1974 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to the field of vision and windscreen wipers for wheeled agricultural and forestry tractors. This point is designated as O below; 9.2.5.1.2. the straight line OQ which is the horizontal straight line passing through the reference point and perpendicular to the median longitudinal plane of the tractor; 9.2.5.2. zone I is the windscreen zone determined by the intersection of the windscreen with the four planes defined below: P1 - a vertical plane passing through O and forming an angle of 15° to the left of the median longitudinal plane of the tractor, P2 - a vertical plane symmetrical to P1 about the median longitudinal plane of the tractor. If this is not possible (in the absence of a symmetrical median longitudinal plane, for instance) P2 is the plane symmetrical to P1 about the longitudinal plane of the tractor passing through the reference point, P3 - a plane passing through the straight line OQ and forming an angle of 10° above the horizontal plane, P4 - a plane passing through the straight line OQ and forming an angle of 8° below the horizontal plane. 9.2.5.3. In the case of tractors for which it is not possible to determine zone I, as defined in point 9.2.5.2 of this Annex, zone Im consists of the whole surface of the windscreen. 9.2.6. Interpretation of results A type of windscreen is considered satisfactory as regards optical distortion if, in the four samples submitted for testing, optical distortion does not exceed a maximum value of 2m of an arc in either zone I or zone Im. 9.2.6.1. No measurement must be performed within a 100-mm-wide peripheral zone. 9.2.6.2. In the case of divided windscreens, no measurement is performed within a band 35 mm in width, starting from the edge of the pane, which may be adjacent to the screen divider. 9.3. Secondary-image separation test 9.3.1. Scope Two test methods are recognized: - target test, and - collimation telescope test. These test methods may be used for component type-approval, quality-control or product-evaluation purposes, as appropriate. 9.3.1.1. Target test 9.3.1.1.1. Apparatus This method involves viewing an illuminated target through the safety-glass pane. The target may be designed in such a way that the test can be carried out on a simple go/no go basis. The target must preferably be of one of the following types: (a) an illuminated ring target whose outer diameter, D, subtends an angle of n minutes of arc at a point situated at x metres (Figure 11a); or (b) an illuminated ring and spot target whose dimensions are such that the distance, D, from a point on the edge of the spot to the nearest point on the inside of the circle subtends an angle of n minutes of arc at a point situated at x metres (Figure 11b); where: n is the limit value of secondary-image separation, x is the distance from the safety-glass pane to the target (not less than 7 m), D is given by the formula: D = x · tan n The illuminated target consists of a light box, approximately 300 mm×300 mm×150 mm, whose front is most conveniently constructed of glass masked with opaque black paper or coated with matt black paint. The box is illuminated by a suitable light source. The inside of the box is coated with matt white paint. It may be convenient to use other forms of target, such as that shown in Figure 14. It is also acceptable to replace the target system by a projection system and to view the resulting images on a screen. 9.3.1.1.2. Procedure Mount the safety-glass pane at the specified rake angle on a suitable stand in such a way that the observation is carried out in the horizontal plane passing through the centre of the target. The light box must be viewed, in a dark or semi-dark room, through each part of the area being examined, in order to detect the presence of any secondary image associated with the illuminated target. Rotate the safety-glass pane as necessary to ensure that the correct direction of view is maintained. A monocular may be used for viewing. 9.3.1.1.3. Expression of results Determine whether: - when target (a) (see figure 11a) is used, the primary and secondary image of the circle separate, i.e. whether the limit value of n is exceeded, or - when target (b) (see figure 11b) is used, the secondary image of the spot shifts beyond the point of tangency with the inside edge of the circle, i.e. whether the limit value of n is exceeded. EWG:L777UME13E.96 FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 511 mm; 95 Zeilen; 5778 Zeichen; Bediener: MARK Pr.: C; Kunde: 43649 L ... 10. 3. 89 Official Journal of the European Communities 9.3.1.2. Collimation telescope test If necessary, the procedure described in this section is applied. 9.3.1.2.1. Apparatus The apparatus comprises a collimator and a telescope and may be set up in accordance with Figure 13. However, any equivalent optical system may be used. 9.3.1.2.2. Procedure The collimation telescope forms at infinity the image of a polar-coordinate system with a bright point at its centre (see Figure 14). In the focal plane of the observation telescope, a small opaque spot with a diameter slightly larger than of the projected bright point is placed on the optical axis, thus obscuring the bright point. 9.3.1.2.2. When a test piece which exhibits a secondary image is placed between the telescope and the collimator, a second, less bright point appears at a certain distance from the centre of the polar-coordinate system. The secondary-image separation can be read out as the distance between the points seen through the observation telescope (see Figure 14). (The distance between the dark spot and the bright point at the centre of the polar-coordinate system represents the optical deviation.) 9.3.1.2.3. Expression of results The safety-glass pane is first examined by a simple scanning technique to establish the area giving the strongest secondary image. That area is then examined by the collimator telescope system at the appropriate angle of incidence. The maximum secondary-image separation is measured. 9.3.1.3. The direction of observation in the horizontal plane must be maintained approximately normal to the trace of the windscreen in that plane. 9.3.2. The measurements are performed according to tractor category in the zones defined in section 9.2.2. 9.3.2.1. Tractor type The test must be repeated if the windscreen is to be mounted on a tractor of a type which has a forward field of vision different from that of the tractor for which the windscreen has already been approved. 9.3.3. Indices of difficulty of the secondary characteristics 9.3.3.1. Nature of the material Polished (plate) glass Float glass Sheet glass Polished (plate) glass Float glass Sheet glass 1 1 2 9.3.3.2. Other secondary characteristics No other secondary characteristics are involved. 9.3.4. Number of samples Four samples must be submitted for testing. 9.3.5. Interpretation of results A type of windscreen is considered satisfactory as regards secondary-image separation if, in the four samples submitted for testing, separation of the primary and secondary image does not exceed a maximum value of 15m of an arc. 9.3.5.1. No measurement must be carried out in a 100 mm-wide peripheral zone. 9.3.5.2. In the case of divided windscreens no measurement may be performed within a band 35 mm in width, starting from the edge of the pane, which may be adjacent to the screen divider. 9.4. Identification of colours test When a windscreen is tinted in the zones defined in 9.2.5.2 or 9.2.5.3, four windscreens are tested for identifiability of the following colours: white, selective yellow, red, green, blue, amber. 10. FIRE-RESISTANCE TEST 10.1. Purpose and scope of application This method enables the horizontal burning rate of materials used in the occupant compartment of tractors after exposure to a small flame to be determined. This method permits testing of materials and components of a tractor's interior equipment individually or in combination up to a thickness of 15 mm. It is used to judge the uniformity of production lots of such materials with respect to their burning behaviour. Because of the many differences between the real-world situation (application and orientation within a tractor; conditions of use; ignition source, etc.) and the precise test conditions prescribed herein, this method cannot be considered as suitable for evaluation of all true in-tractor burning characteristics. 10.2. Definitions 10.2.1. Burning rate: the quotient of the burnt distance measured according to this method and the time taken to burn that distance. It is expressed in millimetres per minute. 10.2.2. Composite material: a material composed of several layers of similar or different materials intimately held together at their surface by cementing, bonding, cladding, welding, etc. When different materials are connected together intermittently (for example, by sewing, high-frequency welding, riveting), then in order to permit the preparation of individual samples in accordance with section 10.5 such materials are not considered as composite materials. 10.2.3. Exposed side: the side which is facing towards the occupant compartment (passenger compartment) when the material is mounted in the tractor. 10.3. Principle A sample is held horizontally in a U-shaped holder and is exposed to the action of a defined low-energy flame for 15 seconds in a combustion chamber, the flame acting on the free end of the sample. The test determines whether and when the flame is extinguished or the time which the flame requires to proceed over a measured distance. 10.4. Apparatus 10.4.1. Combustion chamber (Figure 15), preferably of stainless steel, having the dimensions given in Figure 16. The front of the chamber contains a flame-resistant observation window, which may cover the entire front and which can be constructed as an access panel. The bottom of the chamber has vent holes, and the top has a vent slot all around. The combustion chamber is placed on four feet, 10 mm high. The chamber may have a hole at one end for the introduction of the sample holder containing the sample; in the opposite end, a hole is provided for the gas supply line. Melted material is caught in a pan (see Figure 17) which is placed on the bottom of the chamber between vent holes without covering any vent hole area. 10. 3. 89 Official Journal of the European Communities 10.4.2. Sample holder, consisting of two U-shaped metal plates or frames of corrosion-proof material. Dimensions are given in Figure 18. The lower plate is equipped with pins and the upper one with corresponding holes, in order to ensure a consistent holding of the sample. The pins also serve as measuring points at the beginning and end of the burning distance. A support is provided in the form of heat-resistant wires 0,25 mm in diameter spanning the frame at 25 mm intervals over the bottom U-shaped frame (see Figure 19). The plane of the lower side of samples must be 178 mm above the floor plate. The distance of the front edge of the sample holder from the end of the chamber must be 22 mm; the distance of the longitudinal sides of the sample holder from the sides of the chamber must be 50 mm (all inside dimensions). (See Figures 15 and 16.) 10.4.3. Gas burner. The small ignition source is provided by a Bunsen burner having an inside diameter of 9,5 mm. It is so located in the test cabinet that the centre of its nozzle is 19 mm below the centre of the bottom edge of the open end of the sample (see Figure 16). 10.4.4. Test gas. The gas supplied to the burner must have a calorific value of about 38 MJ/m³ (for example natural gas). 10.4.5. Metal comb, at least 110 mm in length, with seven or eight smooth rounded teeth per 25 mm. 10.4.6. Stop-watch, accurate to 0,5 second. 10.4.7. Fume cupboard. The combustion chamber may be placed in a fume cupboard assembly provided that the latter's internal volume is at least 20 times, but not more than 110 times, greater than the volume of the combustion chamber and provided that no single height, width, or length dimension of the fume cupboard is greater than 2¹/2 times either of the other two dimensions. Before the test, the vertical velocity of the air through the fume cupboard is measured 100 mm forward of and to the rear of the ultimate site of the combustion chamber. It must be between 0,10 and 0,30 m/s in order to avoid possible discomfort to the operator from combustion products. It is possible to use a fume cupboard with natural ventilation and an appropriate air velocity. 10.5. Samples 10.5.1. Shape and dimensions The shape and dimensions of samples are given in Figure 20. The thickness of the sample corresponds to the thickness of the product to be tested. It must not be more than 13 mm. When sample taking so permits, the sample must have a constant section over its entire length. When the shape and dimensions of a product do not permit taking a sample of the given size, the following minimum dimensions must be observed: (a) for samples having a width of 3 to 60 mm, the length must be 356 mm. In this case the material is tested over the product's width; (b) for samples having a width of 60 to 100 mm, the length must be at least 138 mm. In this case the potential burning distance corresponds to the length of the sample, the measurement starting at the first measuring point; (c) samples less than 60 mm wide and less than 356 mm long, and samples 60 to 100 mm wide and less than 138 mm long, cannot be tested according to the present method, nor can samples less than 3 mm wide. 10.5.2. Sampling At least five samples are to be taken from the material under test. In materials having burning rates differing according to the direction of the material (this being established by preliminary tests) the five (or more) samples are to be taken and placed in the test apparatus in such a way that the highest burning rate will be measured. When the material is supplied in set widths, a length of at least 500 mm covering the entire width is cut. From the piece so cut, the samples are to be taken at not less than 100 mm from the edge of the material and at points equidistant from each other. Samples are to be taken in the same way from finished products when the shape of the product so permits. If the thickness of the product is over 13 mm it must be reduced to 13 mm by a mechanical process applied to the side which does not face the passenger compartment. Composite materials (see 10.2.2) are to be tested as if they were homogeneous. In the case of materials comprising superimposed layers of different composition which are not composite materials, all the layers of material included within a depth of 13 mm from the surface facing towards the passenger compartment are to be tested individually. EWG:L777UME13G.96 FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 761 mm; 58 Zeilen; 4595 Zeichen; Bediener: MARK Pr.: C; Kunde: L 777 EN 13g - 43649 10. 3. 89 Official Journal of the European Communities 10.5.3. Conditioning The samples are to be conditioned for at least 24 hours, but no more than seven days, at a temperature of 23 ± 2 °C and a relative humidity of 50 ± 5 %, and maintained under these conditions until immediately prior to testing. 10.6. Procedure 10.6.1. Place samples with napped or tufted surfaces on a flat surface, and comb twice against the nap using the comb (10.4.5). 10.6.2. Place the sample in the sample holder (10.4.2) so that the exposed side faces downwards, towards the flame. 10.6.3. Adjust the gas flame to a height of 30 mm using the mark in the chamber, the air intake of the burner being closed. The flame must burn for at least one minute, for stabilization, before the first test is started. 10.6.4. Push the sample holder into the combustion chamber so that the end of the sample is exposed to the flame, and after 15 seconds cut off the gas flow. 10.6.5. Measurement of burning time starts at the moment when the foot of the flame passes the first measuring point. Observe the flame propagation on the side (upper or lower) which burns faster. 10.6.6. Measurement of burning time is completed when the flame has come to the last measuring point or when the flame is extinguished before reaching that point. If the flame does not reach the last measuring point, measure the burnt distance up to the point where the flame was extinguished. Burnt distance is the part of the sample destroyed, on the surface or inside, by burning. 10.6.7. If the sample does not ignite or does not continue burning after the burner has been extinguished, or the flame goes out before reaching the first measuring point, so that no burning time is measured, note in the test report that the burning is 0 mm/minute. 10.6.8. When running a series of tests or performing repeat tests, make sure before starting a test that the temperature of the combustion chamber and sample-holder does not exceed 30 °C. 10.7. Calculation The burning rate, B, in millimetres per minute, is given by the formula: B = s t × 60 where: s is the burnt distance, in millimetres, t is the time, in seconds, taken to burn the distance s. 10.8. Indices of difficulty of the secondary characteristics No secondary chararcteristics are involved. 10.9. Interpretation of results Plastic-coated (2.3) and plastic safety glazing (2.4) are considered satisfactory from the point of view of burning behaviour (fire resistance) if the burn rate does not exceed 250 mm/minute. 11. TESTING OF RESISTANCE TO CHEMICAL AGENTS 11.1. Chemical agents to be used 11.1.1. Non-abrasive soapy solution: 1 % by weight of potassium oleate in de-ionized water. 11.1.2. Window-cleaning product: aqueous solution of isopropanol and dipropylene glycol monomethyl ether, each at a concentration of 5 to 10 % by weight, and of ammonium hydroxyde at a concentration of 1 to 5 % by weight. 11.1.3. Non-dilute denatured alcohol: one part by volume of methyl alcohol in 10 parts by volume of ethyl alcohol. 11.1.4. Reference gasoline mixture of 50 % by volume of toluene, 30 % by volume of 2,2,4-trimethylpentane, 15 % by volume of 2,4,4-trimethyl-1-pentane and 5 % by volume of ethyl alcohol. 11.1.5. Reference kerosene: mixture of 50 % byvolume of n-octane and 50 % by volume of n-decane. 11.2. Test method Two 180×25 mm test pieces are each to be tested with chemical agents as provided for in section 11.1, a new test piece being used for each test and product. After each test the pieces are to be cleaned in accordance with the manufacturer's instruction, and then conditioned for 48 hours at a temperature of 23 ± 2 °C and a relative humidity of 50 ± 5 %. These conditions are to be maintained during the tests. The test pieces are to be completely immersed in the test liquid for one minute, withdrawn and then immediately dried with a (clean) absorbent cotton cloth. 11.3. Indices of difficulty of the secondary characteristics Colourless Tinted Colourless Tinted Colouring of the plastic interlayer, or coating 1 2 No secondary characteristic is involved. 11.4. Interpretation of the results 11.4.1. The test for resistance to chemical agents is considered to be positive if the test pieces display no softening, stickiness, surface cracking or apparent loss of transparency. 11.4.2. A series of test pieces submitted for component type-approval are considered satisfactory as regards resistance to chemical agents if one of the following conditions has been met: 11.4.2.1. all the tests give satisfactory results; 11.4.2.2. a test having given an unsatisfactory result, a further series of tests must be carried out on a new set of test pieces and give satisfactory results. EWG:L777UME13H.96 FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 507 mm; 78 Zeilen; 4736 Zeichen; Bediener: MARK Pr.: C; Kunde: 43649 l777ume13h (1) The minimum recommended torque for M 20 is 30 Nm. (2) A suitable abrading instrument is supplied by Teledyne Taber (United States of America).(3) Suitable abrasive wheels may be obtained from Teledyne Taber (United States of America).(4) These test conditions exclude any condensation on the test pieces.(5) International Commission on Illumination. ANNEX III D TOUGHENED-GLASS WINDSCREENS 1. DEFINITION OF TYPE Toughened-glass windscreens are deemed to belong to different types if they differ in at least one of the following principal or secondary characteristics. 1.1. The principal characteristics are as follows: 1.1.1. the trade name or mark; 1.1.2. the shape and dimensions. Toughened-glass windscreens are considered as belonging to one or other of two groups for the purposes of the fragmentation and mechanical-properties tests, i.e.: 1.1.2.1. flat windscreens, and 1.1.2.2. curved windscreens; 1.1.3. the thickness category in which the nominal thickness ´e' lies (a manufacturing tolerance of ± 0,2 mm being allowed): - category I: e § 4,5 mm - category II: 4,5 mm < e § 5,5 mm - category III: 5,5 mm < e § 6,5 mm - category IV: 6,5 mm < e 1.2. The secondary characteristics are as follows: 1.2.1. nature of the material (polished (plate) glass, float glass, sheet glass), 1.2.2. colouring (colourless or tinted), 1.2.3. the incorporation or absence of conductors, 1.2.4. the incorporation or absence of obscuration bands. 2. FRAGMENTATION TEST 2.1. Indices of difficulty of the secondary characteristics 2.1.1. Only the nature of the material is involved. 2.1.2. Float glass and sheet glass are considered to have the same index of difficulty. 2.1.3. The fragmentation tests must be repeated on transition from polished (plate) glass to float glass or sheet glass, and vice versa. 2.1.4. The tests must be repeated if obscuration bands other than painted bands are used. 2.2. Number of samples Six samples from the smallest-developed-area series and six samples from the largest- developed-area series, selected as prescibed in Annex III M, are to be tested. 2.3. Different zones of glass A toughened-glass windscreen must comprise two main zones, FI and FII. It may also comprise an intermediate zone, FIII. These zones are as defined below: 2.3.1. zone FI: peripheral zone of fine fragmentation, at least 7 cm wide, all round the edge of the windscreen and including an outer strip 2 cm wide not subjected to assessment; 2.3.2. zone FII: visibility zone of varying fragmentation, always including a rectangular part at least 20 cm high and 50 cm long. 2.3.2.1. The centre of the rectangle is inside a circle having a radius of 10 cm centred on the projection of the reference point. 2.3.2.2. In the case of tractors for which it is not possible to determine the reference point, the position of the visibility zone must be indicated in the test report. 2.3.2.3. The height of the above rectangle may be reduced to 15 cm for windscreens which are less than 44 cm high; 2.3.3. zone FIII: intermediate zone, not more than 5 cm wide, between zones FI and FII. 2.4. Test method The method used is that described in section 1 of Annex III C. 2.5. Points of impact (see Annex III N, Figure 2). 2.5.1. The points of impact are selected as follows: point 1: in the central part of zone FII in an area of high or low strees; point 2: in zone FIII, as near as possible to the vertical plane of symmetry of zone FII; points 3 and 3m: 3 cm from the edges of one median of the sample; when there is a tong mark, one of the breakage points shall be near the edge bearing the tong mark and the other near the opposite edge; point 4: at the place where the radius of curvature is smallest on the longest median; point 5: 3 cm from the edge of the sample at the place where the radius of curvature of the edge is smallest, either to the left or to the right. 2.5.2. A fragmentation test is performed at each of the points 1, 2, 3, 3m, 4 and 5. 2.6. Interpretation of results 2.6.1. A test is deemed to have given a satisfactory result if fragmentation satisfies all the conditions given in points 2.6.1.1, 2.6.1.2 and 2.6.1.3 below. 2.6.1.1. Zone FI 2.6.1.1.1. The number of fragments in any 5×5 cm square is not less than 40 nor more than 350; however, in the case of a count of less than 40, if the number of fragments in any 10×10 cm square containing the 5×5 cm square is not less than 160, this is acceptable. 2.6.1.1.2. For the purposes of the above rule, a fragment extending across a side of a square counts as half a fragment. 2.6.1.1.3. Fragmentation is not checked in a strip 2 cm wide round the edge of the samples, this strip representing the frame of the glass, nor within a radius of 7,5 cm from the point of impact. 2.6.1.1.4. A maximum of three fragments of an area exceeding 3 cm² is allowed. No two of these fragments must be contained within the same 10 cm diameter circle. 2.6.1.1.5. Elongated fragments may be permitted provided that their ends are not knife-edged and that their length does not exceed 7,5 cm, except in the case provided for in point 2.6.2.2 below. If these elongated fragments extend to the edge of the glass, they must not form an angle of more than 45° with it. 2.6.1.2. Zone FII 2.6.1.2.1. The residual visibility after shattering is checked in the rectangular area defined in point 2.3.2. In that rectangle the aggregate surface area of the fragments of more than 2 cm² must represent not less than 15 % of the area of the rectangle; however, in the case of windscreens less than 44 cm high, or whose angle of installation is less than 15° from the vertical, the visibility percentage must be equal to 10 % at least of the surface of the corresponding rectangle. 2.6.1.2.2. No fragment must have an area of more than 16 cm² except in the case provided for in point 2.6.2.2. 2.6.1.2.3. Within a radius of 10 cm from the point of impact, but only in that part of the circle which is included in zone FII, three fragments having an area of more than 16 cm² but less than 25 cm² are allowed. 2.6.1.2.4. Fragments must be substantially regular in shape and free from points of the type described in point 2.6.1.2.4.1. However, not more than 10 irregular fragments are allowed in any 50×20 cm rectangle and not more than 25 over the whole surface of the windscreen. No such fragment must present a point more than 35 mm long measured in accordance with point 2.6.1.2.4.1. 2.6.1.2.4.1. A fragment is considered as an irregular fragment if it cannot be inscribed in a circle of 40 mm in diameter, if it has at least one point more than 15 mm long when measured from the top of the point to the section whose width is equal to the glazing thickness, and if it has one or more points having a top angle smaller than 40°. 2.6.1.2.5. Fragments of elongated shape are allowed in zone FII as a whole, provided they do not exceed 10 cm in length, except in the case provided for in point 2.6.2.2. 2.6.1.3. Zone FIII Fragmentation in this zone must have characteristics intermediate between those of the fragmentations respectively allowed for the two neighbouring zones (FI and FII). 2.6.2. A windscreen submitted for component type-approval is considered satisfactory from the point of view of fragmentation if at least one of the following conditions is fulfilled: 2.6.2.1. when all the tests carried out using the points of impact defined in point 2.5.1 have given a satisfactory result; 2.6.2.2. when one test among all those carried out using the points of impact prescribed in point 2.5.1 has given an unsatisfactory result, taking account of deviations which do not exceed the following limits: zone FI: not more than five fragments between 7,5 and 15 cm long; zone FII: not more than three fragments of between 16 and 20 cm² in area located outside the circle having a radius of 10 cm centred on the point of impact; zone FIII: not more than four fragments between 10 and 17,5 cm long, and is repeated on a new sample, which either conforms to the requirements of section 2.6.1 or presents deviations within the above specified limits. 2.6.2.3. when two tests among all the tests carried out using the points of impact prescribed in point 2.5.1 have given an unsatisfactory result for deviations not exceeding the limits specified in point 2.6.2.2 and a further series of tests carried out on a new set of samples conform to the requirements of section 2.6.1, or not more than two samples of the new set present deviations within the above specified limits of point 2.6.2.2. 2.6.3. If the abovementioned deviations are found, they must be noted in the test report and photographs of the relevant parts of the windscreen attached to the report. 3. HEADFORM TEST 3.1. Indices of difficulty of the secondary characteristics No secondary characteristic is involved. 3.2. Number of samples 3.2.1. For each group of toughened-glass windscreens, four samples having approximately the smallest developed area and four samples having approximately the largest developed area, all eight samples being of the same types as those selected for the fragmentation tests (see 2.2) are subjected to testing. 3.2.2. Alternatively, at the discretion of the laboratory conducting the tests, for each category of windscreen thickness, six test pieces of the dimension (1 100×500 mm) + 5/-2 mm are subjected to testing. 3.3. Test method 3.3.1. The method used is that described in section 3 of Annex III C. 3.3.2. The height of drop is 1,50 m + 0/-5 mm. 3.4. Interpretation of results 3.4.1. The test is deemed to have given a satisfactory result if the windscreen or the test piece is fractured. 3.4.2. A set of samples submitted for component type-approval are considered satisfactory from the point of view of the headform test if either of the two following conditions is fulfilled: 3.4.2.1. all the tests have given a satisfactory result; 3.4.2.2. a test having given an unsatisfactory result, a further series of tests must be carried out on a new set of samples and give satisfactory results. 4. OPTICAL QUALITIES The requirements concerning optical qualities set out in section 9 of Annex III C apply to every type of windscreen. EWG:L777UMBE14.95 FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 761 mm; 151 Zeilen; 9859 Zeichen; Bediener: MARK Pr.: C; Kunde: 43649 Montan England 14 ANNEX III E UNIFORMLY TOUGHENED-GLASS PANES OTHER THAN WINDSCREENS (¹) 1. DEFINITION OF TYPE Uniformly toughened glass panes, are deemed to belong to different types if they differ in at least one of the following principal or secondary characteristics. 1.1. The principal characteristics are as follows: 1.1.1. the trade name mark; 1.1.2. the nature of the toughening process (thermal or chemical); 1.1.3. the shape category; two categories are distinguished: 1.1.3.1. flat glass panes, 1.1.3.2. flat and curved glass panes. 1.1.4. The thickness category in which the nominal thickness ´e' lies (a manufacturing tolerance of ± 0,2 mm being allowed): - category III: 3,5 mm < e § 3.5 - category III: 3,5 mm < e § 4.5 - category III: 4,5 mm < e § 6.5 - category IV: 6,5 mm < e 1.2. The secondary characteristics are as follows: 1.2.1. nature of the material (polished (plate) glass, float glass, sheet glass), 1.2.2. colouring (colourless or tinted), 1.2.3. the incorporation or absence of conductors. 2. FRAGMENTATION TEST 2.1. Indices of difficulty of the secondary characteristics Material Index of difficulty Plate glass 2 Float glass 1 Sheet glass 1 No other secondary characteristics are involved. 2.2 Selection of samples 2.2.1. Samples of each shape category and of each thickness category difficult to produce are selected according to the following criteria for testing: 2.2.1.1. in the case of flat glass panes, two sets of samples are provided, corresponding to: 2.2.1.1.1. the largest developed area, 2.2.1.1.2. the smallest angle between two adjacent sides. 2.2.1.2. In the case of flat and curved glass panes, three sets of samples are provided, corresponding to: 2.2.1.2.1. the largest developed area, 2.2.1.2.2. the smallest angle between two adjacent sides, 2.2.1.2.3. the largest height of segment. 2.2.2. Tests carried out on samples corresponding to the largest area, S, are considered to be applicable to any other area smaller than S + 5 %. 2.2.3. If the samples submitted present an angle, g, smaller than 30°, the tests are considered as applicable to all glass panes produced having an angle greater than g -5°. If the samples submitted present an angle, g, greater than or equal to 30°, the tests are considered as applicable to all glass panes produced having an angle equal to or greater than 30°. 2.2.4. If the height of segment, h, of the samples submitted is greater than 100 mm, the tests are considered as applicable to all glass panes produced having a height of segment smaller than h + 30 mm. If the height of segment of the samples submitted is less than or equal to 100 mm, the tests are considered as applicable to all glass panes having a height of segment less than or equal to 100 mm. 2.3. Number of samples per set The number of samples in each group shall be as follows, according to the shape category defined in point 1.1.3 above: Kind of glass pane Number of samples Flat (two sets) 4 Flat and curved (three sets) 5 2.4. Test method 2.4.1. The method used is that described in section 1 Annex III C. 2.5. Points of impact (see Annex III N, Figure 3) 2.5.1. For flat glass panes and curved glass panes the points of impact represented respectively in Annex III N, Figures 3a and 3b on the one hand, and in Annex III N, Figure 3c on the other hand, are as follows: point 1: 3 cm from the edges of the glass pane in the part where the radius of curvature of the edge is smallest; point 2: 3 cm from the edge of one of the medians, the side (if any) of the glass pane bearing tong marks being selected; point 3: in the geometric centre of the glass; point 4: for curved glass panes only; this point is selected on the largest median in that part of the pane where the radius of curvature is smallest. 2.5.2. Only one test is carried out at each prescribed point of impact. 2.6. Interpretation of results 2.6.1. A test is deemed to have given a satisfactory result if fragmentation satisfies the following conditions: 2.6.1.1. the number of fragments in any 5×5 cm² square is not less than 40 or more than 400, or, in the case of glazing not more than 3,5 mm thick, 450. 2.6.1.2. For the purpose of the above rule, a fragment extending across a side of a square counts as half a fragment. 2.6.1.3. Fragmentation is not checked in a strip 2 cm wide round the edge of the samples, this strip representing the frame of the glass; nor within a radius of 7,5 cm from the point of impact. 2.6.1.4. Fragments of an area exceeding 3 cm² are not allowed except in the parts defined in point 2.6.1.3. 2.6.1.5. A few fragments of elongated shape are allowed, provided that: - their ends are not knife-edged, - if they extend to the edge of the glass pane they do not form an angle of more than 45° with it, and if, except in the case provided for in point 2.6.2.2. below if their length does not exceed 7,5 cm. 2.6.2. A set of samples submitted for component type-approval are considered satisfactory from the point of view of fragmentation if at least one of the following conditions is fulfilled: 2.6.2.1. when all tests carried out using the points of impact prescribed in point 2.5.1 have given a satisfactory result; 2.6.2.2. when one test among all those carried out using the points of impact prescribed in point 2.5.1. has given an unsatisfactory result, taking account of deviations which do not exceed the following limits: - not more than five fragments between 6 and 7,5 cm long, - not more than five fragments between 7,5 and 10 cm long, and is repeated on a new sample which either conforms to the requirements of section 2.6.1 or presents deviations within the above specified limits. 2.6.2.3. When two tests among all the tests carried out using the points of impact prescribed in point 2.5.1 have given an unsatisfactory result, taking account of deviations not exceeding the limits specified in point 2.6.2.2, and a further series of tests carried out on a new set of samples conform to the prescriptions of section 2.6.1. or not more than two samples of the new set present deviations within the above specified limits of point 2.6.2.2. 2.6.3. If the abovementioned deviations are found, they must be noted in the test report and photographs of the relevant parts of the glass pane attached to the report. 3. MECHANICAL STRENGTH TEST 3.1. 227-g-ball test 3.1.1. Indices of difficulty of the secondary characteristics. Material Index of difficulty Colouring Index of difficulty Polished glass 2 colourless 1 Float glass 1 tinted 2 Sheet glass 1 The other secondary characteristic (namely, incorporation or absence of conductors) is not involved. 3.1.2. Number of test pieces Six test pieces are subjected to testing for each thickness category defined in point 1.1.4 above. 3.1.3. Test method 3.1.3.1. The test method used is that described in section 2.1 of Annex III C. 3.1.3.2. The height of drop (from the underface of the ball to the upper surface of the test piece) is indicated in the following table, according to thickness of the glass pane: Nominal thickness of glass pane (e) Height of drop e § 3,5 mm 2,0 m + 5/-0 mm 3,5 mm < e 2,5 m + 5/-0 mm 3.1.4. Interpretation of results 3.1.4.1. The test is deemed to have given a satisfactory result if the test piece does not break. 3.1.4.2. A set of test pieces submitted for component type-approval are considered satisfactory from the point of view of mechanical strength if at least one of the following conditions is fulfilled: 3.1.4.2.1. when not more than one test has given an unsatisfactory result, 3.1.4.2.2. when two tests having given unsatisfactory results, a further series of tests carried out on a new set of six test pieces give satisfactory results. 4. OPTICAL QUALITIES 4.1. The requirements concerning regular light transmittance set out in section 9.1 of Annex III C apply to uniformly toughened glass panes or parts of glass panes located at places which are essential to the driver's vision. EWG:L777UMBE15.95 FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 760 mm; 166 Zeilen; 8068 Zeichen; Bediener: JUTT Pr.: C; Kunde: L 777 England 15 (1) This type of uniformly toughened-glass pane can also be used for windscreens for tractors. ANNEX III F ORDINARY LAMINATED-GLASS WINDSCREENS 1. DEFINITION OF TYPE Ordinary laminated-glass windscreens are deemed to belong to different types if they differ in at least one of the following principal or secondary characteristics. 1.1. The principal characteristics are as follows: 1.1.1. the trade name or mark; 1.1.2. the shape and dimensions. Ordinary laminated-glass windscreens are deemed to belong to one group for the purposes of tests of mechanical properties and of resistance to the environment; 1.1.3. the number of layers of glass; 1.1.4. the nominal thickness ´e' of the windscreen, a manufacturing tolerance of 0,2 n mm (n being the number of layers of glass in the windscreen) above or below the nominal value being allowed; 1.1.5. the nominal thickness of the interlayer or interlayers; 1.1.6. the nature and type of the interlayer or interlayers (e.g. PVB or other plastic-material interlayer or interlayers). 1.2 The secondary characteristics are as follows: 1.2.1. the nature of the material (polished (plate) glass, float glass, sheet glass), 1.2.2. the colouring (total or partial) of the interlayer or interlayers (colourless or tinted), 1.2.3. the colouring of the glass (colourless or tinted), 1.2.4. the incorporation or absence of conductors, 1.2.5. the incorporation or absence of obscuration bands. 2. GENERAL 2.1. In the case of ordinary laminated-glass windscreens, tests other than headform tests (section 3.2) and tests of optical qualities are conducted on flat test pieces which are either cut from actual windscreens or are specially made for the purpose. In either case the test pieces must in all respects be rigorously representative of the production windscreens for which component type-approval is sought. 2.2. Before each test, the test pieces must be stored for not less than four hours at a temperature of 23 ± 2 °C. The tests must take place as soon as possible after the test pieces have been taken out of the receptacle in which they were stored. 3. HEADFORM TEST 3.1. Indices of difficulty of the secondary characteristics No secondary characteristic is involved. 3.2. Headform test on a complete windscreen 3.2.1. Number of samples Four samples from the smallest-developed-area series and four samples from the largest-developed-area series, selected in accordance with the provisions of Annex III M are tested. 3.2.2. Test method 3.2.2.1. The method used is that described in point 3.3.2 of Annexe III C. 3.2.2.2. The drop height is 1,5 m+0/-5 mm. 3.2.3. Interpretation of results 3.2.3.1. This test is deemed to have given a satisfactory result if the following conditions are fulfilled: 3.2.3.1.1. the sample breaks displaying numerous circular cracks centred approximately on the point of impact, the cracks nearest to the point of impact being not more than 80 mm from it; 3.2.3.1.2. the layers of glass must remain adhering to the plastic-material interlayer. One or more partial separations from the interlayer with a distance of less than 4 mm in breadth, on either side of the crack, are permitted outside a circle of 60 mm in diameter centred on the point of impact. 3.2.3.1.3. On the impact side: 3.2.3.1.3.1. the interlayer must not be laid bare over an area of more than 20 cm², 3.2.3.1.3.2. a tear in the interlayer up to a length of 35 mm is allowed. 3.2.3.2. A set of samples submitted for approval are considered satisfactory from the point of view of the headform test if one of the following two conditions is met: 3.2.3.2.1. all the tests give satisfactory results, or 3.2.3.2.2. one test having given an unsatisfactory result, a further series of tests carried out on a new set of samples give satisfactory results. 3.3. Head form test on flat test pieces 3.3.1. Number of test pieces Six flat test pieces measuring (1 100 mm × 500 mm) +5/-2 mm are subjected to testing. 3.3.2. Test method 3.3.2.1. The method used is that described in point 3.3.1 of Annex III C. 3.3.2.2. The height of drop is 4 m + 25/-0 mm. 3.3.3. Interpretation of results 3.3.3.1. This test is deemed to have given a satisfactory result if the following conditions are fulfilled: 3.3.3.1.1. the test piece yields and breaks, displaying numerous circular cracks centred approximately on the point of impact; 3.3.3.1.2. tears in the interlayer are allowed provided that the manikin's head does not pass through the test piece; 3.3.3.1.3. no large fragments of glass become detached from the interlayer. 3.3.3.2. a set of test pieces submitted for approval are considered satisfactory from the point of view of the headform test if one of the following two conditions is met: 3.3.3.2.1. all the tests give satisfactory results, or 3.3.3.2.2. a test having given an unsatisfactory result, a further series of tests must be carried out on a new set of test pieces and give satisfactory results. 4. MECHANICAL STRENGTH TEST 4.1. Indices of difficulty of the secondary characteristics No secondary characteristic is involved. 4.2. 2 260-g-ball test 4.2.1. Number of test pieces Six square test pieces of 300 mm + 10/-0 mm side are subjected to testing. 4.2.2. Test method 4.2.2.1. The method used is that described in section 2.2 of Annex III C. 4.2.2.2. The height of drop (from the underface of the ball to the upper face of the test piece) is 4 m + 25/-0 mm. EWG:L777UMBE16.96 FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 511 mm; 88 Zeilen; 5342 Zeichen; Bediener: MARK Pr.: C; Kunde: L 777 Umbe 16 10. 3. 89 Official Journal of the European Communities 4.2.3. Interpretation of results 4.2.3.1. The test is deemed to have given a satisfactory result if the ball does not pass through the glazing within five seconds from the moment of impact. 4.2.3.2. A set of test pieces submitted for component type-approval is considered satisfactory from the point of view of the 2 260-g-ball test if one of the following two conditions is met: 4.2.3.2.1. all the tests give satisfactory results, or 4.2.3.2.2. one test having given an unsatisfactory result, a further series of tests must be carried out on a new set of test pieces and give satisfactory results. 4.3. 227-g-ball test 4.3.1. Indices of difficulty of the secondary characteristics No secondary characteristic is involved. 4.3.2. Number of test pieces 20 square test pieces of 300 mm + 10/-0 mm side are subjected to testing. 4.3.3. Test method 4.3.3.1. The method used is that described in section 2.1 of Annex III C. 10 specimens are tested at a temperature of +40 ± 2 °C and 10 at a temperature of -20 ± 2 °C. 4.3.3.2. The height of drop for the various thickness categories and the mass of the detached fragments are given in the table below: + 40 °C -20 °C Thickness of test piece Height of fall Maximum permitted mass of the fragments Height of fall Maximum permitted mass of the fragments mm m (*) g m (*) g 4,5 < e 9 4,5 4,5 < e 9 5,5 5,5 < e 9 6,5 4,5 < e > 6,5 9 10 11 12 12 15 20 25 8,5 9 9,5 10 12 15 20 25 (*) A tolerance of + 25/-0 mm is allowed in height of fall. 4.3.4. Interpretation of results 4.3.4.1. the test is considered to have given a satisfactory result if the following conditions are met: - the ball does not pass through the test piece, - the test piece does not break into several pieces, - if the interlayer ist not torn, the weight of fragments detached from the side of the glass opposite to the point of impact must not exceed the appropriate values specified in point 4.3.3.2. 4.3.4.2. A set of test pieces submitted for component type-approval are considered satisfactory from the point of view of the 227-g-ball test if one of the following conditions is met: 4.3.4.2.1. not less than eight tests at each test temperature give a satisfactory result, or 4.3.4.2.2. more than two tests at each test temperature having given an unsatisfactory result, a further series of tests must be carried out on a new set of test pieces and give satisfactory results. 5. TEST OF RESISTANCE TO THE ENVIRONMENT 5.1. Test of resistance to abrasion 5.1.1. Indices of difficulty and test method The requirements of section 4 of Annex III C apply, the test being continued for 1 000 cycles. 5.1.2. Interpretation of results The safety-glass pane is considered satisfactory with respect to abrasion resistance if the light scatter as a result of abrasion of the test piece does not exceed 2 %. 5.2. Test of resistance to high temperature The requirements of section 5 of Annex III C apply. 5.3. Resistance-to-radiation test 5.3.1. General requirement This test is performed only if the laboratory deems it useful in the light of the information in its possession concerning the interlayer. 5.3.2. The requirement of section 6 of Annex III C apply. 5.4. Resistance-to-humidity test The requirement of section 7 of Annex III C apply. 6. OPTICAL QUALITIES The requirement concerning optical qualities set out in section 9 of Annex III C apply to every type of windscreen. EWG:L777UME16A.96 FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 511 mm; 94 Zeilen; 3445 Zeichen; Bediener: MARK Pr.: C; Kunde: 43649 L ... ANNEX III G LAMINATED-GLASS PANES OTHER THAN WINDSCREENS (¹) 1. DEFINITION OF TYPE Laminated-glass panes other than windscreens are deemed to belong to different types if they differ in at least one of the following principal or secondary characteristics. 1.1. The principal characteristics are as follows: 1.1.1. the trade name or mark; 1.1.2. the thickness category of the pane in which the nominal thickness ´e' lies, a manufacturing tolerance of ± 0,2 n mm, (n being the number of layers of glass in the pane) being allowed: - category III: 6,5 mm < e § 5,5 mm, - category III: 5,5 mm < e § 6,5 mm, - category III: 6,5 mm < e 1.1.3. the nominal thickness of the interlayer or interlayers; 1.1.4. the nature and type of the interlayer or interlayers, e.g. PVB or other plastic-material interlayer or interlayers; 1.1.5. any special treatment which one of the layers of glass may have undergone. 1.2. The secondary characteristics are as follows: 1.2.1. the nature of the material (polished (plate) glass, float glass, sheet glass), 1.2.2. the colouring (total or partial) of the interlayer or interlayers (colourless or tinted), 1.2.3. the colouring of the glass (colourless or tinted). 2. GENERAL 2.1. In the case of laminated-glass panes other than windscreens, the tests are conducted on flat test pieces which are either cut from actual glass panes or are specially made. In either case the test pieces must in all respects be rigorously representative of the glass panes for the production of which component type-approval is sought. 2.2. Before each test, the test pieces of laminated glass must be stored for not less than 4 hours at a temperature of 23 ± 2 °C. The tests are performed on the test pieces as soon as the pieces have been taken out of the receptacle in which they were stored. 2.3. The provisions of this Annex are considered to be met if the glazing submitted for component type-approval is of the same composition as a windscreen already approved under the provisions of Annex III F, III H or III I. 3. HEADFORM TEST 3.1. Indices of difficulty of the secondary characteristics No secondary characteristic is involved. 3.2. Number of test pieces Six flat test pieces measuring 1 100 ×500 mm (+ 25/-0 mm) are subjected to testing. 3.3. Test method 3.3.1. The method used is that described in section 3 of Annex III C. 3.3.2. The height of drop is 1,50 m + 0/-5 mm. This is increased to 4 m + 25/-0 mm for glass panes used as tractor windscreens. 3.4. Interpretation of results 3.4.1. This test is deemed to have given a satisfactory result if the following conditions are met: 3.4.1.1. the test piece yields and breaks, displaying numerous circular cracks centred approximately on the point of impact; (¹) This type of laminated-glass pane can also be used for windscreens for tractors. 3.4.1.2. tears in the interlayer are allowed, but the manikin's head must not pass through; 3.4.1.3. no large fragments of glass become detached from the interlayer. 3.4.2. A set of test pieces subjected to component type-approval testing are considered satisfactory from the point of view of the headform test if one of the following two conditions is met: 3.4.2.1. all the tests give satisfactory results, or 3.4.2.2. a test having given an unsatisfactory result, a further series of tests must be carried out on a new set of test pieces and give satisfactory results. 4. MECHANICAL STRENGTH TEST - 227-g-BALL TEST 4.1. Indices of difficulty of the secondary characteristics No secondary characteristic is involved. 4.2. Number of test pieces Four flat square test pieces of side 300 mm (+ 10/-0 mm) must be subjected to tests. 4.3. Test method 4.3.1. The method used is that described in section 2.1 of Annex III C. 4.3.2. The height of drop (from the underface of the ball to the upper face of the test piece) is as indicated in the following table as a function of nominal thickness: Nominal thickness Height of drop 5,5 mm 9 e 9 5,5 mm 5,5 mm 9 e 9 6,5 mm 6,5 mm 9 e 5 m 6 m 7 m aa A a A s + 25 mm/-0 mm 4.4. Interpretation of results 4.4.1. The test is considered to have given a satisfactory result if the following conditions are met: - the ball does not pass through the test piece, - the test piece does not break into several fragments, - the total weight of the few fragments which may be produced on the side opposite to the point of impact does not exceed 15 g. 4.4.2. A set of test pieces subjected to component type-approval testing are considered satisfactory from the point of view of mechanical strength if one of the following conditions is met: 4.4.2.1. all the tests have given a satisfactory result, or 4.4.2.2. not more than two tests having given an unsatisfactory result, a further series of tests must be carried out on a new set of test pieces and give satisfactory results. 5. TEST OF RESISTANCE TO THE ENVIRONMENT 5.1. Test of resistance to abrasion 5.1.1. Indices of difficulty and test method The requirements of section 4 of Annex III C apply, the test being continued for 1 000 cycles. 5.1.2. Interpretation of results The safety-glass pane is considered satisfactory form the point of view of abrasion resistance if the light scatter as a result of abrasion of the test piece does not exceed 2 %. 5.2. Test of resistance to high temperature The requirements of section 5 of Annex III C apply. 5.3. Resistance-to-radiation test 5.3.1. General requirement This test is performed only if the laboratory deems it useful in the light of the information in its possession concerning the interlayer. 5.3.2. The requirements of section 6 of Annex III C apply. 5.4. Resistance-to-humidity test 5.4.1. The requirements of section 7 of Annex III C apply. 6. OPTICAL QUALITIES 6.1. Light transmittance The provisions concerning the regular light transmittance set out in section 9.1 of Annex III C apply to glass panes other than windscreens, or parts of glass panes located at places which are essential to the driver's vision. EWG:L777UMBE17.96 FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 761 mm; 111 Zeilen; 6053 Zeichen; Bediener: MARK Pr.: C; Kunde: 43649 L 777 ANNEX III H TREATED LAMINATED-GLASS WINDSCREENS 1. DEFINITION OF TYPE Treated laminated-glass windscreens are deemed to belong to different types if they differ in at least one of the following principal or secondary characteristics. 1.1. The principal characteristics are as follows: 1.1.1. the trade name or mark; 1.1.2. the shape and dimensions. Treated laminated-glass windscreens are deemed to belong to one group for the purposes of the fragmentation, mechanical properties and resistance to the environment tests; 1.1.3. the number of layers of glass; 1.1.4. the nominal thickness ´e' of the windscreen, a manufacturing tolerance of 0,2 n mm, (n being the number of layers of glass in the windscrean) above and below the nominal value being allowed; 1.1.5. any special treatment which one or more layers of glass may have undergone; 1.1.6. the nominal thickness of the interlayer or interlayers; 1.1.7. the nature and type of the interlayer or interlayers (e.g. PVB or other plastic-material interlayer or interlayers). 1.2. The secondary characteristics are as follows: 1.2.1. the nature of the material (polished (plate) glass, float glass, sheet glass), 1.2.2. the colouring (total or partial) of the interlayer or interlayers (colourless or tinted), 1.2.3. the colouring of the glass (colourless or tinted), 1.2.4. the incorporation or absence of conductors, 1.2.5. the incorporation or absence of obscuration bands. 2. GENERAL 2.1. In the case of treated laminated-glass windscreens, tests other than the headform test on a complete windscreen and tests of optical qualities are conducted on samples and/or flat test pieces which are specially made for the purpose. However, the test pieces must in all respects be rigorously representative of the production windscreens for which component type-approval is sought. 2.2. Before each test, the test pieces or samples must be stored for not less than 4 hours at a temperature of 23 ± 2 °C. The tests must take place as soon as possible after the test pieces or samples have been taken out of the receptacle in which they were stored. 3. TESTS PRESCRIBED Treated laminated-glass windscreans are to be subjected to: 3.1. the tests prescribed in Annex III F for ordinary laminated-glass windscreens, 3.2. the fragmentation test described in section 4 below. 4. FRAGMENTATION TEST 4.1. Indices of difficulty of the secondary characteristics Material Index of difficulty Plate glass 2 Float glass 1 Sheet glass 1 10. 3. 89 Official Journal of the European Communities 4.2. Number of test pieces or samples One test piece measuring 1 100 ×500 mm (+ 5/-2 mm) or one sample for each point of impact is subjected to testing. 4.3. Test method The method used is that described in section 1 of Annex III C. 4.4. Impact point or points The glass pane is struck on each of the outer treated sheets in the centre of the test piece or sample. 4.5. Interpretation of results 4.5.1. For each point of impact the fragmentation test is considered to have given a satisfactory result if the total surface of fragments having a surface area of more than 2 cm² comprised in a rectangle as defined in point 2.3.2 of Annex III D represents not less than 15 % of the surface of that rectangle. 4.5.1.1. In the case of a sample: 4.5.1.1.1. the centre of the rectangle is situated within a circle having a radius of 10 cm centred on the projection of the reference point as defined in point 1.2 of the Annex ´field of vision' to Directive 74/347/EEC on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to the field of vision and windscreen wipers for wheeled agricultural or forestry tractors. 4.5.1.1.2. In the case of tractors for which it is not possible to determine the reference point, the position of the visibility zone must be indicated in the test report. 4.5.1.1.3. The height of the rectangle may be reduced to 15 cm for windscreens which are less than 44 cm high or whose angle of installation is less than 15° from the vertical; the percentage of visibility must be equal to 10 % at least of the area of the corresponding rectangle. 4.5.1.2. In the case of a test piece, the centre of the rectangle must be situated on the greater axis of the test piece at 450 mm from one of its edges. 4.5.2. The test piece(s) or sample(s) submitted for component type-approval are considered satisfactory from the point of view of fragmentation if either of the following conditions is met: 4.5.2.1. the test gives a satisfactory result for each point of impact, or 4.5.2.2. the test having been repeated on a new set of four test pieces for each point of impact for which it had originally given an unsatisfactory result, the four new tests performed at the same impact points must all give a satisfactory result. EWG:L777UMBE18.96 FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 507 mm; 80 Zeilen; 4776 Zeichen; Bediener: MARK Pr.: C; Kunde: L 777 England 18 ANNEX III I SAFETY-GLASS PANES FACED WITH PLASTIC MATERIAL ON THE INSIDE 1. DEFINITION OF TYPE Safety glazing materials, as defined in Annexes III D to III H, if coated on the inner face with a layer of plastic material, must conform not only to the requirements of the appropriate Annexes but also to the following requirements. 2. TEST OF RESISTANCE TO ABRASION 2.1. Indices of difficulty and test method The plastic coating is to be subjected to a test for 100 cycles in accordance with the requirements specified in section 4 of Annex III C. 2.2. Interpretation of results The plastic coating is considered satisfactory with respect to abrasion resistance if the light scatter as a result of abrasion of the test piece does not exceed 4 %. 3. RESISTANCE-TO-HUMIDITY TEST 3.1. In the case of plastic-coated toughened safety glazing material a restistance-to-humidity test is to be performed. 3.2. The requirements of section 7 of Annex III C apply. 4. TEST OF RESISTANCE TO TEMPERATURE CHANGES The requirements of section 8 of Annex III C apply. 5. FIRE-RESISTANCE TEST The requirements of section 10 of Annex III C apply. 6. TEST OF RESISTANCE TO CHEMICALS The requirements of section 11 of Annex III C apply. EWG:L777UMBE19.95 FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 253 mm; 24 Zeilen; 1281 Zeichen; Bediener: MARK Pr.: C; Kunde: ................................ ANNEX III J GLASS-PLASTIC WINDSCREENS 1. DEFINITION OF TYPE Glass-plastic windscreens are considered to belong to different types if they differ in at least one of the following principal or secondary characteristics. 1.1. The principal characteristics are as follows: 1.1.1. the trade name or mark; 1.1.2. the shape and dimensions. Glass-plastic windscreens are deemed to belong to a group for the purposes of tests of mechanical strength, resistance to the environment, resistance to temperature changes and resistance to chemical agents; 1.1.3. the number of plastic layers; 1.1.4. the nominal thickness ´e' of the windscreen, a manufacturing tolerance of p 0,2 mm being allowed; 1.1.5. the nominal thickness of the layer of glass; 1.1.6. the nominal thickness of the layer(s) of plastic acting as interlayer(s); 1.1.7. the nature and type of the layer(s) of plastic acting as interlayer(s) (e. g. PVB or other material) and of the plastic layer situated on the inner face; 1.1.8. any special treatment the glass pane may have undergone. 1.2. The secondary characteristics are as follows: 1.2.1. the nature of the material (plate glass, float glass, sheet glass), 1.2.2. the colouring (total or partial) of any layer(s) of plastic (colourless or tinted), 1.2.3. the colouring of the glass (colourless or tinted), 1.2.4. the incorporation or absence of conductors, 1.2.5. the incorporation or absence of obscuration bands. 2. GENERAL 2.1. In the case of glass-plastic windscreens, tests other than headform tests (3.2) and tests of optical qualities are conducted on flat test pieces which are either cut from actual windscreens or are specially made for the purpose. In either case the test pieces must in all respects be rigorously representative of the production windscreens for which component type-approval is sought. 2.2. Before each test, the test pieces must be stored for not less than 4 hours at a temperature of 23 p 2 gC. The tests must take place as soon as possible after the test pieces have been taken out of the receptacle in which they were stored. 3. HEADFORM TEST 3.1. Indices of difficulty of the secondary characteristics No secondary characteristic is involved. 3.2. Headform test on a complete windscreen 3.2.1. Number of samples Four samples from the series having the smallest developed area and four samples from the series having the largest developed area, selected in accordance with the provisions of Annex III M, are tested. 3.2.2. Test method 3.2.2.1. The method used is that described in point 3.3.2 of Annex III C. 3.2.2.2. The height of drop is 1,50 m +0/-5 mm. 3.2.3. Interpretation of results 3.2.3.1. This test is considered to have given a satisfactory result if the following conditions are met: 3.2.3.1.1. the layer of glass breaks, displaying numerous circular cracks centred approximately on the point of impact, the cracks nearest to the point of impact being not more than 80 mm from it; 3.2.3.1.2. the layer of glass remains adhering to the plastic material interlayer. One or more partial separations from the interlayer not more than 4 mm in breadth may be allowed on either side of the crack outside a circle 60 mm in diameter centred on the point of impact; 3.2.3.1.3. a tear in the interlayer of a length up to 35 mm is allowed on the impact side. 3.2.3.2. A set of test pieces submitted for component type-approval are considered satisfactory with respect to the headform test if one of the following two conditions is met: 3.2.3.2.1. all the tests give satisfactory results, or 3.2.3.2.2. a test having given an unsatisfactory result, a further series of tests must be carried out on a new set of test pieces and give satisfactory results. 3.3. Headform test on flat test pieces 3.3.1. Number of test pieces Six flat test pieces measuring 1 100×500 mm (+5/-2 mm) are subjected to testing. 3.3.2. Test method 3.3.2.1. The method used is that described in point 3.3.1 of Annex III C. 3.3.2.2. The height of drop is 4 m +25/-0 mm. 3.3.3. Interpretation of results 3.3.3.1. This test is considered to have given a satisfactory result if the following conditions are met: 3.3.3.1.1. the layer of glass yields and breaks, displaying numerous circular cracks centred approximately on the point of impact; 3.3.3.1.2. tears in the interlayer are allowed, but the manikin's head must not pass through; 3.3.3.1.3. no large fragment of glass becomes detached from the interlayer. 3.3.3.2. A set of test pieces submitted for component type-approval are considered satisfactory with respect to the headform test if one of the following conditions is met: 3.3.3.2.1. all the tests give satisfactory results, or 3.3.3.2.2. a test having given an unsatisfactory result, a further series of tests must be carried out on a new set of test pieces and give satisfactory results. 4. MECHANICAL STRENGTH TEST 4.1. Indices of difficulty, test method and interpretation of results The requirements of section 4 of Annex III F apply. 4.2. However the third requirement set out in point 4.3.4.1 of Annex III F is not relevant. 5. TEST OF RESISTANCE TO THE ENVIRONMENT 5.1. Test of resistance to abrasion 5.1.1. Test of resistance to abrasion on the outer face 5.1.1.1. The requirements of section 5.1 of Annex III F apply. 5.1.2. Test of resistance to abrasion on the inner face 5.1.2.1. The requirements of section 2 of Annex III I apply. 5.2. Test of resistance to high temperature The requirements of section 5 of Annex III C apply. 5.3. Resistance-to-radiation test The requirements of section 6 of Annex III C apply. 5.4. Resistance-to-humidity test The requirements of section 7 of Annex III C apply. 5.5. Test of resistance to temperature changes The requirements of section 8 of Annex III C apply. 6. OPTICAL QUALITIES The requirements concerning optical qualities set out in section 9 of Annex III C apply to each type of windscreen. 7. FIRE-RESISTANCE TEST The requirements of section 10 of Annex III C apply. 8. TEST OF RESISTANCE TO CHEMICALS The requirements of section 11 of Annex III C apply. EWG:L777UMBE20.95 FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 761 mm; 102 Zeilen; 6118 Zeichen; Bediener: MARK Pr.: C; Kunde: ................................ ANNEX III K GLASS-PLASTIC PANES OTHER THAN WINDSCREENS (¹) 1. DEFINITION OF TYPE Glass-plastic panes other than windscreens are considered to belong to different types if they differ in at least one of the following principal or secondary characteristics. 1.1. The principal characteristics are as follows: 1.1.1. the trade name or mark; 1.1.2. the thickness category applicable to the nominal thickness ´e', a manufacturing tolerance of ± 0,2 mm being allowed: - category III: 3,5 mm < e § 3,5 mm - category III: 3,5 mm < e § 4,5 mm - category III: 4,5 mm < e 1.1.3. the nominal thickness of the layer(s) of plastic material acting as interlayer(s); 1.1.4. the nominal thickness of the glass pane; 1.1.5. the type of the layer(s) of plastic material acting as interlayer(s) (e.g. PVB or other material) and of the plastic layer on the inner face; 1.1.6. any special treatment which the layer of glass may have undergone. 1.2. The secondary characteristics are as follows: 1.2.1. the nature of the material (plate glass, float glass, sheet glass), 1.2.2. the colouring (total or partial) of any layer(s) of plastic (colourless or tinted), 1.2.3. the colouring of the glass (colourless or tinted). 2. GENERAL 2.1. In the case of glass-plastic panes other than windscreens the tests are conducted on flat test pieces which are either cut from normal glass panes or are specially made. In either case the test pieces must in all respects be rigorously representative of the production glass panes for which component type-approval is sought. 2.2. Before each test, the test pieces of glass-plastic panes must be stored for not less than 4 hours at a temperature of 23 ± 2 °C. The tests must take place as soon as possible after the test pieces have been taken out of the receptacle in which they were stored. 2.3. The provisions of this Annex are considered to be met if the glass pane submitted for component type-approval has the same composition as that of a windscreen already approved under the provisions of Annex III J. 3. HEADFORM TEST 3.1. Indices of difficulty of the secondary characteristics No secondary characterisitic is involved. 3.2. Number of test pieces Six flat test pieces measuring 1 100×500 mm (+ 5/-2 mm) are subjected to testing. 3.3. Test method 3.3.1. The method used is that described in section 3 of Annex III C. 3.3.2. The height of drop is 1,50 m + 0/-5 mm. (This height is increased to 4 m + 25/-0 mm for glass panes used as tractor windscreens.) 3.4. Interpretation of results 3.4.1. This test is considered to have given a satisfactory result if the following conditions are met: (¹) This type of glass-plastic pane can also be used for windscreens for tractors. 3.4.1.1. the layer of glass breaks, displaying numerous cracks; 3.4.1.2. tears in the interlayer are allowed, provided that the manikin's head does not pass through the test piece; 3.4.1.3. no large fragment of glass becomes detached from the interlayer. 3.4.2. A set of test pieces submitted for component type-approval are considered satisfactory with respect to the headform test if one of the following conditions is met: 3.4.2.1. all the tests give satisfactory results, or 3.4.2.2. a test having given an unsatisfactory result, a further series of tests must be carried out on a new set of test pieces and give satisfactory results. 4. MECHANICAL STRENGTH TEST - 227-g-BALL TEST 4.1. The provisions of section 4 of Annex III G apply, with the exception of the table in point 4.3.2, which is replaced by: Nominal thickness Height of drop 5,5 mm 9 e 9 3,5 mm 3,5 mm < e 9 4,5 mm 5,5 mm 9 e > 4,5 mm 5 m 6 m 7 m aa A a A s + 25/-0 mm 4.2. However the requirement in the third indent of point 4.4.1 of Annex III G is not relevant. 5. TEST OF RESISTANCE TO THE ENVIRONMENT 5.1. Test of resistance to abrasion 5.1.1. Test of resistance to abrasion on the outer face The requirements of section 5.1 of Annex III G apply. 5.1.2. Test of resistance to abrasion on the inner face The requirements of section 2.1 of Annex III I apply. 5.2. Test of resistance to high temperature The requirements of section5 of Annex III C apply. 5.3. Resistance-to-radiation test The requirements of section 6 of Annex III C apply. 5.4. Resistance-to-humidity test The requirements of section 7 of Annex III C apply. 5.5. Test of resistance to temperature changes The requirements of section 8 of Annex III C apply. 6. OPTICAL QUALITIES The requirements concerning the regular light transmittance set out in section 9.1 of Annex III C apply to glass panes or parts of glass panes located at places which are essential to the driver's vision. 7. FIRE-RESISTANCE TEST The requirements of section 10 of Annex III C apply. 8. TEST RESISTANCE TO CHEMICALS The requirements of section 11 of Annex III C apply. EWG:L777UMBE21.96 FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 507 mm; 95 Zeilen; 4820 Zeichen; Bediener: MARK Pr.: C; Kunde: 43649 engl. 21 ANNEX III L DOUBLE-GLAZED UNITS 1. DEFINITION OF TYPE Double-glazed units are considered to belong to different types if they differ in at least one of the following principal or secondary characteristics. 1.1. The principal characteristics are as follows: 1.1.1. the trade name or mark; 1.1.2. the composition of the double-glazed unit (symmetrical, asymmetrical); 1.1.3. the type of each component glass pane as defined in section 1 of Annex III E, III G or III K; 1.1.4. the nominal width of the gap between the two glass panes; 1.1.5. the type of sealing (organic, or glass to glass/glass to metal). 1.2. The secondary characteristics are: 1.2.1. The secondary characteristics of each component glass pane, as defined in section 1.2 of Annex III E, III G or III K. 2. GENERAL 2.1. Each component glass pane forming the double-glazed unit must either be type-approved or subjected to the requirements set out in the relevant Annex (III E, III G or III K). 2.2. Tests carried out on double-glazed units having a nominal width of gap ´e' are considered to be applicable to all double-glazed units having the same characteristics and a nominal width of gap ´e' p 3 mm. However, the applicant for component type-approval may submit for the tests the sample having the smallest gap and the sample having the largest gap. 2.3. In the case of double-glazed units having at least one laminated-glass pane or one glass-plastic pane, the test pieces are stored for at least 4 hours prior to the test at a temperature of 23 p 2 gC. The tests must take place immediately after the test pieces are taken out of the receptacle in which they were stored. 3. HEADFORM TEST 3.1. Index of difficulty of the secondary characteristics No secondary characteristic is involved. 3.2. Number of test pieces Six test pieces measuring 1 100 mm×500 mm (+5/-22 mm) subjected to testing for each thickness category of the component panes and each gap thickness as defined in point 1.1.4 above. 3.3. Test method 3.3.1. The method used is that described in section 3 of Annex III C. 3.3.2. The height of drop is 1,5 m (+0/-5 mm). 3.3.3. In the case of asymetrical double-glazing three tests on each side shall be carried out. 3.4. Interpretation of results 3.4.1. Double glazing comprising two panes of uniformly toughened glass. The test is considered to have given a satisfactory result if both components break. 3.4.2. Double glazing comprising two panes of laminated glass other than windscreens. The test is considered to have given a satisfactory result if the following conditions are fulfilled: 3.4.2.1. both components of the test piece yield and break, displaying numerous circular cracks centred approximately on the point of impact; 3.4.2.2. tears in the interlayers are allowed but the manikin's head must not pass through; 3.4.2.3. no large fragments of glass become detached from the interlayer. 3.4.3. Double glazing consisting of a uniformly toughened glass pane and of a laminated-glass pane or glass-plastic pane other than windscreens. This test is considered to have given a satisfactory result if the following conditions are met: 3.4.3.1. the toughened-glass pane breaks; 3.4.3.2. the laminated-glass pane or glass-plastic pane yields and breaks, displaying numerous circular cracks centred approximately on the point of impact; 3.4.3.3. tears in the interlayer(s) are allowed provided that the manikin's head does not pass through the test piece; 3.4.3.4. no large fragment of glass becomes detached from the interlayer. 3.4.4. A set of test pieces submitted for component type-approval are considered satisfactory with respect to behaviour under head impact if one of the following two conditions is met: 3.4.4.1. all the tests give satisfactory results. 3.4.4.2. a test having given an unsatisfactory result, a further series of tests must be carried out on a new set of test pieces and give satisfactory results. 4. OPTICAL QUALITIES The requirement concerning the regular light transmittance set out in section 9.1 of Annex III C apply to double-glazed units or parts of double-glazed units located at places which are essential to the driver's vision. EWG:L777UMBE22.95 FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 507 mm; 64 Zeilen; 4229 Zeichen; Bediener: JUTT Pr.: C; Kunde: L 777 EN 22 - 43649 ANNEX III M GROUPING OF WINDSCREENS FOR COMPONENT TYPE-APPROVAL TESTING 1. The features taken into account are: 1.1. the developed area of the windscreen; 1.2. the height of segment; 1.3. the curvature. 2. A group is made up of a thickness class. 3. Classification is performed in ascending order of developed area. The five largest and the five smallest developed areas are selected, and numbered as follows: 1 for the next smallest after 4 1 for the largest 1 for the smallest 2 for the next smallest after 1 2 for the next largest after 1 3 for the next smallest after 2 3 for the next largest after 2 4 for the next smallest after 3 4 for the next largest after 3 5 for the next smallest after 4 5 for the next largest after 4 4. Within each of the two series defined in point 3 above, the heights of segment are indicated as follows: 1 for the greatest height of segment, 2 for the next smallest, 3 for the next smallest, etc. 5. Within each of the two series defined in point 3 above, the radii of curvature are indicated as follows: 1 for the smallest radius of curvature, 2 for the next greatest, 3 for the next greatest, etc. 6. The numbers awarded to each windscreen in the two series defined in point 3 above are added together. 6.1. That windscreen among the five largest which has the smallest total and that windscreen among the five smallest which has the smallest total are selected for the full tests defined in Annex III D, III F, III H, III I or III J. 6.2 The other windscreens in the same series are tested to verify the optical qualities defined in section 9 of Annex III C. 7. A few windscreens having significantly different parameters of shape and/or radius of curvature from the extremes of the selected group may also be tested if the technical service conducting the tests considers that the parameters in question are likely to have appreciable adverse effects. 8. The limits of the group are determined by developed area of windscreen. Where a windscreen submitted for component type-approval has a developed area outside the approved limits and/or has a significantly greater height of segment or a significantly smaller radius of curvature, it is considered to be of a new type and subjected to additional tests if the technical service deems such tests technically necessary, having regard to the information already in its possession concerning the product and the material used. 9. Should any other windscreen model subsequently be manufactured by the holder of component type-approval in a thickness class already approved: 9.1. it must be ascertained whether that model can be included among the five largest or the five smallest selected for component type-approval of the group in question; 9.2. numbering by the procedures defined in points 3, 4 and 5 above is performed again; 9.3. if the sum of the numbers awarded to the windscreen newly incorporated among the five largest or the five smallest windscreens: 9.3.1. is found to be the smallest, the following tests are performed: 9.3.1.1. toughened-glass windscreen: 9.3.1.1.1. fragmentation, 9.3.1.1.2. headform impact, 9.3.1.1.3. optical distortion, 9.3.1.1.4. secondary-image separation, 9.3.1.1.5. light transmission; 9.3.1.2. Laminated-glass or glass-plastic windscreen: 9.3.1.2.1. headform impact, 9.3.1.2.2. optical distortion, 9.3.1.2.3. secondary-image separation, 9.3.1.2.4. light transmission; 9.3.1.3. Treated laminated-glass windscreen: the tests specified in sections 9.3.1.1.1, 9.3.1.1.2 and 9.3.1.2; 9.3.1.4. Plastic-faced windscreen: the tests specified in section 9.3.1.1 or 9.3.1.2 as appropriate; 9.3.2. is found not to be the smallest, only the tests prescribed for verifying the optical qualities defined in section 9 of Annex III C. EWG:L777UMBE23.96 FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 507 mm; 72 Zeilen; 3825 Zeichen; Bediener: MARK Pr.: C; Kunde: L 777 umbe 23 ANNEX III N MEASUREMENT OF THE HEIGHTS OF SEGMENT AND POSITION OF THE POINTS OF IMPACT ANNEX III O CHECKS ON CONFORMITY OF PRODUCTION 1. DEFINITIONS For the purposes of this Annex: 1.1. ´type of product' means all glass panes having the same principal characteristics; 1.2. ´thickness class' means all glass panes having the thickness of component parts within the permitted tolerances; 1.3. ´production unit' means all production facilities of one or several types of glass panes established in the same place; it may include several production lines; 1.4. ´shift' means a period of production carried out by the same production line during daily working hours; 1.5. ´production run' means a continuous period of production of the same type of product in the same shift; 1.6. ´Ps' means the number of glass panes of the same type of product produced by the same shift; 1.7. ´Pr' means the number of glass panes of the same type of product produced during a production run. 2. TESTS The glass panes are subjected to the following tests: 2.1. Toughened-glass windscreens 2.1.1. Fragmentation test in accordance with the requirements of section 2 of Annex III D. 2.1.2. Light transmission measurement in accordance with the requirements of section 9.1 of Annex III C. 2.1.3. Optical distortion test in accordance with the requirement of section 9.2 of Annex III C. 2.1.4. Secondary image separation test in accordance with the requirements of section 9.3 of Annex III C. 2.2. Uniformly toughened glass panes 2.2.1. Fragmentation test in accordance with the requirements of section 2 of Annex III E. 2.2.2. Light transmission measurement in accordance with the requirements of section 9.1 of Annex III C. 2.2.3. In the case of glass panes used as windscreens: 2.2.3.1. Optical distortion test in accordance with the requirements of section 9.2 of Annex III C. 2.2.3.2. Secondary image separation test in accordance with the requirements of section 9.3 of Annex III C. 2.3. Ordinary laminated-glass windscreens and glass-plastic windscreens 2.3.1. Headform test in accordance with the requirements of section 3 of Annex III F. 2.3.2. 2 260-g-ball test in accordance with the requirements of section 4.2 of Annex III F and section 2.2 of Annex III C. 2.3.3. Test of resistance to high temperature in accordance with the requirements of section 5 of Annex III C. 2.3.4. Light transmission measurement in accordance with the requirements of section 9.1 of Annex III C. 2.3.5. Optical distortion test in accordance with the requirements of section 9.2 of Annex III C. 2.3.6. Secondary image separation test in accordance with the requirements of section 9.3 of Annex III C. 2.3.7. In the case of glass-plastic windscreens only: 2.3.7.1. Test of resistance to abrasion in accordance with the requirements of section 2.1 of Annex III I. 2.3.7.2. Resistance-to-humidity test in accordance with the requirements of section 3 of Annex III I. 2.3.7.3. Test of resistance to chemicals in accordance with the requirements of section 11 of Annex III C. 2.4. Ordinary lamirated-glass and glass-plastic panes other than windscreens 2.4.1. 227-g-ball impact test in accordance with the requirements of section 4 of Annex III G. 2.4.2. Test of resistance to high temperature in accordance with the requirements of section 5 of Annex III C. 2.4.3. Light transmission measurement in accordance with the requirements of section 9.1 of Annex III C. 2.4.4. In the case of glass-plastic panes only: 2.4.4.1. Test of resistance to abrasion in accordance with the requirements of point 2.1 of Annex III I. 2.4.4.2. Resistance-to-humidity test in accordance with the requirements of section 3 of Annex III I. 2.4.4.3. Test of resistance to chemicals in accordance with the requirements of section 11 of Annex III C. 2.4.5. The above provisions are considered to be met if the corresponding tests have been carried out on a windscreen of the same composition. 2.5. Treated laminated-glass windscreens 2.5.1. In addition to the tests described in section 2.3, a fragmentation test is to be carried out in accordance with the requirements of section 4 of Annex III H. 2.6. Glass panes faced with plastic material In addition to the tests prescribed in the various sections of this Annex, the following tests are to be carried out: 2.6.1. Tests of resistance to abrasion in accordance with the requirements of point 2.1 of Annex III I. 2.6.2. Resistance-to-humidity test in accordance with the requirements of section 3 of Annex III I. 2.6.3. Test of resistance to chemicals in accordance with the requirements of section 11 of Annex III C. 2.7. Double-glazed units The tests to be performed are those specified in this Annex for each glass pane composing the double-glazed unit, with the same frequency and the same requirements. 3. FREQUENCY OF TESTS AND RESULTS 3.1. Fragmentation 3.1.1. Tests 3.1.1.1. A first series of tests consisting of a break at each impact point specified by this Directive are to be carried out with photographic prints at the beginning of the production of each new type of glass pane to determine the most severe break point. However, for toughened-glass windscreens, this first series of tests are to be carried out only if the annual production of this type of glass pane exceeds 200 units. 3.1.1.2. During the production run the check test is to be carried out using the break point as determined in point 3.1.1.1. 3.1.1.3. A check is to be carried out at the beginning of each production run or following a change of colour. 3.1.1.4. During the production run the check tests are to be carried out at the following minimum frequency: Toughened-glass windscreens Toughened-glass panes other than windscreens Treated laminated- glass windscreens Ps 9 200: one break per production run Pr 9 500: one per shift 0,1 % per type Ps > 200: one break every four hours of production Pr > 500: two per shift 3.1.1.5. A check test is to be carried out at the end of the production run on one of the last glass panes manufactured. 3.1.1.6. for Pr < 20, only one fragmentation test per production run need be carried out. EWG:L777UMBE25.95 FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 511 mm; 107 Zeilen; 6041 Zeichen; Bediener: JUTT Pr.: C; Kunde: L 777 England 25 ANNEX III P MODEL Name of administration ANNEX TO THE EEC TYPE-APPROVAL CERTIFICATE FOR A TRACTOR IN RESPECT OF THE WINDSCREEN AND OTHER GLASS PANES (Articles 4 (2) and 10 of Council Directive 74/150/EEC of 4 March 1974 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to the type-approval of wheeled agricultural and forestry tractors) EEC type-approval No: . Extension No: . 1. Make (name of undertaking) of tractor: . 2. Type and where appropriate commercial name of tractor: . 3. Name and address of manufacturer: . . 4. Name and address of manufacturer's authorized representative (if any): . . 5. Description of type of windscreen and other glass panes (toughened, laminated, plastic, glass-plastic flat, curved, etc.). 6. EEC component type-approval number of the windscreen and other panes: . 7. Date on which tractor was submitted for EEC type-approval: . 8. Technical service resonsible for type-approval: . 9. Date of report issued by that service: . 10. Number of report issued by that service: . 11. EEC component type-approval for the windscreen and other glass panes is granted/refused (¹). 12. Place: . 13. Date: . 14. Signature: . 15. The following documents bearing the EEC type-approval number given above are attached to this document: ................................... dimensioned drawings; ................................... sketch or photograph of the windscreen and other glass panes in the tractor cab. These data are supplied to the competent authorities of the other Member States at their specific request. 16. Remarks: . . . . . (¹) Delete where inapplicable. EWG:L777UMBE26.96 FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 253 mm; 42 Zeilen; 1662 Zeichen; Bediener: MARK Pr.: C; Kunde: 43649 ANNEX IV MECHANICAL COUPLINGS BETWEEN TRACTOR AND TOWED VEHICLE AND VERTICAL LOAD ON THE COUPLING POINT 1. Definitions 1.1. ´Mechanical coupling between tractor and towed vehicle' means the components installed on the tractor and on the towed vehicle in order to provide the mechanical coupling between those vehicles. Only mechanical coupling components for tractors are covered in this Directive. Among the various types of mechanical coupling components for tractors a basic distinction is made between: - clevis type (see Figures 1 and 2 of Appendix 1), - towing hook (see Figure 3 of Appendix 1), - tractor drawbar (see Figure 4 of Appendix 1). 1.2. ´Type of mechanical coupling between tractor and towed vehicle' means parts which do not differ from one another in such essential respects as: 1.2.1. nature of mechanical coupling component, 1.2.2. drawbar rings (40 mm and/or 50 mm diameter), 1.2.3. external shape, dimensions or mode of operation (e.g. automatic or non-automatic), 1.2.4. material, 1.2.5. value of D as defined in Appendix 2 for the test performed using the dynamic method or the trailer mass as defined in Appendix 3 for tests performed using the static method, and also the vertical load on the coupling point S. 1.3. ´Reference centre of mechanical coupling' means the point on the pin axis which is equidistant from the wings in the case of a fork and the point resulting from the interesection of the plane of symmetry of the hook with the generatrix of the concave part of the hook at the level of contact with the ring when this is in the traction position. 1.4. ´Height above ground of mechanical coupling (h)' means the distance between the horizontal plane through the reference centre of the mechanical coupling and the horizontal plane on which the wheels of the tractor are resting. 1.5. ´Projection of mechanical coupling (c)' means the distance between the reference centre of the mechanical coupling component and the vertical plane passing through the axle on which the rear wheels of the tractor are mounted. 1.6. ´Vertical load on the coupling point (S)' means the load transmitted, under static conditions on the reference centre of the mechanical coupling. 1.7. ´Automatic' means a mechanical coupling component which closes and secures itself when the sliding mechanism for the drawbar rings is actuated, without further action. 1.8. ´Wheelbase of tractor (l)' means the distance between the vertical planes perpendicular to the median longitudinal plane of the tractor passing through the axles of the tractor. 1.9. ´Weight on the front axle of the unladen tractor (a)' means that part of the weight of the tractor, which, under static conditions, is transmitted on the ground by the front axle of the tractor. 2. General requirements 2.1. The mechanical coupling components may be designed to function automatically or non-automatically. 2.2. The mechanical coupling components on the tractor must conform to the dimensional and strength requirements in point 3.1 and section 3.2 and the requirements for the vertical load on the coupling point in section 3.3. 2.3. The mechanical coupling components must be so designed and made that in normal use they will continue to function satisfactorily and retain the characteristics prescribed by this Directive. 2.4. All parts of mechanical coupling components must be made of materials of a quality sufficient to withstand the tests referred to in section 3.2. and must have durable strength characteristics. 2.5. All the couplings and their locks must be easy to engage and release and must be so designed that under normal operating conditions no accidental de-coupling is possible. In automatic coupling components the locked position must be secured in a form-locking manner by two independently functioning safety devices. However, the latter may be released using the same control device. 2.6. The drawbar ring must be capable of tilting horizontally at least 60° on both sides of the longitudinal axis of a non-built-in coupling device. In addition, vertical mobility of 20° upwards and downwards is required at all times. (See also Appendix 1.) The angles of articulation must not be attained at the same time. 2.7. The jaw must permit the drawbar rings to swivel axially at least 90° to the right or left around the longitudinal axis of the coupling with a fixed braking momentum of between 30 and 150 Nm. The towing hook must allow the drawbar ring to swivel axially at least 20° to the right or left around the longitudinal axis of the hook. 3. Special requirements 3.1. Dimensions The dimensions of the mechanical coupling components on the tractor must comply with Appendix 1, Figures 1 to 4. Any dimensions may be chosen if not shown in these figures. 3.2. Strength 3.2.1. For the purposes of checking their strength the mechanical coupling components must undergo a dynamic test under the conditions set out in Appendix 2 or a static test under the conditions set out in Appendix 3. 3.2.2. The test must not cause any permanent deformation, breaks or tears. 3.3. Vertical load on the coupling point (S) 3.3.1. The maximum static vertical load is laid down by the manufacturer. In no case, however, must it exceed 3 tonnes. 3.3.2. Conditions of acceptance: 3.3.2.1. The permissible static vertical load must not exceed the technically permissible static vertical load recommended by the manufacturer of the tractor nor the static vertical load laid down for the towing device pursuant to EEC component type-approval. 3.3.2.2. The requirements of section 2 of Annex I to Directive 74/151/EEC must be complied with, but the maximum load on the rear axle must not be exceeded. 3.4. Height above the ground of the coupling device (h) (see figure below). 3.4.1. All tractors must be fitted with a coupling device, the height above the ground of which must be in accordance with one of the following relationships: h1 9 (ma-0,2 mt) l-S.c or h2 9 (m1a-0,2 m1t) l-S.c h1 9 (ma-0,2 mt) l-S.c 0,8 (0,8 mt + S) or h2 9 (m1a-0,2 mlt) l-S.c 0,8 (0,8 mlt + S) where: mt: mass of the tractor (see Annex I, point 1.6), m1t: mass of the tractor (see Annex I, point 1.6) with ballast weight on the front axle, ma: weight on the front axle of the unladen tractor (see Annex IV, point 1.9), mla: weight on the front axle of the tractor (see Annex IV, point 1.9) with ballast weight on the front axle, l: tractor wheelbase (see Annex IV, point 1.8), S: vertical load on the coupling point (see Annex IV, point 1.6), c: distance between the reference centre of the mechanical coupling and the vertical plane passing through the axle of the rear wheels of the tractor (see Annex IV, point 1.5). 4. Application for EEC component type-approval 4.1. An application for EEC component type-approval for a tractor with respect to the coupling device must be submitted by the manufacturer of the device or by his authorized representative. 4.2. For each type of mechanical coupling component the application must be accompanied by the following documents and particulars: - scale drawings of the coupling device (three copies). These drawings must in particular show the required dimensions in detail as well as the measurements for mounting the device, - a short technical description of the coupling device specifying the type of construction and the material used, - a statement of the value of D as referred to in Appendix 2 for the dynamic test or the value of T (traction force) as referred to in Appendix 3 for the static test, and also the vertical load on the coupling point S, - one or more sample devices as required by the technical service. 5. Inscriptions 5.1. Every mechanical coupling component conforming to the type for which EEC component type-approval has been granted must bear the following inscriptions: 5.1.1. trade name or mark; 5.1.2. EEC component type-approval mark conforming to the model in Appendix 4; 5.1.3. where the strength is checked in accordance with Appendix 2 (dynamic test): permissible value of D, static vertical load value of S; 5.1.4. where the strength is checked in accordance with Appendix 3 (static test): towable mass and vertical load on the coupling point, S. 5.2. The data must be clearly visible, easily legible and durable. 6. Instructions for use All mechanical couplings must be accompanied by the manufacturer's instructions for use. These instructions must include the EEC component type-approved number and also the values of D or T depending on which test was performed on the coupling.EWG:L777UMBE27.96 FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 1015 mm; 134 Zeilen; 8682 Zeichen; Bediener: MARK Pr.: C; Kunde: 43649 10. 3. 89 Official Journal of the European Communities Appendix 1 DRAWINGS OF MECHANICAL COUPLING COMPONENTS 10. 3. 89 Official Journal of the European Communities Appendix 2 DYNAMIC TEST METHOD 1. TEST PROCEDURE The strength of the mechanical coupling is to be established by alternating traction on a test bed. This method describes the fatigue test to be used on the complete mechanical coupling device, i.e. when fitted with all the parts needed for its installation the mechanical coupling is mounted and tested on a test bed. The alternating forces are applied as far as possible sinusoidally (alternating and/or rising) with a load cycle depending on the material involved. No tears or breaks may occur during the test. 2. TEST CRITERIA The horizontal force components in the longitudinal axis of the vehicle together with the vertical force components form the basis of the test loads. In so far as they are of secondary importance, horizontal force components at right angles to the longitudinal axis of the vehicle and also moments are not to be taken into consideration. The horizontal force components in the longitudinal axis of the vehicle are represented by a mathematically established representative force, the value D. The following equation applied to the mechanical coupling: D = g · MT + MR D = g · MT · MR MT + MR Where: MT = the technically permissible total mass of the tractor, MR = the technically permissible total mass of the towed vehicles, g = 9,81 m/s². The vertical force components at right angles to the track are expressed by the static vertical load S. The technically permissible loads are given by the manufacturer. 3. TEST PROCEDURE 3.1. General requirements The test force is applied to the mechanical coupling device being tested by means of an appropriate standard drawbar ring beneath an angle formed by the position of the vertical test load Fv vis-à-vis the horizontal test load Fh in the direction of the median longitudinal plane passing from top front to bottom rear. The test force is applied at the usual point of contact between the mechanical coupling device and the drawbar ring. The play between the coupling device and the ring must be kept to a minimum. In principle the test force is applied in an alternating manner around the zero point. With an alternating test force the resulting load is equal to zero. Should the design of the coupling device (e.g. excessive play, towing hook) make it impossible to carry out the test with an alternating test load, the test load may also be applied on a rising basis in the direction of traction or pressure, whichever is the greater. Where the test is carried out with a rising force curve, the test load is equal to the upper (highest) load, and the lower (smallest) load should not exceed 5 % of the upper load. Care should be taken in the alternating force test to ensure that by suitable mounting of the test apparatus and choice of power conduction system no additional moments or forces arising at right angles to the test force are introduced; the angular error for the direction of force in the alternating force test should not exceed ± 1,5°; and for the rising force test the angle is set in the upper load position. The test frequency must not exceed 30 Hz. For components made of steel or steel casting the load cycle amounts to 2 · 10(. The subsequent tear test is carried out using the colour penetration method or similar method. If springs and/or dampers are incorporated into the coupling parts, they are not to be removed during the test but may be replaced if, during the test, they are subject to strain under conditions which would not obtain during normal operation (e.g. heat action) and become damaged. Their behaviour before, during and after the test must be described in the test report. 3.2. Test forces The test force consists in geometrical terms of the horizontal and vertical test components as follows: F = wFh2 + Fv2 F = w Fh2 + Fv2 where: Fh = ± 0,6 · D in the case of alternating force, or Fh = 1,0 · D in the case of rising force (traction or pressure), Fv = g · 1,5 · S S = static drawbar load (vertical force components on the track). EWG:L777UMBE29.96 FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 507 mm; 68 Zeilen; 4127 Zeichen; Bediener: MARK Pr.: C; Kunde: L 777 England 29 10. 3. 89 Official Journal of the European Communities Appendix 3 COUPLING DEVICE STATIC TEST METHOD 1. TEST SPECIFICATIONS 1.1. General 1.1.1. Subject to a check on its construction characteristics, the towing device must undergo static tests in accordance with the requirements of points 1.2, 1.3 and 1.4. 1.2. Test preparation The tests must be carried out on a special machine, with the towing device and any structure coupling it to the body of the agricultural tractor attached to a rigid structure by means of the same components used to mount it on the agricultural tractor. 1.3. Test instruments The instruments used to record loads applied and movements must have the following degree of accuracy: - loads applied ± 50 daN, - movements ± 0,01 mm. 1.4. Test procedure 1.4.1. The coupling device must first be subjected to a pre-traction load which does not exceed 15 % of the traction test load defined in point 1.4.2. 1.4.1.1. The operation described in section 1.4.1 must be repeated at least twice, starting with a zero load, which is gradually increased until the value prescribed in section 1.4.1 is reached, and then decreased to 500 daN; the settling load must be maintained for at least 60 seconds. 1.4.2. The data recorded for plotting the load/deformation curve under traction, or the graph of that curve provided by the printer linked to the traction machine, must be based on the application of increasing loads only, starting from 500 daN, in relation to the reference centre of the coupling device. There must be no breaks for values up to and including the traction test load which is established as 1,5 times the technically permissible trailer mass; in addition, the load/deformation curve must show a smooth progression, without irregularities, in the interval between 500 daN and ¹/3 of the maximum traction load. 1.4.2.1. Permanent deformation is recorded on the load/deformation curve in relation to the load of 500 daN after the test load has been brought back to that value. 1.4.2.2. The permanent deformation value recorded must not exceed 25 % of the maximum elastic deformation occurring. 1.5. The test referred to in section 1.4.2 must be preceded by a test in which an initial load of three times the maximum permissible vertical load recommended by the manufacturer is applied in a gradually increasing manner, starting from an initial load of 500 daN, to the reference centre of the coupling device. During the test, deformation of the coupling device must not exceed 10 % of the maximum elastic deformation occuring. The check is carried out after removing the vertical load and returning to the initial load of 500 daN. EWG:L777UMBE30.95 FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 253 mm; 42 Zeilen; 2666 Zeichen; Bediener: MARK Pr.: C; Kunde:L 777 England 30 10. 3. 89 Official Journal of the European Communities Appendix 4 COMPONENT TYPE-APPROVAL MARK The EEC component type-approval mark consists of: - a rectangle surrounding the lower-case letter ´e', followed by the distinguishing letter(s) or number of the Member State which has granted the component type-approval: - IRL 1 for Germany, 2 for France 3 for Italy, 4 for the Netherlands, 6 for Belgium, 9 for Spain, 11 for the United Kindom, 13 for Luxembourg, 18 for Denmark, IRL for Ireland, EL for Greece, 21 for Portugal. - an EEC component type-approval number, which corresponds to the number of the EEC component type-approval certificate issued for the type of coupling device in question as regards its strength and dimensions, placed in any convenient position below and near the rectangle, - by the capital letter ´D' or ´S' according to which test was performed on the mechanical coupling (dynamic test = D and static test = S) above the rectangle surrounding the lower-case letter ´e'. The coupling bearing the EEC component type-approval mark shown above is a device for which EEC component type-approval was granted in Germany (e 1) under the number 88-563 and on which a dynamic strength test (D) was performed. EWG:L777UMBE31.96 FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 253 mm; 43 Zeilen; 1251 Zeichen; Bediener: MARK Pr.: C; Kunde: 43649 10. 3. 89 Official Journal of the European Communities Appendix 5 MODEL EEC COMPONENT TYPE-APPROVAL CERTIFICATE Name of administration Notification concerning the granting, refusal, withdrawal or extension of EEC component type-approval with regard to the strength and dimensions and vertical load on the coupling point of a type of coupling device (clevis type, towing hook tractor drawbar) EEC component type-approval No: . . extension (¹) 1. Trade name or mark: . . 2. Type of coupling device (clevis type, towing hook, tractor drawbar) (²): 3. Name and address of manufacturer of coupling device: . . 4. If applicable, name and address of authorized representative of manufacturer of coupling device: . . 5. The coupling device was subjected to a dynamic/static (²) test and approved for the following values: 5.1. Dynamic test: value of D: . (kN) vertical load on the coupling point: . (daN) 5.2. Static test: towable mass: . (kg) vertical load on the coupling point: . (daN) 6. Submitted for EEC component type-approval on: . 7. Technical service responsible for carrying out the tests: . 8. Date and number of test report: . 9. EEC component type-approval in respect of the mechanical coupling is granted/refused (²): . 10. Place: . 11. Date: . 12. The following documents, bearing the component type-approval number shown above, are attached to this certificate (e.g. test report, drawings, etc.). This information is to be made available to the competent services of the other Member States only by express request: . . 13. Remarks: . . 14. Signature: . (¹) If applicable, state whether this is the first, second, etc., extension of the original EEC component type-approval. (²) Delete where inapplicable. EWG:L777UMBE32.96 FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 253 mm; 41 Zeilen; 1719 Zeichen; Bediener: MARK Pr.: C; Kunde: L 777 England 32 10. 3. 89 Official Journal of the European Communities Appendix 6 CONDITIONS FOR GRANTING EEC TYPE-APPROVAL 1. The application for EEC type-approval of a tractor, with regard to the strength and dimensions of a coupling device, is submitted by the tractor manufacturer or by his authorized representative. 2. A tractor representative of the tractor type to be approved, on which a coupling device, duly approved, is mounted is submitted to the technical services responsible for conducting the type-approval tests. 3. The technical service responsible for conducting the type-approval tests checks whether the approved type of coupling device is suitable for mounting on the type of tractor for which type-approval is requested. In particular, it ascertains that the attachment of the coupling device corresponds to that which was tested when the EEC component type-approval was granted. 4. The holder of the EEC type-approval may ask for its extension for other types of coupling device. 5. The competent authorities grant such extension on the following conditions: 5.1. the new type of coupling device has received EEC component type-approval; 5.2. it is suitable for mounting on the type of tractor for which the extension of the EEC type-approval is requested; 5.3. the attachment of the coupling device on the tractor corresponds to that which was presented when EEC component type-approval was granted. 6. A certificate, of which a model is shown in Appendix 5, is annexed to the EEC type-approval certificate for each type-approval or type-approval extension which has been granted or refused. 7. If the application for EEC type-approval for a type of tractor is made at the same time as the request for EEC component type-approval for a type of coupling device on a tractor for which EEC type-approval is requested, then points 2 and 3 are unnecessary. EWG:L777UMBE33.95 FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 253 mm; 23 Zeilen; 1881 Zeichen; Bediener: MARK Pr.: C; Kunde: L777UMBE33 - 43649 10. 3. 89 Official Journal of the European Communities Appendix 7 MODEL Name of administration ANNEX TO THE EEC TYPE-APPROVAL CERTIFICATE FOR A TRACTOR TYPE WITH REGARD TO THE COUPLING DEVICE AND THE STRENGTH OF ITS ATTACHMENT TO THE TRACTOR (Articles 4 (2) and 10 of Council Directive 74/150/EEC of 4 March 1974 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to the type-approval of wheeled agricultural or forestry tractors) EEC type-approval No: . . extension (¹) 1. Trade name or mark of tractor: . 2. Tractor type and trade name: . 3. Name and address of tractor manufacturer: . . 4. If applicable, name and address of manufacturer's authorized representative: . . 5. Trade name or mark of coupling device: . . 6. Type(s) of coupling device(s): 7. EEC mark and EEC component type-approval number: . 8. Extension of EEC type-approval to the following type(s) of coupling: . . 9. Permissible static vertical load on the coupling point: . daN 10. Tractor submitted for EEC type-approval testing on: . 11. Technical service responsibile for EEC type-approval tests: . 12. Date of test report issued by that technical service: . 13. Number of test report issued by that service: . 14. EEC type-approval with regard to the coupling device and the strength of its attachment to the tractor has been granted/refused (²). 15. The extension of the EEC type-approval with regard to the coupling device and the strength of its attachment to the tractor has been granted/refused (²). 16. Place: . 17. Date: . 18. Signature: . (¹) If applicable, state whether this is the first, second, etc. extension of the original EEC type-approval. (²) Delete where inapplicable. EWG:L777UMBE34.96 FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 253 mm; 40 Zeilen; 1677 Zeichen; Bediener: MARK Pr.: C; Kunde: 43647 ANNEX V LOCATION AND METHOD OF AFFIXING STATUTORY PLATES AND INSCRIPTIONS ON THE BODY OF THE TRACTOR 1. GENERAL 1.1. All agricultural or forestry tractors must be provided with the plate and inscriptions described in the following sections. The plate and inscriptions are attached either by the manufacturer or by his authorized representative. 2. MANUFACTURER'S PLATE 2.1. A manufacturer's plate, modelled on that shown to the Appendix hereto, must be firmly attached in a conspicuous and readily accessible position on a part normally not subject to replacement in use. It must show clearly and indelibly the following information in the order listed. 2.1.1. Name of manufacturer. 2.1.2. Type of tractor (and version if necessary). 2.1.3. EEC type-approval number. This number is composed of a small letter ´e' followed in the order given, by the distinguishing number or letters of the country which granted the EEC type-approval (1 for Germany, 2 for France, 3 for Italy, 4 for the Netherlands, 6 for Belgium, 9 for Spain, 11 for the United Kingdom, 13 for Luxembourg, 18 for Denmark, 21 for Portugal, EL for Greece, IRL for Ireland) and by the type-approval certificate for the type of vehicle. An asterisk is placed between the letter ´e' and the distinguishing letters or number of the country which granted the EEC type-approval as well as between that number or the letters concerned and the EEC type-approval number. 2.1.4. Tractor identification number. 2.1.5. Minimum and maximum values for the maximum permitted laden mass of the tractor, depending om the possible types of tyre which may be fitted. 2.1.6. Maximum permitted vehicle mass bearing on each tractor axle, according to the possible types of tyre which may be fitted; this information must be listed in order from front to rear. 2.1.7. Technically permissible towable mass(es): as referred to in point 1.7 of Annex I. 2.1.8. Member States may require for tractors placed on their markets, that the country of final assembly also be indicated in addition to the name of the manufacturer where the final assembly was carried out elsewhere than in the manufacturer's country, but not in a Member State of the Community. 2.2. The manufacturer may give additional information below or to the side of the prescribed inscriptions, outside a clearly marked rectangle enclosing only the information prescribed in points 2.1.1 to 2.1.7 (see example of manufacturer's plate below). 3. TRACTOR IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The tractor identification number is a fixed combination of characters assigned to each tractor by the manufacturer. Its purpose is to ensure that every tractor can be clearly identified over a period of 30 years through the intermediary of the manufacturer, without a need for reference following requirements. 3.1. It must be marked on the manufacturer's plate, and also on the chassis, or other similar structure. 3.1.1. It must wherever possible be entered on a single line. 3.1.2. It must be marked on the chassis or other similar structure, on the front right-hand side of the vehicle. 3.1.3. It must be placed in a clearly visible and accessible position by a method such as hammering or stamping, in such a way that it cannot be obliterated or deteriorate. 4. CHARACTERS 4.1. Roman letters and arabic numerals must be used for all of the markings provided for in sections 2 and 3. However, the roman letters used in the markings provided for in points 2.1.1 and 2.1.3 and section 3 must be capital letters. 4.2. For the tractor identification number: 4.2.1. use of the letters ´I' ´O' and ´Q' and dashes, asterisks and other special signs is not permitted; 4.2.2. the minimum height of the letters and figures should be as follows: 4.2.2.1. 7 mm for characters marked directly on the chassis, frame or other similar structure of the tractor, 4.2.2.2. 4 mm for characters marked on the manufacturer's plate. Example of manufacturer's plate The following example in no way prejudices the data which may actually be entered on the manufacturer's plate: it is given solely for information purposes. STELLA TRAKTORWERKE Type: 846 E EEC number: e * 1 * 1792 Identification number: GBS18041947 Total permissible mass (*): 4 820 to 6 310 kg Permissible front axle load (*): 2 390 to 3 200 kg Permissible rear axle load (*): 3 130 to 4 260 kg (*) Depending on the tyres. Permissible towable mass: - unbraked towable mass:3 000 kg - independently-braked towable mass:6 000 kg - inertia-braked towable mass:3 000 kg - towable mass fitted with an assisted braking system (hydraulic or pneumatic):12 000 kg EWG:L777UMBE35.96 FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 507 mm; 76 Zeilen; 4671 Zeichen; Bediener: MARK Pr.: C; Kunde: L 777 england 35 10. 3. 89 Official Journal of the European Communities Appendix MODEL Name of administration ANNEX TO THE EEC TYPE-APROVAL CERTIFICATE FOR A TRACTOR TYPE WITH REGARD TO THE POSITION AND THE METHOD OF AFFIXING STATUTORY PLATES AND INSCRIPTIONS ON THE BODY OF THE TRACTOR (Articles 4 (2) and 10 of Council Directive 74/150/EEC of 4 March 1974 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to the EEC type-approval of wheeled agricultural or forestry tractors) EEC type-approval number: . 1. Make of tractor or business name of manufacturer: . 2. Type and, if appropriate, trade name of tractor: . 3. Manufacturer's name and address: . 4. If applicable, name and address of manufacturer's authorized representative: . 5. Date of submission of tractor for EEC type-approval: . 6. Technical service conducting the type-approval tests: . 7. Date of report issued by that service: . 8. Number of report issued by that service: . 9. EEC type-approval for the location and method of affixing statutory plates and inscriptions on the body of the tractor is granted/refused (¹). 10. Place: . 11. Date: . 12. Signature: . 13. The following documents bearing the EEC type-approval number indicated above are attached to this certificate: ................................... dimensioned drawing; ................................... sketch or photograph of the location and method of affixing statutory plates and inscriptions on the body of the tractor. The date must be supplied at the competent authorities of the other Member States if they so request. 14. Remarks: . . . . (¹) Delete where inapplicable. EWG:L777UMBE36.96 FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 253 mm; 38 Zeilen; 1621 Zeichen; Bediener: MARK Pr.: C; Kunde: England ANNEX VI BRAKE CONTROL OF TOWED VEHICLES AND BRAKE COUPLING BETWEEN THE TRACTOR AND TOWED VEHICLES 1. Where a tractor includes a trailer brake control, the control must be either hand- or foot-operated and it must be possible to moderate and operate it from the driver's seat, but it must not be affected by any operation of other controls. Where the tractor is fitted with a pneumatic or hydraulic coupling system located between the tractor and the towed mass, only one single control should be fitted for the service braking of the vehicle combination. 2. The braking systems used may be systems, the characteristics of which are as defined in Annex I to Directive 76/432/EEC relating to the braking devices of wheeled agricultural or forestry tractors. The fitting must be designed and effected in such a way as to ensure that the operation of the tractor is not adversely affected in the event of the failure or the poor operation of the towed vehicle's breaking device or in the case of a breach in the coupling. 3. Where the coupling between the tractor and the towed vehicle(s) is hydraulic or pneumatic it must also comply with one or other of the following conditions. 3.1. Hydraulic coupling: The hydraulic coupling must be of a single conduit type. It must comply with ISO standard ISO/5676 of 1983, the projecting section being on the tractor. Operation of the control must permit zero pressure to be delivered to the coupling head in the rest position; the working pressure must be no less than 10 and no more that 15 MPa. It must not be possible to disconnect the source of power from the engine. 3.2. Pneumatic coupling: The coupling between the tractor and the towed vehicle(s) of a dual-conduit type: an automatic conduit and a direct braking conduit operates by an increase in pressure. The coupling head must comply with ISO standard ISO 1728 of 1980. Operation of the control must permit a working pressure of no less than 0,65 and no more than 0,8 MPa to be delivered to the coupling head. EWG:L777UMBE37.96 FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 253 mm; 28 Zeilen; 2087 Zeichen; Bediener: MARK Pr.: C; Kunde: 43649 Montan England 37 10. 3. 89 Official Journal of the European Communities Appendix MODEL Name of administration ANNEX TO THE EEC TYPE-APPROVAL CERTIFICATE FOR A TRACTOR TYPE WITH REGARD TO THE BRAKE CONTROL OF THE TOWED VEHICLE (Articles 4 (2) and 10 of Council Directive 74/150/EEC of 4 March 1974 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to the EEC type-approval of wheeled agricultural or forestry tractors) EEC type-approval number: . 1. Make of tractor (or business name of manufacturer): . . 2. Type and where appropriate commercial name of tractor: . 3. Manufacturer's name and address: . 4. If applicable, name and address of manufacturer's authorized representative: . . 5. Description of component(s) and/or characteristic(s) of the brake control of the towed vehicle: . . 6. Date of submission of tractor for EEC type-approval: . . 7. Technical service conducting the type-approval tests: . 8. Date of report issued by that service: . . 9. Number of report issued by that service: . 10. EEC type-approval for the brake control of the towed vehicle granted/refused (¹): 11. Place: . 12. Date: . 13. Signature: . 14. The following documents, bearing the EEC type-approval number indicated above, are attached to this certificate: .................... sketch or photograph of the relevant parts of the tractor. These data must be supplied to the component authorities of the other Member States if they so request. 15. Remarks: . . (¹) Delete where inapplicable. EWG:L777UMBE38.96 FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 253 mm; 39 Zeilen; 1480 Zeichen; Bediener: MARK Pr.: C; Kunde: 43649
COUNCIL DIRECTIVE of 21 December 1988 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to certain components and characteristics of wheeled agricultural or forestry tractors (89/173/EEC)
THE COUNCIL OF THE EUROPEAN COMMUNITIES,
Having regard to the Treaty establishing the European Economic Community, and in particular Article 100a thereof,
Having regard to the proposal from the Commission (1),
In cooperation with the European Parliament (2),
Having regard to the opinion of the Economic and Social Committee (3),
Whereas it is important to adopt measures with the aim of progressively establishing the internal market over a period expiring on 31 December 1992; whereas the internal market shall comprise an area without internal frontiers in which the free movement of goods, persons, services and capital is ensured;
Whereas the technical requirements which tractors must fulfil in pursuance of national laws concern, inter alia, their dimensions and masses, speed governors, the protection of their drive components, projections and wheels, brake control for towed vehicles, windscreens and other glazing, the mechanical coupling between tractor and towed vehicle and the location and method of affixing statutory plates and markings to the body of the tractor;
Whereas those requirements differ from one Member State to another; whereas it is consequently necessary for the same
OJ No C 326, 18. 12. 1988.
requirements to be adopted by all of the Member States, either in addition or in place of the existing regulations, in order, in particular, to permit implementation, for each type of tractor, of the EEC type-approval procedure covered
by Council Directive 74/150/EEC of 4 March 1974
on the approximation of the laws of the Member States
relating to the type-approval of wheeled agricultural or
forestry tractors (4), as last amended by Directive 82/890/EEC (5);
Whereas with regard, in particular, to the technical requirements relating to safety glass - windscreens and other glazing - it is appropriate to embrace with some amendments those adopted by the United Nations' Economic Commission for Europe in its Regulation No 43 (´Uniform provisions concerning the approval of safety glazing and glazing materials') forming an addendum to the agreement of 20 March 1958 concerning the adoption of uniform conditions of approval and thus reciprocal recognition of approval for motor vehicle equipment and parts (6),
HAS ADOPTED THIS DIRECTIVE:
Article 1 1. (Agricultural or forestry) tractor means any motor vehicle fitted with wheels or endless tracks and having at least two axles, the main function of which lies in its tractive power and which is specially designed to, push, carry or
Doc.
"
y
x
E/ECE/234
E/ECE/TRANS/505
aa
a
s
REV 1/ADD 42/REV/1.
power certain tools, machinery or trailers intended for agricultural or forestry use. It may be equipped to carry a load and passengers.
2. This Directive shall apply only to tractors defined in paragraph 1 which are fitted with pneumatic tyres and which have two axles and a maximum design speed of between 6 and 30 km/h.
Article 2 1. No Member State may refuse EEC type-approval or national type-approval of a tractor or refuse its registration or prohibit the sale, entry into service or use of a tractor or grounds relating to:
- dimensions and towable masses,
- speed governors and protection of drive components, projections and wheels,
- windscreens and other glazing,
- mechanical couplings between tractor and towed vehicle, including the vertical load on the coupling point,
- location and method of affixing statutory plates and inscriptions to the body of the tractor,
- brake control for towed vehicles,
where these comply with the requirements of the Annexes relating thereto and where the windscreens and other glass panes or the mechanical couplings bear an EEC component type-approval mark.
2. By way of derogation from the provisions of paragraph 1 relating to use of the tractor, Member States may, for reasons concerning towable mass(es), continue to apply their national provisions reflecting in particular the special requirements relating to the nature of the land relief on their territory, within the limits of the towable masses listed in section 2.2 of Annex I in so far as this does not involve alterations to the tractor or a further supplementary national type-approval.
Article 3 1. Each Member State shall grant EEC component type-
approval for any type of windscreen or other glass-pane and/or of mechanical coupling which satisfies the construction and testing requirements laid down in Annexes III and/or IV.
2. The Member State which has granted EEC component type-approval shall take the measures required in order to verify, in so far as is necessary and if need be in cooperation
with the competent authorities in the other Member States, that production models conform to the approved type. Such verification shall be limited to spot checks.
Article 4 Member States shall, for each type of windscreen or other glass pane or of mechanical coupling which they approve pursuant to Article 3, issue to the manufacturer of
the tractor, windscreen or mechanical coupling or to
his authorized representative, an EEC component type-approval mark conforming to the models shown in Annex III or IV.
Member States shall take all appropriate measures to prevent the use of marks liable to create confusion between the type of equipment which has been granted EEC component type-approval pursuant to Article 3 and equipment of other types.
Article 5 1. No Member State may prohibit the placing on the market of windscreens and other glass panes or mechanical couplings on grounds relating to their construction if they bear the EEC component type-approval mark.
2. Nevertheless a Member State may prohibit the placing on the market of windscreens or mechanical couplings bearing the EEC component type-approval mark which do not conform to the approved type.
That State shall forthwith inform the other Member States and the Commission of the measures taken, specifying the reasons for its decision.
Article 6 The competent authorities of each Member State shall within one month send to the competent authorities of the other Member States a copy of the component type-approval certificates, examples of which are given in Annex III or IV, completed for each type of windscreen or mechanical coupling which they approve or refuse to approve.
Article 7 1. If the Member State which has granted EEC component type-approval finds that a number of windscreens or mechanical couplings bearing the same EEC component type-approval mark do not conform to the type which it has approved, it shall take the necessary measures to ensure that production models conform to the approved type. The competent authorities of that State shall advise those of the other Member States of the measures taken, which may, if necessary, where there is serious and repeated failure to conform, extend to withdrawal of EEC component type-approval. The said authorities shall take the same measures if they are informed by the competent authorities of another Member State of such failure to conform.
2. The competent authorities of the Member States shall inform each other within one month of any withdrawal of EEC component type-approval and of the reasons for such a measure.
Article 8 Any decision taken pursuant to the provisions adopted in implementation of this Directive to refuse or withdraw EEC component type-approval for a windscreen or mechanical coupling or to prohibit their placing on the market or use, shall set out in detail the reasons on which it is based. Such decisions shall be notified to the party concerned, who shall at the same time be informed of the remedies available to him under the laws in force in the Member States and of the time limits allowed for the exercise of such remedies.
Article 9 Any amendments necessary to adapt the requirements of the Annexes to technical progress shall be adopted in accordance with the procedure laid down in Article 13 of Directive 74/150/EEC.
Article 10 1. Member States shall bring into force the provisions necessary in order to comply with this Directive by
31 December 1989. They shall forthwith inform the Commission thereof.
2. Member States shall notify to the Commission the texts of the main provisions of national law which they adopt in the field covered by this Directive.
Article 11 This Directive is addressed to the Member States.
Done at Brussels, 21 December 1988.
For the Council
The President
V. PAPANDREOU
EWG:L777UMBE00.94
FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 1238 mm; 205 Zeilen; 9000 Zeichen;
Bediener: MARK Pr.: C;
Kunde: L777UMBE00
(1) OJ No C 218, 17. 8. 1987, p. 1.
(2) OJ No C 281, 19. 10. 1987, p. 180 and(3) OJ No C 319, 30. 11. 1987, p. 25.(4) OJ No L 84, 28. 3. 1974, p. 10.
(5) OJ No L 378, 31. 12. 1982, p. 45.
(6) Doc. E/ECE/TRANS/505
(() ANNEX I DIMENSIONS AND TOWABLE MASSES 1.
DEFINITIONS
1.1.
´Length' means:
- the length of the tractor measured between the vertical planes at right angles to the longitudinal axis of the tractor and passing the outermost points thereof, but excluding:
- all mirrors,
- all starting handles,
- all front or lateral position (side) lamps.
1.2.
´Width' means:
- the width of the tractor measured between the vertical planes parallel to the longitudinal axis of the tractor and passing through the outermost points thereof, but excluding:
- any mirrors,
- any direction indicators,
- any front, lateral or rear position (side) lamps; any parking lamps,
- any distortion of the tyres caused by the weight of the tractor,
- any folding components such as lift-up footrests and flexible mud-flaps.
1.3.
´Height' means:
- the vertical distance between the ground and the point on the tractor the greatest distance from the ground, excluding the aerial. When this height is determined, the tractor must be:
- fitted with new tyres having the greatest rolling radius specified by their manufacturer.
1.4.
´Permissible towable mass'
means the mass which a type of tractor may tow. It may, for example, consist of one or more trailers towed or agricultural or forestry implements. A distinction is drawn between the technically permissible towable mass stated by the manufacturer and the authorized towable mass as laid down in section 2.2 below.
1.5.
´Towing device'
means a component on the tractor designed to provide a mechanical link between a tractor and towed vehicle.
1.6.
´Unladen mass of tractor in running order (Mt)'
means the mass defined in point 2.4 of Annex I to Directive 74/150/EEC.
1.7.
Technically permissable towable mass(es):
- unbraked towable mass,
- independently braked towable mass (as defined in point 1.12 of Annex I to Council Directive 76/432/EEC (¹),
- inertia braked towable mass (as defined in point 1.14 of Annex I to Directive 76/432/EEC),
- towable mass fitted with hydraulic or pneumatic braking: such braking may be of the continuous, semi-continuous or independent power-operated type as defined in points 1.9, 1.10 and 1.11, respectively, of Annex I to Directive 76/432/EEC.
(¹) OJ No L 122, 8. 5. 1976, p. 1.
2.
REQUIREMENTS
2.1.
Dimensions
The maximum dimensions of a tractor are as follows:
2.1.1.
length: 12 m;
2.1.2.
width: 2,5 m;
2.1.3.
height: 4 m.
2.1.4.
The measurements intended to check these dimensions are carried out as follows:
- with the tractor unladen and in running order as indicated in point 1.6,
- on a flat horizontal surface,
- with the tractor stationary and the engine switched off,
- with the new tyres at the normal pressure recommended by the manufacturer,
- with doors and windows closed,
- with the steering wheel in the straight-ahead position,
- without any agricultural or forestry implement attached to the tractor.
2.2
Permissible towable mass
2.2.1.
The permissible towable mass must not exceed:
2.2.1.1.
the technically permissible towable mass as defined in point 1.7, recommended by the tractor manufacturer;
2.2.1.2.
the towable mass laid down for towing device pursuant to EEC component-type approval.
2.2.2.
Where a Member State applies Article 2 (2), towable mass(es) must be specified on the tractor's registration certificate.
EWG:L777UMBE02.95
FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 507 mm; 63 Zeilen; 3393 Zeichen;
Bediener: MARK Pr.: C;
Kunde: 43649 Montan England 02
10. 3. 89
Official Journal of the European Communities
Appendix MODEL
Name of administration
ANNEX TO THE EEC TYPE-APPROVAL CERTIFICATE FOR A TYPE OF TRACTOR WITH
REGARD TO DIMENSIONS AND TOWABLE MASSES
(Articles 4 (2) and 10 of Council Directive 74/150/EEC of 4 March 1974 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to the EEC type-approval of wheeled agricultural or forestry tractors)
EEC type-approval No: .
1.
Component(s) or characteristic(s):
1.1.
Dimensions:
1.1.1.
length: . m
1.1.2.
width: . m
1.1.3.
height: . m
1.2.
Towable masses:
1.2.1.
unbraked towable mass: .................... kg
1.2.2.
independently braked towable mass: .................... kg
1.2.3.
inertia-braked towable mass: .................... kg
1.2.4.
towable mass fitted with an assisted braking system (hydraulic or pneumatic): .................... kg
2.
Make of tractor or business name of manufacturer: .
3.
Type and where appropriate commercial name of tractor: .
4.
Manufacturer's name and address: .
.
5.
If applicable, name and address of manufacturer's authorized representative: .
.
6.
Date of submission of tractor for EEC type-approval: .
7.
Technical service conducting the type-approval tests: .
.
8.
Date of report issued by that service: .
9.
Number of report issued by that service: .
10.
EEC type-approval for dimensions and towable masses is granted/refused (¹).
11.
Place: .
12.
Date: .
13.
Signature: .
14.
The following documents, bearing the EEC type-approval number indicated above are attached to this certificate:
................................... dimensioned drawings;
................................... drawing or photograph of the tractor.
The data must be supplied to the competent authorities of the other Member States if they so request.
15.
Remarks: .
.(¹) Delete where inapplicable.
EWG:L777UMBE03.96
FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 253 mm; 47 Zeilen; 1816 Zeichen;
Bediener: MARK Pr.: C;
Kunde: 43649 Montan England 03
ANNEX II SPEED GOVERNOR AND PROTECTION OF DRIVE COMPONENTS, PROJECTIONS AND WHEELS 1.
SPEED GOVERNOR
1.1.
If a speed governor is fitted as standard by the manufacturer, it must be installed and designed in such a way that the tractor complies with Directive 74/152/EEC (;) on maximum design speed.
2.
PROTECTION OF DRIVE COMPONENTS, PROJECTIONS AND WHEELS
2.1.
General
2.1.1.
Drive components, projections and wheels on tractors must be designed, fitted and protected in such a way as to prevent accidents to persons under normal conditions of use.
2.1.2.
The requirements of point 2.1.1 are regarded as being fulfilled if the requirements set out in section 2.3 have been complied with. Solutions other than those described in section 2.3 are authorized
if the manufacturer provides proof that they are at least equivalent to the requirements of
section 2.3.
2.1.3.
Protective devices must be firmly attached to the tractor. ´Firmly attached' means that removal of such devices should be possible only with the aid of tools.
2.1.4.
Cowls, lids and hoods, which could cause injury if they are slammed shut, must be made in such a way as to preclude their shutting accidentally (e.g. by means of safety devices or suitable mounting or design).
2.1.5.
A single protective device may protect a number of dangerous points. However, if adjustment, maintenance or interference suppression devices - which can be actuated only when the engine is running - are fitted beneath a single protective device, then further protective devices must be fitted.
2.1.6.
Securing devices (e.g. spring clips or flaps)
- to secure quick-release mounting components (e.g. socket pins),
and such components of
- protective devices which open without the aid of tools (e.g. engine cowl)
must be firmly attached either to the tractor mounting or to the protective device.
2.2.
Definitions
2.2.1.
´Protective device' means a device intended to protect dangerous parts. Within the meaning of this Directive, protective devices include shields, covers or guards.
2.2.1.1.
´Shield' means a protective device located immediately in front of a dangerous part and which, either on its own or with other parts of the machine, protects on all sides against contact with the dangerous part.
2.2.1.2.
´Hood or cowl' means a protective device located in front of the dangerous part and which protects against contact with the dangerous part on the covered side.
2.2.1.3.
´Guard' means a protective device which, by means of a rail, grill or similar device provides the necessary safety distance preventing contact with the dangerous part.
2.2.2.
´Dangerous part' means any point which, owing to the arrangements or design of the fixed or movable part of a tractor, involves a risk of injury. The dangerous parts are, in particular, pinching, shearing, cutting, piercing, penetrating, snatching, entry and attack points.
2.2.2.1.
´Pinching point' means any dangerous point where parts move in relation to each other or to fixed parts in such a way as may cause persons or certain parts of their bodies to be pinched.
2.2.2.2.
´Shear point' means any dangerous point where parts move along each other or along other parts in such a way as may cause persons or certain parts of their bodies to be pinched or shorn.
(;) OJ No L 84, 28. 3. 1974, p. 33.
2.2.2.3.
´Cutting, piercing or penetration point' means any dangerous point where parts, either moving or fixed, sharp edged, pointed or blunt may injure persons or certain parts of their bodies.
2.2.2.4.
´Snatching point' means any dangerous point where sharp-edged projections, teeth, pins, screws and bolts, grease nipples, shafts, shaft ends and other parts move in such a way that persons, certain parts of their bodies or clothing may be snatched and pulled along.
2.2.2.5.
´Entry or attack point' means any dangerous point whose parts, by moving, narrow an aperture in which persons, certain parts of their bodies or clothes may be caught.
2.2.3.
´Reach' means the maximum distance which can be reached by persons or certain parts of their bodies upwards, downwards, inwards, above, around or across without the aid of any object (Figure 1).
2.2.4.
´Safety distance' means the distance corresponding to the reach or to the body dimension plus a safety margin (Figure 1).
2.2.5.
´Control' means any device whose direct actuation enables the state or operation of the tractor or of any equipment linked to it to be altered.
2.3.
Safety distances for avoiding contact with dangerous parts
2.3.1.
The safety distance is measured from those points which may be reached to actuate, service and inspect the tractor, and also from ground level. ´Servicing and inspecting the tractor' solely means work normally carried out by the driver himself in accordance with the instructions for use. In determining the safety distances the basic principle is that the tractor is in the state for which it has been designed and that no means has been used in order to reach the dangerous part.
Safety distances are set out in points 2.3.2.1 to 2.3.2.5. In certain specific areas or for certain specific component parts an appropriate safety level is provided if the tractor corresponds to the requirements set out in points 2.3.2.6 to 2.3.2.14.
2.3.2.
Protection of dangerous points
Upwards
The upward safety margin is 2 500 mm (see Figure 1) in the case of persons standing upright.
2.3.2.2.
Downwards, above
The safety margin for reaching above a barrier is:
a
= from ground level up to the dangerous point;
b
= height of barrier or protective device;
c
= horizontal distance between dangerous point and barrier (see Figure 2).
When reaching both downwards and above the safety distances set out in Table 1 must be maintained.
TABLE 1 (mm)
a: Distance from
ground of dangerous
point
Height between barrier and protective device b
2 400
2 200
2 000
1 800
1 600
1 400
1 200
1 000
Horizontal distance c from dangerous point
2 400
-
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
2 200
-
250
350
400
500
500
600
600
2 000
-
-
350
500
600
700
900
1 100
1 800
-
-
-
600
900
900
1 000
1 100
1 600
-
-
-
500
900
900
1 000
1 300
1 400
-
-
-
100
800
900
1 000
1 300
1 200
-
-
-
-
500
900
1 000
1 400
1 000
-
-
-
-
300
900
1 000
1 400
800
-
-
-
-
-
600
900
1 300
600
-
-
-
-
-
-
500
1 200
400
-
-
-
-
-
-
300
1 200
200
-
-
-
-
-
-
200
1 100
2.3.2.3.
Reach around
The safety margin shown in Table 2 below must, at the minimum, be maintained if the part of the body concerned is not to reach a dangerous point. In applying the safety margin it is assumed that the main body joint concerned is pushed firmly against the edge of the protective device. The safety margins are not considered to have been maintained until one is satisfied that part of the body may quite definitely not advance or penetrate further.
TABLE 2 Part of the body
Safety
distance
Figure
Hand
From the first
knuckle
to the fingertips
· 120
Part of the body
Safety
distance
Figure
Hand
From the wrist
to the fingertips
· 230
Limb
Safety
distance
Illustration
Arm
From the elbow
to the fingertips
· 550
Arm
From the shoulder
to the fingertips
· 850
2.3.2.4.
Penetration and reach across
If penetration is possible into or across openings and up to dangerous parts, the minimum safety distances set out in Tables 3 and 4 must be maintained.
Parts which move in relation to one another or moving parts set alongside fixed parts are not regarded as risk factors provided they are no more than 8 mm apart.
TABLE 3 Safety distances for elongated and parallel openings
a is the smaller dimension of the aperture.
bis the safety distance from danger point.
Fingertip
Finger
Hand to ball of thumb
Arm to armpit
-
4 < a 9 8
8 < a 9 12
12 < a 9 20
20 < a 9 30
30 < a 9 135 maximum
> 135
b 8 15
b 8 80
b 8 120
b 8 200
b 8 850
-
TABLE 4
Safety distances for square or circular apertures
a is the aperture/diameter or length of side.
b is the safety distance from danger point.
Fingertip
Finger
Hand to thumb root
Arm to armpit
-
4 < a 9 8
8 < a 9 12
12 < a 9 25
25 < a 9 40
40 < a 9 250 maximum
250
b 8 15
b 8 80
b 8 120
b 8 200
b 8 850
-
2.3.2.5.
Safety distances at pinching points
A pinching point is not considered dangerous for the part of the body shown if the safety distances are not less than those set out in Table 5, and if it is ensured that the adjacent, wider part of the body cannot be introduced.
TABLE 5 Limb
Body
Leg
Foot
Arm
Hand,
joint,
first
Finger
Safety
distances
500
180
120
100
25
Illustration
2.3.2.6.
Controls
The gap between two pedals and the holes through which controls pass are not regarded as being pinching or shearing points.
2.3.2.7.
Rear three-point coupling
2.3.2.7.1.
Behind a plane passing through the median plane of the pivot points of the lifting rods in a three-point coupling system a minimum safety margin of 25 mm must be maintained between the moving parts for each point or of the lifting device's travel - but not for the extreme upper and
lower positions 0,1 n, together with a distance of 25 mm or a minimum angle of 30g for the parts in shear which cause a change in angularity (see Figure 3). Travel nm, reduced by 0,1 n at both its upper and lower ends is defined as follows (see Figure 4):
2.3.2.7.2.
For travel n of the hydraulic lifting unit, lower position A of the coupling point of the lower link is limited by dimension ´14' in accordance with ISO Standard 730, Part 1, while upper position B is limited by the maximum hydraulic travel. Travel nm corresponds to travel n reduced upwards and downwards by 0,1 n, and constitutes the vertical distance between Am and Bm.
2.3.2.7.3.
Moreover, within travel nm a minimum safety margin of 25 mm in relation to the adjacent parts must be maintained around the profile of the lifting rods.
2.3.2.7.4.
If, in the case of a three-point coupling, coupling devices are used which do not require the presence of an operator between the tractor and the implement carried (for example, in the case of a quick coupling), the provisions of point 2.3.2.7.3 do not apply.
2.3.2.7.5.
The operating manual should contain specific information on the dangerous points located at the front of the plane defined in the first sentence of point 2.3.2.7.1.
2.3.2.8.
Front three-point coupling
2.3.2.8.1.
At each point of the lifting unit's travel n - but not for the extreme upper and lower reaches 0,1 n - a minimum safety margin of 25 mm must be maintained between the moving parts together with a minimum angle of 30g or a safety margin of 25 mm in the case of the change of angularity caused by the parts in shear with each other. Travel nm reduced by 0,1 n at both its upper and lower ends, is defined as follows (see also Figure 4).
2.3.2.8.2.
For travel n of the hydraulic lifting unit, extreme lower position A of the coupling point of the lower link is limited by dimension ´14' in accordance with ISO Standard 8759, Part 2, while extreme upper position B is limited by the maximum hydraulic travel. Traven nm reduced upwards and downwards by 0,1 n and the vertical distance between Am and Bm.
2.3.2.8.3.
If, for the lower links of a front three-point coupling, coupling devices (such as a rapid-action coupling) are used which do not require the presence of a person between the tractor and the implement attached during coupling, the requirements under 2.3.2.8.1 do not apply within the reach of a radius of 250 mm from the points at which the lower links are coupled to the tractor. However, a minimum safety margin of 25 mm from neighbouring parts within the defined travel nm must in any case be maintained around the outside of the travel rods/cylinders.
2.3.2.9.
Driving seat and environment
When he is in a sitting position, all pinching of shearing points must be out of range of the driver's hands or feet. This requirement is considered to have been met if the following conditions are fulfilled:
2.3.2.9.1.
The driver's seat is at the mid-point in its longitudinal and vertical adjustment range. The driver's reach limit is divided into zones A and B. A central spherical point of these zones is 60 mm in front of and 580 mm above the seat reference point (see Figure 5). Zone A consists of a sphere having a diameter of 550 mm while zone B is located between that sphere and a sphere having a radius of 1 000 mm.
2.3.2.9.2.
A safety distance of 120 mm in zone A and 25 mm in zone B is maintained near the pinching and shearing points, whilst a minimum angle of 30g is maintained in the case of shearing parts causing a change in angularity.
2.3.2.9.3.
In zone A, only the pinching and shearing points caused by parts set in motion by an outside energy source must be taken into account.
2.3.2.9.4.
If a dangerous point is due to the presence of structural parts adjacent to the seat, a safety distance of a least 25 mm is maintained between that structural part and the seat. There is no dangerous point between the seat backrest and the adjacent structural parts located behind that backrest if the adjacent structural parts are smooth and the seat backrest itself is rounded in the surrounding area and has no sharp points.
2.3.2.10.
Passenger seat (if any)
2.3.2.10.1.
If parts may constitute a danger for the feet, provision must be made for protective devices within a hemispherical radius of 800 mm starting from the forward edge of the seat cushion and pointing downwards.
2.3.2.10.2.
As described in section 2.3.2.9 (see Figure 6) the dangerous points in zones A and B must be protected within a sphere whose centre is 670 mm above the centre of the front edge of the passenger seat.
2.3.2.11.
Narrow-track tractors (tractors with a track as defined in the second indent of Article 1 of Directive 87/402/EEC).
2.3.2.11.1.
In the case of narrow-track tractors, the requirements of section 2.3.2.9 do not apply to the zone situated below a plane inclined at 45g to the rear and transverse to the direction of travel, and passing through a point located 230 mm behind the seat index point (see Figure 7). If there are any dangerous points in this zone, corresponding warnings must be affixed to the tractor.
2.3.2.11.2.
Sections II.1 and II.2 of Annex I to Direcitve 80/720/EEC apply to access to the driver's seat.
2.3.2.11.3.
Section I.6 of Annex I to Directive 80/720/EEC applies to control devices.
2.3.2.11.4.
In front of a reference plane which passes at right angles to the longitudinal axis of the vehicle and through the centre of the load-free pedal (clutch and/or service brake), very hot exhaust components must be protected if located within 300 mm in the upper zone (700 mm above ground level) and within 150 mm in the lower zone (see Figure 8). Laterally, the area to be protected is limited by the external outline of the tractor and the external outline of the exhaust system.
Very hot exhaust system components passing beneath the entry step must be covered in their vertical projection or otherwise thermally protected.
EWG:L777UMBE04.94
FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 2030 mm; 408 Zeilen; 15101 Zeichen;
Bediener: MARK Pr.: C;
Kunde: ................................
10. 3. 89
Official Journal of the European Communities
Appendix MODEL
Name of administration
ANNEX TO THE EEC TYPE-APPROVAL CERTIFICATE FOR A TRACTOR TYPE WITH REGARD TO THE SPEED GOVERNOR AND PROTECTION OF THE DRIVE COMPONENTS, PROJECTIONS AND WHEELS
(Articles 4 (2) and 10 of Council Directive 74/150/EEC of 4 March 1974 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to the EEC type-approval of wheeled agricultural or forestry tractors)
EEC type-approval No: .
1.
Component(s) or characteristic(s):
1.1.
speed governor (where present)
1.2.
protection of the drive units, projection and wheels
2.
Make of tractor (or business name of manufacturer): .
.
3.
Type and where appropriate commercial name of tractor: .
.
4.
Manufacturer's name and address: .
.
5.
If applicable, name and address of manufacturer's authorized representative: .
.
6.
Description of component(s) and/or characteristic(s) mentioned under 1 above:
.
7.
Date of submission of tractor for EEC type-approval: .
8.
Technical service conducting the type-approval tests: .
.
9.
Date of report issued by that service: .
10.
Number of report issued by that service: .
11.
EEC type-approval for the speed governor and protection of the drive components, projections and wheels is granted/refused (¹)
12.
Place: .
13.
Date: .
14.
Signature: .
15.
The following documents, bearing the EEC type-approval number indicated above, are attached to this certificate:
................................... dimensioned drawing;
................................... drawing or photograph of the relevant parts of the tractor.
These data must be supplied to the component authorities of the other Member States if they so request.
16.
Remarks: .
.
.
(¹) Delete where inapplicable.
EWG:L777UMBE05.96
FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 253 mm; 47 Zeilen; 1746 Zeichen;
Bediener: MARK Pr.: C;
Kunde: 43649 Montan England 05
ANNEX III A WINDSCREEN AND OTHER GLAZING EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS, DEFINITIONS, APPLICATION FOR COMPONENT TYPE-APPROVAL, COMPONENT TYPE-APPROVAL, MARKINGS, GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS, TESTS AND CONFORMITY OF PRODUCTION 1.
EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS
1.1.
Agricultural and forestry tractors may be equipped as chosen by their manufacturer with:
1.1.1.
windscreens and glass panes other than windscreens covered by the provisions of this Annex;
1.1.2.
windscreens covered by the requirements for glass panes other than windscreens in this Annex, with the exception of the requirements of point 9.1.4.2 of Annex III C to this Directive (glass panes with a regular light transmittance of less than 70 %).
2.
DEFINITIONS
For the purposes of this Directive:
2.1.
´toughened-glass pane' means a glass pane consisting of a single layer of glass which has been subjected to special treatment to increase its mechanical strength and condition its fragmentations after shattering;
2.2.
´laminated-glass pane' means a glass pane consisting of two or more layers of glass held together by one or more interlayers of plastic material; it may be:
2.2.1.
´ordinary', where none of the layers of glass of which it is composed have been treated, or
2.2.2.
´treated', where at least one of the layers of glass of which it is composed has been specially treated to increase its mechanical strength and to condition its fragmentation after shattering;
2.3.
´safety glazing coated with plastic material' means a glass pane as defined in point 2.1 or 2.2 with a layer of plastic material on its inner surface;
2.4.
´glass-plastic safety glazing' means a pane of laminated glass having one layer of glass and one or more layers of plastic material at least one of which acts as interlayer. The plastic layers shall be on the inner face when the glazing is fitted on the tractor;
2.5.
´group of windscreens' means a group comprising windscreens of differing sizes and shapes subjected to an examination of their mechanical properties, their mode of fragmentation and their behaviour in environmental resistance tests;
2.5.1.
´flat windscreen' means a windscreen exhibiting no nominal curvature resulting in a height of segment exceeding 10 mm per linear metre;
2.5.2.
´curved windscreen' means a windscreen exhibiting nominal curvature resulting in a height of segment exceeding 10 mm per linear metre;
2.6.
´double window' means a set of two panes installed separately in the same opening on the tractor;
2.7.
´double glazing' means a unit composed of two panes permanently assembled in the factory and separated by a uniform gap;
2.7.1.
´symmetrical double glazing' means double glazing in which the two constituent panes are of the same type (toughened or laminated glass, etc.), and exhibit identical principal and secondary characteristics;
2.7.2.
´asymmetrical double glazing' means double glazing in which the two constituent panes are of a different type (toughened or laminated glass, etc.) or exhibit different principal and/or secondary characteristics;
2.8.
´principal characteristic' means a characteristic which appreciably modifies the optical and/or mechanical properties of a pane of glass in a way not without significance to the function which the glass pane is to perform in a tractor. This term also covers the trade name or mark;
2.9.
´secondary characteristic' means a characteristic capable of modifying the optical and/or mechanical properties of a pane of glass in a way which is of significance to the function which the glass pane is intended to perform in a tractor. The extent of such modification is assessed in relation to the indices of difficulty;
2.10.
´indices of difficulty' covers a two-stage grading system applying to the variations observed in practice in each secondary characteristic. A change from index ´1' to index ´2' indicates the need for additional tests;
2.11.
´developed area of a windscreen' means the minimum rectangular area of glass from which a windscreen can be manufactured;
2.12.
´rake angle of a windscreen' means the angle included between a vertical line and a straight line passing through the top and bottom extremities of the windscreen, both lines lying in a vertical plane along the longitudinal axis of the tractor.
2.12.1.
Measurement of the rake angle is performed on an unladen tractor standing on level ground.
2.12.2.
Tractors equipped with hydropneumatic, hydraulic or pneumatic suspension or with a device for automatic adjustment of ground clearance according to load are tested in the normal running conditions specified by the manufacturer;
2.13.
´height of segment, h' means the maximum distance, measured at right angles approximately to the glass pane, separating the inner surface of the pane from a pane passing through the ends of the pane, (see Annex III N, Figure 1);
2.14.
´type of glass pane' means a glass pane, as defined in points 2.1 to 2.4, not exhibiting any essential differences in respect, in particular, of the principal and secondary characteristics mentioned in Annexes III D to III L.
2.14.1.
Although a change in the principal characteristics implies that the product is of a new type, it is recognized that in certain cases a change in shape and dimension does not necessarily require a complete set of tests to be carried out. For certain of the tests prescribed in the individual Annexes, glass panes may be grouped together if it is evident that they have similar principal characteristics.
2.14.2.
Glass panes exhibiting differences only as regards their secondary characteristics may be deemed to be of the same type; certain tests may, however, be carried out on samples of such panes if the performance of those tests is explicitly stipulated in the test conditions;
2.15.
´curvature, r' means the approximate value of the smallest radius of arc of the windscreen as measured in the area of maximum curvature.
3.
APPLICATION FOR COMPONENT TYPE-APPROVAL
3.1.
The application for EEC component type-approval for a type of glass pane is submitted by the manufacturer of the safety-glass pane or by his duly accredited representative for each type of safety glass. The application may be made in one Member State only.
3.2.
For each type of safety glass, the application is accompanied by the undermentioned documents in triplicate and by the following particulars:
3.2.1.
a technical description comprising all principal and secondary characteristics; and,
3.2.1.1.
in the case of glazing other than windscreens, drawings in a format not exceeding A4 or folded to that format, showing:
- the maximum area,
- the smallest angle between two adjacent sides of the glass pane, and
- the maximum height of segment, if any;
3.2.1.2.
In the case of windscreens:
3.2.1.2.1.
a list of the models of windscreen for which component type-approval is sought, giving the name of the tractor manufacturers and the type(s) of tractor;
3.2.1.2.2.
drawings on a scale 1:10 and diagrams of the windscreens and their installation in the tractor in sufficient detail to show:
3.2.1.2.2.1.
the position of the windscreen relative to the R point as defined in point 1.2 of the Annex ´Field of vision' to Council Directive 74/347/EEC of 25 June 1974 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to the field of vision and windscreen wipers for wheeled agricultural or forestry tractors.
3.2.1.2.2.2.
the rake angle of the windscreen;
3.2.1.2.2.2.
the rake angle of the seat back-rest;
3.2.1.2.2.3.
the position and size of the zone in which the optical qualities are verified and, where appropriate, the area subjected to differential toughening;
3.2.1.2.2.4.
the developed area of the windscreen;
3.2.1.2.2.5.
the maximum height of segment of the windscreen; and
3.2.1.2.2.6.
the curvature of the windscreen (for windscreen-grouping purposes only);
3.2.1.3.
in the case of double glazing, drawings in a format not exceeding A4 or folded to that format, showing, in addition to the information referred to in point 3.2.1.1:
- the type of each constituent glass pane,
- the type of bonding (organic, glass-glass or glass-metal),
- the nominal thickness of the gap between the two glass panes.
3.3
In addition, the applicant must submit a sufficient number of test pieces and samples of the finished glass panes of the models considered, the number being if necessary determined by agreement with the technical service for conducting the tests.
3.4.
The competent authority must verify the existence of satisfactory arrangements for ensuring effective control of conformity of production before component type-approval is granted.
4.
MARKINGS
4.1.
Every safety-glass pane, including the samples and test-pieces submitted for component type-approval, must bear the trade name or mark of the manufacturer. The marking must be clearly legible and indelible.
5.
COMPONENT TYPE-APPROVAL
5.1.
If the samples submitted for component type-approval meet the requirements of sections 5 to 7 below, approval of the pertinent type of safety-glass pane is granted.
5.2.
A component type-approval number is assigned to each type as defined in Annexes III E, III G, III K and III L, or, in the case of windscreens, to each group approved. Its first two digits (at present 00 for this Directive in its original form) indicate the series of amendments incorporating the most recent major technical amendments made to this Directive at the time of issue of the approval. A Member State may not assign the same number to another type or group of safety-glass panes.
5.3.
Component type-approval or extension or refusal of approval for a type of safety-glass pane pursuant to this Directive is communicated to the Member States by means of a notice prepared in accordance with the model set out in Annex III B to this Directive and its Appendices.
5.3.1.
In the case of windscreens, the EEC component type-approval notice must be accompanied by a document listing every windscreen model in the approved group, together with the characteristics of the group, in accordance with Appendix 8 to Annex III B.
5.4.
In addition to the marking specified in point 4.1, an EEC component type-approval mark must be affixed conspicuously to all safety-glass panes, and double-glazed units conforming to a type approved under this Directive. Any special component type-approval mark assigned to each pane of a double-glazed unit may also be affixed.
This component type-approval mark consists of:
5.4.1.
a rectangle surrounding the lower-case letter ´e' followed by the distinguishing number of the country which has granted the approval (¹);
5.4.2.
the component type-approval number to the right of the rectangle prescribed in point 5.4.1.
5.5.
The following additional symbols are affixed near the above EEC type-approval mark:
5.5.1.
in the case of a windscreen:
III: for toughened glass (I/P if faced) (²),
III: for ordinary laminated glass (II/P if faced) (²),
III: for treated laminated glass (III/P if faced) (²),
IV: for glass-plastic glazing;
5.5.2.
V: in the case of a glass pane other than a windscreen covered by the provisions of point 9.1.4.2 of Annex III C;
5.5.3.
VI: in the case of a double-glazed unit;
5.5.4.
T: in the case of windscreens which comply with the requirements for glass panes other than windscreens, except those coming under the provisions of point 9.1.4.2 of Annex III C to this Directive (glass panes with a regular light transmittance of less than 70 %). However, in the case of windscreens complying with the requirements for glass panes other than windscreens, the symbol ´T' may only be marked after the head-form test defined in point 3.3.2 of Annex III G to this Directive, the height of drop being 4,0 m + 25/-0 mm.
5.6.
The EEC component type-approval mark and the symbol must be clearly legible and indelible.
5.7.
Appendix I to this Annex gives examples of component type-approval marks.
6.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
6.1.
All glass panes, and particularly those intended for the manufacture of windscreens, must be of sufficient quality to reduce the risk of bodily injury as far as possible in the event of the glass shattering. The glass must be sufficiently resistant to the incidents likely to occur in normal traffic, and to atmospheric and temperature conditions, chemical action, combustion and abrasion.
6.2.
Safety glass must in addition be sufficiently transparent, must not cause any noticeable distortions of objects as seen through the windscreen, and must not give rise to any confusion between the colours used in road-traffic signs and signals. In the event of the windscreen shattering, the driver must still be able to see the road clearly enough to be able to brake and stop his tractor safely.
7.
PARTICULAR REQUIREMENTS
All types of safety glass must, depending on the category to which they belong, comply with the following particular requirements:
7.1.
as regards toughened-glass windscreens, the requirements contained in Annex III D;
7.2.
as regards uniformly toughened glass panes other than windscreens, the requirements contained in Annex III E;
7.3.
as regards ordinary laminated-glass windscreens, the requirements contained in Annex III F;
7.4.
as regards ordinary laminated-glass panes other than windscreens, the requirements contained in Annex III G;
7.5.
as regards treated laminated-glass windscreens, the requirements contained in Annex III H;
7.6.
as regards safety-glass panes faced with plastic material, in addition to the relevant requirements listed above, the requirements contained in Annex III I;
(¹) 1 for the Federal Republic of Germany, 2 for France, 3 for Italy, 4 for the Netherlands, 6 for Belgium, 9 for Spain, 11 for the United Kingdom, 13 for Luxembourg, 18 for Denmark, 21 for Portugal, IRL for Ireland and EL for Greece.
(²) As defined in point 2.3.
7.7.
as regards glass-plastic windscreens, the requirements contained in Annex III J;
7.8.
as regards glass-plastic panes other than windscreens, the requirements contained in Annex
III K;
7.9.
as regards double-glazed units, the requirements contained in Annex III L.
8.
TESTS
8.1.
The following tests are prescribed:
8.1.1.
Fragmentation
The purpose of this test is:
8.1.1.1.
to verify that the fragments and splinters produced by fracture of the pane of glass are such as to minimize the risk of injruy, and
8.1.1.2.
in the case of windscreens, to check residual visibility after shattering.
8.1.2.
Mechanical strength
8.1.2.1.
Ball-impact test
This test takes two forms, one using a 227 g ball and the other a 2 260 g ball.
8.1.2.1.1.
227-g-ball test: the purpose of this test is to assess the adhesion of the interlayer in laminated glass and the mechanical strength of uniformly toughened glass.
8.1.2.1.2.
2 260-g-ball test: the purpose of this test is to assess the ball-penetration resistance of laminated glass.
8.1.2.2.
Headform test
The purpose of this test is to verify the glass pane's compliance with requirements relating to the limitation of injury in the event of impact of the head against the windscreen, laminated glass or glass-plastic panes other than windscreens, and also double-glazed units used as side windows.
8.1.3.
Resistance to the environment
8.1.3.1.
Abrasion test
The purpose of this test is to determine whether the resistance of a safety-glass pane to abrasion exceeds a specified value.
8.1.3.2.
High-temperature test
The purpose of this test is to verify that no bubbles or other defects occur in the interlayer in a laminated glass or glass-plastic pane when the latter is exposed to high temperatures over an extended period of time.
8.1.3.3.
Resistance-to-radiation test
The purpose of this test is to determine whether the light transmittance of laminated-glass, glass-plastic or plastic-coated glass panes exposed to radiation over an extended period of time is significantly reduced thereby or whether the glazing is significantly discoloured.
8.1.3.4.
Resistance-to-humidity test
The purpose of this test is to determine whether a laminated-glass, glass-plastic or plastic-coated glass pane will withstand, without significant deterioration, the effects of prolonged exposure to atmosphere humidity.
8.1.3.5.
Resistance to temperature change
The purpose of this test is to determine whether the plastic material(s) used in safety glazing as defined in points 2.3 and 2.4 will withstand, without significant deterioration, the effects of prolonged exposure to extreme temperatures.
8.1.4.
Optical qualities
8.1.4.1.
Light-transmission test
The purpose of this test is to determine whether the regular transmittance of safety-glass panes exceeds a specified value.
8.1.4.2.
Optical-distortion test
The purpose of this test is to verify that the distortion of objects as seen through the windscreen is not such as to be likely to confuse the driver.
8.1.4.3.
Secondary-image-separation test
The purpose of this test is to verify that the angular separation of the secondary image from the primary image does not exceed a specified value.
8.1.4.4.
Identification-of-colours test
The purpose of this test is to verify that there is no risk of confusion of colours as seen through a windscreen.
8.1.5.
Fire-resistance test
The purpose of this test is to verify that the inner face of a safety-glass pane as defined in points 2.3 and 2.4 has a sufficiently low burn rate.
8.1.6.
Resistance to chemical agents
The purpose of this test is to determine that the inner face of a safety-glass pane as defined in
points 2.3 and 2.4 will withstand the effects of exposure to chemicals likely to be present or used within the tractor (e.g. cleaning compounds) without deterioration.
8.2.
Tests prescribed for glass panes of the categories defined in points 2.1 to 2.4
8.2.1.
Safety-glass panes are subject to the tests listed in the following table:
WINDSCREENS
GLASS PANES OTHER
THAN WINDSCREENS
Toughened glass
Ordinary
laminated glass
Treated
laminated glass
Glass-
plastic
I
I/P
II
II/P
III
III/P
IV
Tough-
ened
glass
Lami-
nated
glass
Glass-
plastic
Fragmentation
D/2
D/2
-
-
H/4
H/4
-
E/2
-
-
Mechanical strength:
- 227 g ball
-
-
F/4.3.
F/4.3.
F/4.3.
F/4.3.
F/4.3.
E/3.1.
G/4
G/4
- 2 260 g ball
-
-
F/4.2.
F/4.2.
F/4.2.
F/4.2.
-
-
-
-
Headform test (¹)
D/3
D/3
F/3
F/3
F/3
F/3
J/3
-
G/3 (³)
K/3 (³)
Abrasion:
- outer face
-
-
F/5.1.
F/5.1.
F/5.1.
F/5.1.
F/5.1.
-
F/5.1.
F/5.1.
- inner face
-
I/2
-
I/2
-
I/2
I/2
I/2 (²)
I/2 (²)
I/2
High temperature
-
-
C/5
C/5
C/5
C/5
C/5
-
C/5
C/5
Radiation
-
C/6
C/6
C/6
C/6
C/6
C/6
-
C/6
C/6
Humidity
-
C/7
C/7
C/7
C/7
C/7
C/7
C/7 (²)
C/7
C/7
Light transmission
C/9.1.
C/9.1.
C/9.1.
C/9.1.
C/9.1.
C/9.1.
C/9.1.
C/9.1.
C/9.1.
C/9.1.
Optical distortion
C/9.2.
C/9.2.
C/9.2.
C/9.2.
C/9.2.
C/9.2.
C/9.2.
-
-
-
Secondary image
C/9.3.
C/9.3.
C/9.3.
C/9.3.
C/9.3.
C/9.3.
C/9.3.
-
-
-
Identification of colours
C/9.4.
C/9.4.
C/9.4.
C/9.4.
C/9.4.
C/9.4.
C/9.4.
-
-
-
Resistance to temperature changes
-
C/8
-
C/8
-
C/8
C/8
C/8 (²)
C/8 (²)
C/8
Fire resistance
-
C/10
-
C/10
-
C/10
C/10
C/10 (²)
C/10 (²)
C/10
Resistance to chemicals
-
C/11
-
C/11
-
C/11
C/11
C/11 (²)
C/11 (²)
C/11
(¹) Furthermore this test must be carried out on double-glazed units pursuant to point 3 of Appendix L.
(²) If coated on the inner side with plastic material.
(³) This list must be performed with a drop of 4 m + 25/-0 mm instead of 1,5 m + 25/-0 mm when the panes are used as tractor windscreens.
NB: A reference such as K 3/3 in the table indicates Annex III K and point 3 of that Annex, where the relevant test is described and the acceptance requirements specified.
EWG:L777UMBE06.94
FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 1525 mm; 466 Zeilen; 19471 Zeichen;
Bediener: MARK Pr.: C;
Kunde: L 777 Umb E 06
10. 3. 89
Official Journal of the European Communities
8.2.2.
A safety-glass pane is granted component type-approval if it meets all the requirements prescribed in the relevant provisions referred to in the above table.
9.
MODIFICATION OR EXTENSION OF APPROVAL FOR A TYPE OF SAFETY-GLASS PANE
9.1.
All modifications to a type of safety-glass pane, or, in the case of windscreens, all additions of windscreens to a group, must be notified to the administrative department which approved the type of safety-glass pane. The department may then either:
9.1.1.
consider that the modifications made are unlikely to have an appreciable adverse effect and, in the case of windscreens, that the new type comes within the approved group of windscreens, and that at all events the safety-glass pane still complies with the requirements, or
9.1.2.
require a further test report from the technical service responsible for conducting the tests.
9.2.
Communication
9.2.1.
Confirmation, refusal or extension of component type-approval are communicated to the Member States in accordance with the procedure specified in section 5.3.
9.2.2.
The competent authority which has granted an extension of component type-approval must place a serial number on each communication relating to the extension.
10.
CONFORMITY OF PRODUCTION
10.1.
Safety glazing granted type-approval under this and the following Annexes must be so manufactured as to conform to the approved type and meet the requirements set out in sections 6, 7 and 8.
10.2.
To verify that the requirements of 10.1 have been met, constant checks must be carried out on production.
10.3.
The holder of the component type-approval must in particular:
10.3.1.
ensure that procedures exist for controlling the quality of the product,
10.3.2.
have access to the equipment necessary for checking conformity to each approved type,
10.3.3.
record data of test results and make the ancillary documents (1) available for a period to be determined in agreement with the administrative department,
10.3.4.
analyze the results of each type of test to verify and ensure consistency of the product characteristics, allowing for the permissible variations in industrial production,
10.3.5.
ensure that, for each type of product, at least the tests prescribed in Annex III O are carried out, and
10.3.6.
ensure that where any samples or test-pieces show non-conformity with the type of test concerned, further samples are taken and tested.
All necessary steps must be taken to re-establish conformity in the production concerned.
10.4.
The competent authority may at any time verify the methods for checking conformity applicable to each production unit (see point 1.3 of Annex III O).
10.4.1.
At every inspection, the test data and production records must be presented to the inspector.
10.4.2.
The inspector may take samples at random to be tested in the manufacturer's laboratory. The minimum number of samples may be determined in the light of the results of the manufacturer's own checks.
10.4.3.
Where the quality standard appears unsatisfactory or where it appears necessary to verify the validity of the tests carried out under point 10.4.2, the inspector may select samples to be sent to the technical service which conducted the component type-approval test.
10.4.4.
The competent authority may carry out any test prescribed in this Directive.
10.4.5.
The normal frequency of inspection is two per year. If unsatisfactory results are found during any of these inspections, the competent authority must ensure that all necessary steps are taken to re-establish the conformity of production as quickly as possible.
11.
PENALTIES FOR NON-CONFORMITY OF PRODUCTION
11.1.
Component type-approval granted in respect of a type of safety-glass pane pursuant to this Directive may be withdrawn if the requirement laid down in point 10.1 is not complied with.
11.2.
If a Member State withdraws an approval it has previously granted, it must forthwith notify the other Member States thereof by means of a copy of the component type-approval certificate with ´COMPONENT TYPE-APPROVAL WITHDRAWN' added in large letters at the bottom of the certificate, and signed and dated.
12.
PRODUCTION DEFINITELY DICSONTINUED
If the holder of component type-approval completely ceases to manufacture a type of safety-glass pane approved in accordance with this Directive, he must inform thereof the authority which granted the approval. That authority must in turn notify the other Member States thereof,
by means of a copy of the compound type-approval notice conforming to the model shown in
Annex III B to this Directive.
13.
NAMES AND ADDRESSES OF THE TECHNICAL SERVICES RESPONSIBLE FOR CONDUCTING COMPONENT TYPE-APPROVAL TESTS AND OF THE ADMINISTRATIVE DEPARTMENTS GRANTING SUCH APPROVAL
Each Member State must communicate to the other Member States and the Commission the names and addresses of the technical services responsible for conducting component type-approval tests and of the administrative departments granting EEC component type-approval, to which the component type-approval certificate and certificates indicating refusal or withdrawal of component type-approval issued in the other Member States are to be sent.
EWG:L777UMBE6A.96
FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 507 mm; 71 Zeilen; 5369 Zeichen;
Bediener: MARK Pr.: C;
Kunde: L 777 UMB E 6A
10. 3. 89
Official Journal of the European Communities
Appendix EXAMPLES OF COMPONENT TYPE-APPROVAL MARKS
(See section 5.5 of Annex III A)
Toughened-glass windscreens:
The above component type-approval mark, affixed to a toughened-glass windscreen, shows that the component concerned was approved in France (e2) pursuant to this Directive under component type-approval number 001247.
Toughened-glass windscreens faced with plastic material
The above component type-approval mark affixed to a toughened-glass windscreen faced with plastic material shows that the component concerned was approved in France (e2) pursuant to this Directive under component type-approval number 001247.
Ordinary laminated-glass windscreens
The above component type-approval mark affixed to an ordinary laminated-glass windscreen shows that the component concerned was approved in France (e2) pursuant to this Directive under component type-approval number 001247.
Ordinary laminated-glass windscreens faced with plastic material
The above component type-approval mark affixed to an ordinary laminated-glass windscreen faced with plastic material shows that the component concerned was approved in France (e2) pursuant to this Directive under component type-approval number 001247.
Threated laminated-glass windscreens
The above component type-approval mark affixed to a treated laminated-glass windscreen shows that the component concerned was approved in France (e2) pursuant to this Directive under component type-approval number 001247.
Glass-plastic windscreens
The above component type-approval mark affixed to a glass-plastic windscreen shows that the component concerned was approved in France (e2) pursuant to this Directive under component type-approval number 001247.
Glass panes other than windscreens having a regular light transmittance of less than 70 %:
The above component type-approval mark affixed to a glass pane other than a windscreen to which the requirements of Annex III-C section 9.1.4.2., are applicable shows that the component concerned was approved in France (e2) pursuant to this Directive under component type-approval number 001247.
Double-glazed units having a regular light transmittance of less than 70 %
The above component type-approval mark affixed to a double-glazed unit shows that the component concerned was approved in France (e2) pursuant to this Directive under component type-approval number 001247.
Glass panes other than windscreens to be used as windscreens for tractors:
The above component type-approval mark affixed to a glass pane shows that the component concerned intended to be used as a windscreen on a tractor was approved in France (e2) pursuant to this Directive under component type-approval number 001247.
Glass panes other than windscreens having a regular light transmittance of 70 % more
The above component type-approval mark affixed to a glass pane other than a windscreen to which the requirements of point 9.1.4.1 of Annex III C are applicable shows that the component concerned was approved in France (e2) pursuant to this Directive under component type-approval number 001247.
EWG:L777UMBE07.95
FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 761 mm; 45 Zeilen; 3270 Zeichen;
Bediener: MARK Pr.: C;
Kunde: ................................
(1) Fragmentation test results must be recorded even if not photographic print is required. ANNEX III B Name of administration
(Maximum format: A 4 (210×297 mm))
Communication on - EEC component type-approval,
- refusal of component type-approval,
- extension of component type-approval,
- withdrawal of component type-approval (1)
for a type of safety-glass pane pursuant to Directive 89/173/EEC
EEC component type-approval No: .
Extension No: .
1.
Category of safety-glass pane: .
2.
Description of glass pane (see Appendices 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 (2) and, in the case of windscreens, the list conforming with Appendix 8 .
.
3.
Trade name or mark: .
4.
Manufacturer's name and address: .
.
5.
Name and address of manufacturer's representative where applicable: .
.
6.
Submitted for component type-approval on: .
7.
Technical service responsible for conducting component type-approval tests: .
8.
Date of test report: .
9.
Number of test report: .
10.
Component type-approval granted/refused/extended/withdrawn (3): .
11.
Ground(s) for extending type approval: .
.
.
.
12.
Remarks: .
.
.
.
13.
Place: .
14.
Date: .
15.
Signature: .
16.
A list is attached of the documents comprising the component type-approval file lodged with the administrative department granting the approval; these documents are available on request.
Appendix 1 TOUGHENED-GLASS WINDSCREENS
(Principal and secondary characteristics as defined in Annex III D or III I)
Component type-approval No: .
Extension No: .
Principal characteristics
- Shape category: .
- Thickness category: .
- Nominal thickness of the windscreen: .
- Nature and type of plastic coating(s): .
- Thickness of plastic coating(s): .
Secondary characteristics
- Nature of the material (plate, float, sheet glass): .
- Colouring of glass: .
- Colouring of plastic coating(s): .
- Conductors incorporated (yes/no):
- Anti-glare strips incorporated (yes/no):
Remarks:
.
.
.
.
.
Documents attached: list of windscreens (see Appendix 8).
EWG:L777UMBE08.96
FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 507 mm; 69 Zeilen; 2003 Zeichen;
Bediener: MARK Pr.: C;
Kunde: 43649 Montan England 08
10. 3. 89
Official Journal of the European Communities
Appendix 2 UNIFORMLY TOUGHENED-GLASS PANES OTHER THAN WINDSCREENS
(Principal and secondary characteristics as defined in Annex III E or III I)
Component type-approval No: .
Extension No: .
Principal characteristics
- Other than windscreens (yes/no):
- Windscreen for tractor(s): .
- Shape category: .
- Nature of toughening process: .
- Thickness category: .
- Nature and type of plastic coating(s): .
Secondary characteristics
- Nature of the material (plate, float, sheet glass): .
- Colouring of glass: .
- Colouring of plastic coating(s): .
- Conductors incorporated (yes/no):
- Anti-glare strips incorporated (yes/no):
Approved criteria
- Greatest area (flat glass): .
- Smallest angle: .
- Greatest developed area (curved glass): .
- Greatest height of segment: .
Remarks:
.
.
.
.
.
Documents attached: list of windscreens (if applicable) (see Appendix 8).
Appendix 3 LAMINATED-GLASS WINDSCREENS
(ordinary, treated or plastic-coated)
(Principal and secondary characteristics as defined in Annex III F, III H or III I)
Component type-approval No: .
Extension No: .
Principal characteristics
- Number of layers of glass: .
- Number of layers of interlayer: .
- Nominal thickness of the windscreen: .
- Nominal thickness of interlayer(s): .
- Special treatment of glass: .
- Nature and type of interlayer(s): .
- Nature and type of plastic coating(s): .
Secondary characteristics
- Nature of the material (plate, float, shett glass): .
- Colouring of glass (colourless/tinted): .
- Colouring of plastic coating(s) (total/partial): .
- Conductors incorporated (yes/no):
- Anti-glare strips incorporated (yes/no):
Remarks:
.
.
.
.
.
Documents attached: list of windscreens (see Appendix 8).
EWG:L777UMBE09.97
FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 507 mm; 62 Zeilen; 1793 Zeichen;
Bediener: MARK Pr.: C;
Kunde: 43649 Montan England 09
10. 3. 89
Official Journal of the European Communities
Appendix 4 LAMINATED-GLASS PANES OTHER THAN WINDSCREENS
(Principal and secondary characteristics as defined in Annex III G or III I)
Component type-approval No: .
Extension No: .
Principal characteristics
- Other than windscreens (yes/no):
- Windscreens for tractor(s): .
- Number of layers of glass: .
- Number of layers of interlayer: .
- Thickness category: .
- Nominal thickness of interlayer(s): .
- Special treatment of glass: .
- Nature and type of interlayer(s): .
- Nature and type of plastic coating(s): .
- Thickness of plastic coating(s): .
Secondary characteristics
- Nature of the material (plate, float, sheet glass): .
- Colouring of interlayer (total/partial): .
- Colouring of glass: .
- Colouring of plastic coating(s): .
- Conductors incorporated (yes/no):
- Anti-glare strips incorporated (yes/no):
Remarks:
.
.
.
.
.
Documents attached: list of windscreens (if applicable) (see Appendix 8).
Appendix 5 GLASS-PLASTIC WINDSCREENS
(Principal and secondary characteristics as defined in Annex III J)
Component type-approval No: .
Extension No: .
Principal characteristics
- Shape category: .
- Number of layers of plastic: .
- Nominal thickness of glass: .
- Treatment of the glass (yes/no):
- Nominal thickness of the windscreen: .
- Nominal thickness of the layer(s) of plastic acting as interlayer: .
- Nature and type of layer(s) of plastic acting as interlayer: .
- Nature and type of the outer layer of plastic: .
Secondary characteristics
- Nature of the material (plate, float, sheet glass): .
- Colouring of glass: .
- Colouring of the layer(s) of plastic (total/partial): .
- Conductors incorporated (yes/no):
- Anti-glare strips incorporated (yes/no):
Remarks:
.
.
.
.
.
Documents attached: list of windscreens (see Appendix 8).
EWG:L777UMBE10.96
FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 507 mm; 61 Zeilen; 1859 Zeichen;
Bediener: MARK Pr.: C;
Kunde: L 777 EN 10 - 43649
10. 3. 89
Official Journal of the European Communities
Appendix 6 GLASS-PLASTIC PANES OTHER THAN WINDSCREENS
(Principal and secondary characteristics as defined in Annex III K)
Component type-approval No: .
Extension No: .
Principal characteristics
- Other than windscreens (yes/no):
- Windscreens for tractor(s): .
- Number of layers of plastic: .
- Thickness of the glass component: .
- Treatment of the glass component (yes/no):
- Nominal thickness of the pane: .
- Nominal thickness of the layer(s) of plastic acting as interlayer: .
- Nature and type of layer(s) of plastic acting as interlayer: .
- Nature and type of the outer layer of plastic: .
Secondary characteristics
- Nature of the material (plate, float, sheet glass): .
- Colouring of glass (colourless/tinted): .
- Colouring of the layer(s) of plastic (total/partial): .
- Conductors incorporated (yes/no):
- Anti-glare strips incorporated (yes/no):
Remarks:
.
.
.
.
.
Documents attached: list of windscreens (if applicable) (see Appendix 8).
Appendix 7 DOUBLE-GLAZED UNITS
(Principal and secondary characteristics as defined in Annex III L)
Component type-approval No: .
Extension No: .
Principal characteristics
- Composition of double-glazed units (symmetrical/asymmetrical): .
- Nominal thickness of the gap: .
- Method of assembly: .
- Type of each glass as defined in Annexes III E, III G, III I, III K: .
Document attached
One form for the two panes of a symmetrical double-glazed unit in accordance with the Annex under which the panes have been tested or approved.
One form for each glass pane of an asymmetrical double-glazed unit in accordance with the Annexes under which these panes have been tested or approved.
Remarks:
.
.
.
.
.
EWG:L777UMBE11.96
FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 507 mm; 53 Zeilen; 1768 Zeichen;
Bediener: MARK Pr.: C;
Kunde: L 777 EN 11 - 43649
10. 3. 89
Official Journal of the European Communities
Appendix 8 CONTENTS OF THE LIST OF WINDSCREENS (¹)
For each of the windscreens covered by this component type-approval, at least the following particulars shall be provided:
- Tractor manufacturer: .
- Type of tractor: .
- Developed area (F): .
- Height of segment (h): .
- Curvature (r): .
- Installation angle (a): .
- Index point coordinates (A, B, C) relative to the centre of the upper edge of the windscreen: .
EWG:L777UMBE12.97
FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 259 mm; 18 Zeilen; 591 Zeichen;
Bediener: MARK Pr.: C;
Kunde: L 777 EN 12 - 43649
(1) Delete as inapplicable.(2) This list must be attached to Appendices 1, 2 (if applicable), 3 and 5 to this Annex. ANNEX III C GENERAL TEST CONDITIONS 1.
FRAGMENTATION TESTS
1.1
The pane of glass to be tested must not be rigidly secured; it may however be fastened on an indentical glass pane by means of adhesive tape applied all round the edge.
1.2.
To obtain fragmentation, a hammer of about 75 g or some other appliance giving equivalent results is used. The radius of curvature of the point is 0,2 ± 0,05 mm.
1.3.
One test must be carried out at each prescribed point of impact.
1.4.
An examination must be made of the fragments on photographic contact paper, exposure commencing not more than 10 seconds and terminating not more than three minutes after impact. Only the darkest lines, representing the initial fracture, are taken into consideration. The laboratory must keep photographic reproductions of the fragmentation obtained.
2.
BALL-IMPACT TESTS
2.1.
227-g-ball test
2.1.1.
Apparatus
2.1.1.1.
Hardened-steel ball with a mass of 227 ± 2 g and a diameter of approximately 38 mm.
2.1.1.2.
Device for dropping the ball freely from a height to be specified, or a device for giving the ball a velocity equivalent to that obtained by the free fall. When a device to project the ball is used, the tolerance on velocity must be ± 1 % of the velocity equivalent to that obtained by the free fall.
2.1.1.3.
Supporting fixture, such as that shown in Figure 1, composed of steel frames, with machined borders 15 mm wide, fitting one over the other and faced with rubber gaskets about 3 mm thick and 15 mm wide and of hardness 50 IRHD.
The lower frame rests on a steel box about 150 mm high. The test-piece is held in place by the upper frame, the mass of which is about 3 kg. The supporting frame is welded on to a sheet of steel about 12 mm thick resting on the floor with an interposed sheet of rubber about 3 mm thick and of hardness 50 IRHD.
2.1.2.
Test conditions
- Temperature: 20 ± 5 °C.
- Pressure: 860 to 1 060 mbar.
- Relative humidity: 60 ± 20 %.
2.1.3.
Test piece
The test piece must be a flat square of side 300 + 10/-0 mm.
2.1.4.
Procedure
Condition the test piece at the specified temperature for at least four hours immediately proceding the test.
Place the test piece in the fixture (2.1.1.3). The plane of the test piece must be perpendicular,
within 3°, to the incident direction of the ball.
The point of impact must be within 25 mm of the geometric centre of the test piece for a drop height of 6 m or less, and within 50 mm of the centre of the test piece for a drop height greater than 6 m. The ball must strike that face of the test piece which represents the outside face of the safety-glass pane when mounted on the vehicle. The ball is allowed to make only one impact.
2.2.
2 260-g-ball test
2.2.1.
Apparatus
2.2.1.1.
Hardened-steel ball with a mass of 2 260 ± 20 g and a diameter of approximately 82 mm.
2.2.1.2.
Device for dropping the ball freely from a height to be specified, or a device for giving the ball a velocity equivalent to that obtained by the free fall. When a device to project the ball is used, the tolerance on velocity must be ± 1 % of the velocity equivalent to that obtained by the free fall.
2.2.1.3.
The supporting fixture is as shown in Figure 1 and identical with that described in point 2.1.1.3.
2.2.2.
Test conditions
- Temperature: 20 ± 5 °C.
- Pressure: 860 to 1 060 mbar.
- Relative humidity: 60 ± 20 %.
2.2.3.
Test piece
The test piece must be a flat square of side 300 + 10/-0 mm or cut out from the flattest part of a windscreen or other curved pane of safety glass.
Alternatively, the whole windscreen or other curved pane of safety glass may be tested. In this case care must be taken to ensure adequate contact between the safety-glass pane and the support.
2.2.4.
Procedure
Condition the test piece at the specified temperature for at least four hours immediately proceding the test.
Place the test piece in the fixture (2.1.1.3). The plane of the test piece must be perpendicular,
within 3°, to the incident direction of the ball.
In the case of glass-plastic glazing the test piece is clamped to the support.
The point of impact must be within 25 mm of the geometric centre of the test piece. The ball must strike that face of the test piece which represents the inward face of the safety-glass pane when the latter is mounted on the vehicle. The ball is allowed to make only one impact.
3.
HEADFORM TEST
3.1.
Apparatus
3.1.1.
Headform weight with a spherical or semi-spherical headform made of laminated hardwood covered with replaceable felt and with or without a cross-beam made of wood. There is a neck-shaped intermediate piece between the spherical part and the cross-beam and a mounting rod on the other side of the cross-beam.
The dimensions are in accordance with Figure 2.
The total mass of the apparatus is 10 ± 0,2 kg.
3.1.2.
Device for dropping the headform weight freely from a height to be specified, or device for giving the weight a velocity equivalent to that obtained by the free fall.
When a device to project the headform weight is used, the tolerance on velocity must be ± 1 % of the velocity equivalent to that obtained by the free fall.
3.1.3.
Supporting fixture, as shown in Figure 3, for testing flat test pieces. The fixture is composed of two steel frames, with machined borders 50 mm wide, fitting one over the other and faced with rubber gaskets about 3 mm thick and 15 ± 1 mm wide and a hardness 70 IRHD.
The upper frame is held pressed against the lower frame by at least eight bolts.
3.2.
Test conditions
3.2.1.
- Temperature: 20 ± 5 °C.
3.2.2.
- Pressure: 860 to 1 060 mbar.
3.2.3.
- Relative humidity: 60 ± 20 %.
EWG:L777UMBE13.94
FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 761 mm; 92 Zeilen; 5736 Zeichen;
Bediener: MARK Pr.: C;
Kunde: L 777 England 13
10. 3. 89
Official Journal of the European Communities
3.3.
Procedure
3.3.1.
Test on a flat test piece
The flat test piece, having a length of 1 100 + 5/-2 mm and a width of 500 + 5 /-2 mm is kept at a constant temperature of 20 ± 5 °C for at least four hours immediately preceding the test. Fix the test piece in the supporting frames (3.1.3); tighten the bolts so as to ensure that the movement of the test piece during the test does not exceed 2 mm. The plane of the test piece must be substantially perpendicular to the incident direction of the weight. The weight must strike the test piece within 40 mm of its geometric centre on that face which represents the inward face of the safety-glass pane when the latter is mounted on the vehicle, and be allowed to make only one impact.
The impact surface of the felt cover is to be replaced after 12 tests.
3.3.3.
Tests on a complete windscreen (used only for a drop height of less than or equal to 1,5 m)
Place the windscreen freely on a support with an interposed strip of rubber of hardness 70 IRHD and thickness about 3 mm, the width of contact over the whole perimeter being about 15 mm. The support consists of a rigid piece corresponding to the shape of the windscreen so that the headform weight strikes the internal surface. If necessary, the support must rest on a rigid stand with an interposed sheet of rubber of hardness 70 IRHD and thickness about 3 mm.
The surface of the windscreen must be substantially perpendicular to the incident direction of the headform weight.
The headform weight must strike the windscreen at a point within 40 mm of its geometric centre on that face which represents the inward face of the safety glass pane when the latter is mounted on the vehicle, and be allowed to make only one impact.
The impact surface of the felt cover is to be replaced after 12 tests.
4.
ABRASION TEST
4.1.
Apparatus
4.1.1.
Abrading instrument (1), shown diagrammatically in Figure 4 and consisting of:
- a horizontal turntable, with centre clamp, which revolves counter-clockwise at 65 to 75 rev/min, and
- two weighted parallel arms each carrying a special abrasive wheel freely relating on a ball-bearing horizontal spindle; each wheel rests on the test specimen under the pressure exerted by a mass of 500 g.
The turntable of the abrading instrument must rotate regularly, substantially in one plane (the deviation from this plane must not be greater than ± 0,05 mm at a distance of 1,6 mm from turntable periphery). The wheels must be mounted in such a way that when they are in contact with the rotating test piece they rotate in opposite directions so as to exert, twice during each rotation of the test piece, a compressive and abrasive action along curved lines over an annular area of about
30 cm².
4.1.2.
Abrasive wheels (2), each 45 to 50 mm in diameter and 12,5 mm thick, composed of a special finely screened abrasive embedded in a medium-hard rubber. The wheels must have a hardness of
72 ± 5 IRHD, as measured at four points equally spaced on the centre line of the abrading surface, the pressure being applied vertically along a diameter of the wheel and the readings being taken 10 seconds after full application of the pressure.
The abrasive wheels must be prepared for use by very slow rotation against a sheet of flat glass to ensure that their surface is completely even.
4.1.3.
Light source consisting of an incandescent lamp with its filament contained within a parallel pipe measuring 1,5 mm×1,5 mm×3 mm. The voltage must be stabilized within ± 1/1 000. The instrument used to check the voltage must be of appropriate accuracy.
4.1.4.
Optical system consisting of a lens with a focal length, f, of at least 500 mm and corrected for chromatic aberrations. The full aperture of the lens must not exceed f/20. The distance between the lens and the light source is adjusted in order to obtain a light beam which is substantially parallel. A diaphragm is inserted to limit the diameter of the light beam to 7 mm ± 1 mm. This diaphragm must be situated at a distance of 100 ± 50 mm from the lens on the side remote from the light source.
4.1.5.
Equipment for measuring scattered light (see Figure 5), consisting of a photoelectric cell with an integrating sphere 200 to 250 mm in diameter. The sphere is equipped with entrance and exit ports for the light. The entrance port must be circular and have a diameter at least twice that of the light beam. The exit port of the sphere is provided with either a light trap or a reflectance standard, according to the procedure as described in point 4.4.3 below. The light trap absorbs all the light when no test piece is inserted in the light beam.
The axis of the light beam must pass through the centre of the entrance and exit ports. The diameter, b, of the light-exit port must be equal to 2a · tan 4°, where a is the diameter of the sphere. The photoelectric cell must be mounted in such a way that it cannot be reached by light coming directly from the entrance port or from the reflectance standard.
The surfaces of the interior of the integrating sphere and the reflectance standard must be of substantially equal reflectance and matt and non-selective. The output of the photoelectric cell must be linear within ± 2 % over the range of luminous intensities used.
The design of the instrument must be such that there is no galvanometer deflection when the sphere is dark. The whole apparatus must be checked at regular intervals by means of calibration standards of defined haze. If haze measurements are made using equipment or methods differing from those defined above, the results must be corrected, if necessary, to bring them into agreement with those obtained by the apparatus described above.
4.2.
Test conditions
4.2.1.
Temperature: 20 ± 5 °C.
4.2.2.
Pressure: 860 to 1 060 mbar.
4.2.3.
Relative humidity: 60 ± 20 %.
4.3.
Test pieces
The test pieces must be flat squares whose sides measure 100 mm having both surfaces substantially plane and parallel and if necessary having a fixing hole 6,4 + 0,2/-0 mm in diameter drilled in the centre.
4.4.
Procedure
The abrasion test is carried out on that surface of the test piece which represents the outside face of the safety-glass pane when the latter is mounted on the vehicle and also on the inward-face in the case of a glasspane with a plastic coating.
4.4.1.
Immediately before and after the abrasion, clean the test pieces in the following manner:
(a) wipe with a linen cloth under clean running water;
(b) rinse with distilled or demineralized water;
(c) blow dry with oxygen or nitrogen;
(d) remove possible traces of water by dabbing softly with a damp linen cloth. If necessary, dry by pressing lightly between two linen cloths.
Any treatment with ultrasonic equipment must be avoided. After cleaning, the test pieces must be handled only by their edges and stored to prevent damage to, or contamination of, their surfaces.
4.4.2.
Condition the test pieces for a minimum time of 48 hours at a temperature of 20 ± 5 °C and a relative humidity of 60 ± 20 %.
EWG:L777UME13A.96
FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 761 mm; 99 Zeilen; 7411 Zeichen;
Bediener: MARK Pr.: C;
Kunde: L 777 Umb E 13 A
10. 3. 89
Official Journal of the European Communities
4.4.3.
Immediately place the test piece against the entrance port of the integrating sphere. The angle between the normal (perpendicular) to the surface of the test piece and the axis of the beam must not exceed 8°.
Take four readings as indicated in the following table:
Reading
With
test piece
With
light trap
With
reflectance
standard
Quantity represented
T1
No
No
Yes
Incident light
T2
Yes
No
Yes
Total light transmitted by test piece
T3
No
Yes
No
Light scattered by instrument
T4
Yes
Yes
No
Light scattered by instrument and test piece
Repeat readings T1, T2, T3 and T4 with other specified positions of the test piece to determine uniformity.
Calculate the total transmittance Tt = T2/T1.
Calculate the diffuse transmittance Td as follows:
Td =
Td =
T4-T3 (T2/T1)
T1
Calculate the percentage haze, or light, or both, scattered, as follows:
Td × 100 %
Td
Tt
× 100 %
Measure the initial haze of the test piece at a minimum of four equally spaced points in the unabraded area in accordance with the formula above. Average the results for each test piece. In lieu of the four measurements, an average value may be obtained by rotating the piece uniformly at
3 rev/sec or more.
For each safety-glass pane, carry out three tests with the same kind. Use the haze as a measure of the subsurface abrasion, after the test piece has been subjected to the abrasion test.
Measure the light scattered by the abraded track at a minimum of four equally spaced points along the track in accordance with the formula above. Average the results for each test piece. In lieu of the four measurements, an average value may be obtained by rotating the piece uniformly at 3 rev/sec or more.
4.5
The abrasion test to be carried out only at the discretion of the laboratory conducting the test with due regard to the information already at its disposal, e.g. changes in the interlayer or material thickness will not normally necessitate further testing.
4.6.
Indices of difficulty of the secondary characteristics.
No secondary characteristics are involved.
5.
HIGH-TEMPERATURE TEST
5.1.
Procedure
Heat to 100 °C three test samples or three test pieces of at least 300 mm×300 mm taken by the laboratory from three windscreens or three glass panes other than windscreens, as appropriate, one of whose dimensions corresponds to the upper edge of the pane.
Maintain this temperature for a period of two hours, then allow the test sample(s) to cool to room temperature. If the safety-glass pane has both external surfaces of inorganic material, the test may be carried out by immersing the test sample vertically in boiling water for the specified period of time, care being taken to avoid undue thermal shock. If specimens are cut from windscreens, one edge of each such test specimen shall be part of an edge of the windscreen.
5.2.
Indices of difficulty of the secondary characteristics
Colourless
Tinted
Colouring of the interlayer:
1
2
The other secondary characteristics are not involved.
5.3.
Interpretation of results
5.3.1.
The test for resistance to high temperature is considered to give a positive result if bubbles or other defects are not formed more than 15 mm from an uncut edge or 25 mm from a cut edge of the test piece or sample or more than 10 mm from any cracks which may occur during the test.
5.3.2.
A set of test pieces or samples submitted for component type-approval are considered satisfactory from the point of view of the high-temperature resistance test if either of the following conditions is fulfilled:
5.3.2.1.
all the tests give a satisfactory result, or
5.3.2.2.
one test having given an unsatisfactory result, a further series of tests carried out on a new set of test pieces or samples give satisfactory results.
6.
RESISTANCE-TO-RADIATION TEST
6.1.
Test method
6.1.1.
Apparatus
6.1.1.1.
Radiation source consisting of a medium-pressure mercury-vapour arc lamp with a tubular quartz bulb of ozone-free type; the bulb axis is vertical. The nominal dimensions of the lamp are 360 mm in length by 9,5 mm in diameter. The arc length is 300 ± 4 mm. The lamp must be operated at
750 ± 50 W.
Any other source of radiation which produces the same effects as the lamp specified above may be used. To check that the effects of another source are the same, a comparison is made by measuring the amount of energy emitted within a wavelength range of 300 to 450 mm, all other wavelengths being removed by the use of suitable filters. The alternative source is then used with these filters.
In the case of safety-glass panes for which there is no satisfactory correlation between this test and the conditions of use it will be necessary to review the test conditions.
6.1.1.2.
Power supply transformer and capacitor capable of supplying to the lamp (6.1.1.1) a starting peak-voltage of 1 100 V minimum and an operating voltage of 500 ± 50 V.
6.1.1.3.
Device for mounting and rotating the test specimens at 1 to 5 rev/min about the centrally located radiation source in order to ensure even exposure.
6.1.2.
Test pieces
6.1.2.1.
The size of the test pieces is 76 mm×300 mm.
6.1.2.2.
The test pieces are cut by the laboratory from the upper part of the panes in such a way that:
- in the case of glass panes other than windscreens the upper edge of the test pieces coincides with the upper edge of the panes,
- in the case of windscreens the upper edge of the test pieces coincides with the upper limit of the zone in which regular transmittance is to be checked and determined in accordance with point 9.1.2.2 of this Annex.
6.1.3.
Procedure
Check the regular light transmittance, determined in accordance with points 9.1.1 to 9.1.2 of this Annex, of three test samples before exposure. Protect a portion of each sample from the radiation, and then place the sample in the test apparatus 230 mm from and parallel lengthwise to the lamp axis. Maintain the temperature of the samples at 45 ± 5 °C throughout the test. That face of each
test sample which would constitute a grazed exterior part of the tractor must face the lamp. For the type of lamp specified in point 6.1.1.1 the exposure time is 100 hours. After exposure, measure the regular light transmittance again in the exposed area of each sample.
6.1.4.
Each test piece or sample (three in total) is subjected, in accordance with the procedure above, to radiation such that the radiation on each point of the test piece or sample produces on the interlayer used the same effect as that which would be produced by solar radiation of 1 400 W/m² for
100 hours.
6.2.
Indices of difficulty of the secondary characteristics
Colourless
Tinted
Colouring of glass
2
1
Colouring of interlayer
1
2
The other secondary characteristics are not involved.
6.3.
Interpretation of results
6.3.1.
The test for resistance to radiation is deemed to have given a positive result if the following conditions are fulfilled:
6.3.1.1.
the total light transmittance measured in accordance with sections 9.1.1 to 9.1.2 of this Annex does not fall below 95 % of the original value before irradiation and, in any case does not fall below:
6.3.1.1.1.
70 % in the case of glass panes other than windscreens which must meet the requirements concerning the driver's field of vision in all directions;
6.3.1.1.2.
75 % in the case of windscreens, within the zone in which regular transmittance is to be checked, as defined in point 9.1.2.2 below.
6.3.1.2.
The test piece or sample may however show a slight coloration after irradiation when examined against a white background, but no other defect may be apparent.
6.3.2.
A set of test pieces or samples submitted for component type-approval is considered satisfactory from the point of view of the resistance to radiation test if one of the following conditions is fulfilled:
6.3.2.1.
all tests give a satisfactory result, or
6.3.2.2.
one test having given an unsatisfactory result, a further series of tests carried out on a new set of test pieces or samples give satisfactory results.
7.
RESISTANCE-TO-HUMIDITY TEST
7.1.
Procedure
Keep three test samples or three test pieces at least 300 mm×300 mm square vertically for two weeks in a closed container in which the temperature is maintained at 50 ± 2 °C and the relative humidity at 95 % ± 4 % (3).
Test pieces are prepared in such a way that:
- one edge of each test piece is part of an original edge of the windscreen,
- should several test pieces be tested at the same time, adequate spacing must be provided between them.
Precautions must be taken to prevent condensation from the walls or ceiling of the test chamber from falling on the test specimens.
7.2.
Indices of difficulty of the secondary characteristics
Colourless
Tinted
Colouring of interlayer
1
2
The other secondary characteristics are not involved.
EWG:L777UME13B.96
FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 761 mm; 183 Zeilen; 8901 Zeichen;
Bediener: MARK Pr.: C;
Kunde: L 777 England 13 B
10. 3. 89
Official Journal of the European Communities
7.3.
Interpretation of results
7.3.1.
Safety-glass panes are deemed to be satisfactory from the point of view of resistance to humidity if no significant change is observed more than 10 mm from the uncut edges or more than 15 mm from the cut edges, following a stay of two hours in the ambient atmosphere by ordinary and treated laminated glass, and of 48 hours in the ambient atmosphere by plastic-coated glass panes and plastic glazing.
7.3.2.
A set of test pieces or samples submitted for component type-approval is considered satisfactory from the point of view of the resistance to humidity test if one of the following conditions is fulfilled:
7.3.2.1.
all the tests give a satisfactory result;
7.3.2.2.
one test having given an unsatisfactory result, a further series of tests carried out on a new set of samples give satisfactory results.
8.
TESTING OF RESISTANCE TO CHANGES IN TEMPERATURE
8.1.
Test method
Two 300×300 mm test pieces are placed in an enclosed chamber for six hours at a temperature of -40 ± 5 °C; they are then placed in the ambient air at a temperature of 23 ± 2 °C for an hour, or until the test piece has reached a stable temperature. They are then placed in an air flow at a temperature of 72 ± 2 °C for three hours. The test pieces are then examined after they have been returned to the ambient air at 23 ± 2 °C and cooled to that temperature.
8.2.
Index of difficulty of the secondary characteristics
Colourless Tinted
Colourless
Tinted
Colouring of plastic interlayer or coating
1
2
No other secondary characteristics are involved.
8.3.
Interpretation of results
The test of resistance to changes in temperature is considered to have given a positive result if the test pieces display no cracking, opacification, exfoliation or other obvious deterioration.
9.
OPTICAL QUALITIES
9.1.
Light transmission test
9.1.1.
Apparatus
9.1.1.1.
Light source consisting of an incandescent lamp having its filament contained within a parallelepiped measuring 1,5 mm×1,5 mm×3 mm. The voltage at the lamp filament must be such that the colour temperature is 2 856 K ± 50 K. This voltage is stabilized within ± ¹/1000. The instrument used to check the voltage must be of appropriate accuracy.
9.1.1.2.
Optical system consisting of a lens with a focal length of at least 500 mm and corrected for chromatic aberrations. The full aperture of the lens must not exceed f/20. The distance between the lens and the light source must be so adjusted as to obtain a light beam which is substantially parallel.
A diaphragm is inserted to limit the diameter of the light beam to 7 ± 1 mm. This diaphragm is situated at a distance of 100 ± 50 mm from the lens on the side remote from the light source. The point of measurement is taken at the centre of the light beam.
9.1.1.3.
Measuring equipment. The receiver must have a relative spectral sensitivity in substantial agreement with the relative spectral luminous efficiency for the ICI (4) standard photometric observer for photopic vision. The sensitive surface of the receiver is covered with a diffusing medium and must have at least twice the cross-section of the light beam emitted by the optical system. If an integrating sphere is used, the aperture of the sphere must have a cross-sectional area at least twice that of the parallel portion of the beam.
The linearity of the receiver and the associated indicated instrument must be better than 2 % of the effective part of the scale.
9.1.2.
Procedure
So adjust the instrument indicating the response of the receiver that it indicates 100 divisions when the safety-glass pane is not inserted in the light path. When no light is falling on the receiver, the instrument must read zero.
Place the safety-glass pane at a distance from the receiver equal to approximately five times the diameter of the receiver. Insert the safety-glass pane between the diaphragm and the receiver and adjust its orientation in such a way that the angle of incidence of the light beam is equal to 0° ± 5°. The regular transmittance is measured on the safety-glass pane, and for every point measured the number of divisions, n, shown on the indicating instrument, are read. The regular transmittance tr is equal to n/100.
9.1.2.1.
In the case of windscreens, alternative test methods may be applied using either a test sample cut from the flattest part of a windscreen or a specially prepared flat square with material and thickness characteristics identical to those of the actual windscreen, the measurements being taken normal (perpendicular) to the glass pane.
9.1.2.2.
The test is carried out in the zone I specified in point 9.2.5.2 of this Annex.
9.1.2.3.
In the case of tractors for which it is not possible to determine zone I, the test is carried out in zone Im as defined in point 9.2.5.3 of this Annex.
9.1.3.
Indices of difficulty of the secondary characteristics
not included included
Colourless
Tinted
Colouring of the glass
1
2
Colouring of the interlayer
(in the case of laminated windscreens)
1
2
not included
included
Shade and/or obscuration bands
1
2
The other secondary characteristics are not involved.
9.1.4.
Interpretation of results
9.1.4.1.
The regular transmittance measured according to section 9.1.2 in the case of windscreens must not be less than 75 %, and in the case of windows other than windscreens not less than 70 %.
9.1.4.2.
In the case of windows situated at points which are not essential to the driver's field of vision (glazed roof, for example) the regular transmittance factor of the light from the pane may be less than 70 %. Windows having a regular light transmittance factor of less than 70 % must be marked with an appropriate symbol.
9.2.
Optical-distortion test
9.2.1.
Scope
The method specified is a projection method which permits evaluation of the optical distortion of a safety-glass pane.
9.2.1.1.
Definitions
9.2.1.1.1.
Optical deviation: the angle between the true and the apparent direction of a point viewed through the safety-glass pane, the magnitude of the angle being a function of the angle of incidence of the line of sight, the thickness and inclination of the glass pane, and the radius of curvature at the point of incidence.
9.2.1.1.2.
Optical distortion in a direction MMm: the algebraic difference in angular deviation Da measured between two points M and Mm on the surface of the safety-glass pane, the distance between the two points being such that their projections in a plane at right angles to the direction of vision are separated by a given distance Dx (see Figure 6).
Anti-clockwise deviation is to be regarded as positive and clockwise deviation as negative.
9.2.1.1.3.
Optical distortion at a point M: the optical distortion maximum for all directions MMm from the point M.
EWG:L777UME13C.95
FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 511 mm; 113 Zeilen; 6865 Zeichen;
Bediener: JUTT Pr.: C;
Kunde: L 777 EN 13c - 43649
10. 3. 89
Official Journal of the European Communities
9.2.1.2.
Apparatus
This method entails the projection of an appropriate slide (raster) on to the display screen through the safety-glass pane being tested. The change caused in the shape of the projected image by the insertion of the safety-glass pane in the line of light provides a measures of the distortion. The apparatus comprises the following items, arranged as shown in Figure 9.
9.2.1.2.1.
Projector, of good quality, with a high-intensity point light source, having for example the following characteristics:
- focal length at least 90 mm,
- aperture approximately 1/2,5,
- 150 W quartz halogen lamp (if used without a filter),
- 250 W quartz halogen lamp (if a green filter is used).
The projector is shown schematically in Figure 7. A diaphragm of 8 mm diameter is positioned approximately 10 mm from the front lens.
9.2.1.2.2.
Slides (rasters) consisting, for example, of an array of bright circular shapes on a dark background (see Figure 8). The slide must be of sufficiently high quality and contrast to enable measurement to be carried out with an error of less than 5 %. In the absence of the safety-glass pane to be examined, the dimensions of the circular shapes must be such that when the circular shapes are projected they
R1 + R2
form an array of circles of diameter
R1 + R2
R1
Dx where Dx = 4 mm (see Figures 6 and 9).
9.2.1.2.3.
Support stand, preferably one permitting vertical and horizontal scanning, as well as rotation of the safety-glass pane.
9.2.1.2.4.
Checking template, for measuring changes in dimensions where a rapid assessment is required. A suitable design is shown in Figure 10.
9.2.1.3.
Procedure
9.2.1.3.1.
General
Mount the safety-glass pane on the support stand (9.2.1.2.3) at the designated rake angle. Project the test image through the area being examined. Rotate the safety-glass pane or move it either horizontally or vertically in order to examine the whole of the specified area.
9.2.1.3.2.
Assessment using a checking template
Where a rapid assessment with a possible margin of error of up to 20 % is sufficient, calculate the value of A (see Figure 10) from the limit value DaL for the change in deviation and the value of R2, the distance from the safety-glass pane to the display screen:
A = 0,145 DaL · R2
The relationship between the change in diameter of the projected image Dd and the change in angular deviation Da is given by:
Dd = 0,29 Da · R2
where:
Dd
is expressed in millimetres,
A
is expressed in millimetres,
DaL
is expressed in minutes of arc,
Da
is expressed in minutes of arc, and
R2
is expressed in metres.
9.2.1.3.3.
Measurement using a photoelectric device
Where a precise measurement with a possible margin of error of less than 10 % of the limit value is required, measure Dd on the projection axis, the value of the spot width being taken at the point where the luminance is 0,5 times the maximum spot luminance value.
9.2.1.4.
Expression of results
Evaluate the optical distortion of the safety-glass panes by measuring Dd at any point of the surface and in all directions in order to find Dd max.
9.2.1.5.
Alternative method
In addition, a strioscopic technique is permitted as an alternative to the projection techniques, provided that the accuracy of the measurements given in points 9.2.1.3.2 and 9.2.1.3.3 is maintained.
9.2.1.6.
The distance Dx must be 4 mm.
9.2.1.7.
The windscreen must be mounted at the same rake angle as on the tractor.
EWG:L777UME13D.95
FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 761 mm; 63 Zeilen; 3592 Zeichen;
Bediener: MARK Pr.: C;
Kunde: 43649 l777ume13d
10. 3. 89
Official Journal of the European Communities
9.2.1.8.
The projection axis in the horizontal plane must be maintained approximately normal to the trace of the windscreen in that plane.
9.2.2.
The measurements are performed in zone I as prescribed in point 9.2.5.2 of this Annex.
9.2.2.1.
In the case of tractors for which it is not possible to determine zone I as defined in point 9.2.5.3 of this Annex, the test is carried out in zone Im, as defined in point 9.2.5.3 of this Annex.
9.2.2.2.
Tractor type
The test must be repeated if the windscreen is to be mounted on a tractor of a type which has a different forward field of vision from that of the tractor type for which the windscreen has already been approved.
9.2.3.
Indices of difficulty of the secondary characteristics
9.2.3.1.
Nature of the material
Polished (plate) glass Float glass Sheet glass
Polished (plate) glass
Float glass
Sheet glass
1
1
2
9.2.3.2.
Other secondary characteristics
No other secondary characteristics are involved.
9.2.4.
Number of samples
Four samples must be submitted for testing.
9.2.5.
Definition of the zone of vision of tractor windscreens.
9.2.5.1.
The zone of vision is defined on the basis of:
9.2.5.1.1.
the reference point as defined in point 1.2 of the Annex ´Field of vision' to Council Directive 74/347/EEC of 25 June 1974 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to the field of vision and windscreen wipers for wheeled agricultural and forestry tractors. This point is designated as O below;
9.2.5.1.2.
the straight line OQ which is the horizontal straight line passing through the reference point and perpendicular to the median longitudinal plane of the tractor;
9.2.5.2.
zone I is the windscreen zone determined by the intersection of the windscreen with the four planes defined below:
P1 - a vertical plane passing through O and forming an angle of 15° to the left of the median longitudinal plane of the tractor,
P2 - a vertical plane symmetrical to P1 about the median longitudinal plane of the tractor.
If this is not possible (in the absence of a symmetrical median longitudinal plane, for instance) P2 is the plane symmetrical to P1 about the longitudinal plane of the tractor passing through the reference point,
P3 - a plane passing through the straight line OQ and forming an angle of 10° above the horizontal plane,
P4 - a plane passing through the straight line OQ and forming an angle of 8° below the horizontal plane.
9.2.5.3.
In the case of tractors for which it is not possible to determine zone I, as defined in point 9.2.5.2 of this Annex, zone Im consists of the whole surface of the windscreen.
9.2.6.
Interpretation of results
A type of windscreen is considered satisfactory as regards optical distortion if, in the four samples submitted for testing, optical distortion does not exceed a maximum value of 2m of an arc in either zone I or zone Im.
9.2.6.1.
No measurement must be performed within a 100-mm-wide peripheral zone.
9.2.6.2.
In the case of divided windscreens, no measurement is performed within a band 35 mm in width, starting from the edge of the pane, which may be adjacent to the screen divider.
9.3.
Secondary-image separation test
9.3.1.
Scope
Two test methods are recognized:
- target test, and
- collimation telescope test.
These test methods may be used for component type-approval, quality-control or product-evaluation purposes, as appropriate.
9.3.1.1.
Target test
9.3.1.1.1.
Apparatus
This method involves viewing an illuminated target through the safety-glass pane. The target may be designed in such a way that the test can be carried out on a simple go/no go basis.
The target must preferably be of one of the following types:
(a) an illuminated ring target whose outer diameter, D, subtends an angle of n minutes of arc at a point situated at x metres (Figure 11a); or
(b) an illuminated ring and spot target whose dimensions are such that the distance, D, from a point on the edge of the spot to the nearest point on the inside of the circle subtends an angle of n minutes of arc at a point situated at x metres (Figure 11b);
where:
n
is the limit value of secondary-image separation,
x
is the distance from the safety-glass pane to the target (not less than 7 m),
D
is given by the formula:
D = x · tan n
The illuminated target consists of a light box, approximately 300 mm×300 mm×150 mm, whose front is most conveniently constructed of glass masked with opaque black paper or coated with matt black paint. The box is illuminated by a suitable light source. The inside of the box is coated with matt white paint. It may be convenient to use other forms of target, such as that shown in Figure 14. It is also acceptable to replace the target system by a projection system and to view the resulting images on a screen.
9.3.1.1.2.
Procedure
Mount the safety-glass pane at the specified rake angle on a suitable stand in such a way that the observation is carried out in the horizontal plane passing through the centre of the target.
The light box must be viewed, in a dark or semi-dark room, through each part of the area being examined, in order to detect the presence of any secondary image associated with the illuminated target. Rotate the safety-glass pane as necessary to ensure that the correct direction of view is maintained. A monocular may be used for viewing.
9.3.1.1.3.
Expression of results
Determine whether:
- when target (a) (see figure 11a) is used, the primary and secondary image of the circle separate, i.e. whether the limit value of n is exceeded, or
- when target (b) (see figure 11b) is used, the secondary image of the spot shifts beyond the point of tangency with the inside edge of the circle, i.e. whether the limit value of n is exceeded.
EWG:L777UME13E.96
FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 511 mm; 95 Zeilen; 5778 Zeichen;
Bediener: MARK Pr.: C;
Kunde: 43649 L ...
10. 3. 89
Official Journal of the European Communities
9.3.1.2.
Collimation telescope test
If necessary, the procedure described in this section is applied.
9.3.1.2.1.
Apparatus
The apparatus comprises a collimator and a telescope and may be set up in accordance with
Figure 13. However, any equivalent optical system may be used.
9.3.1.2.2.
Procedure
The collimation telescope forms at infinity the image of a polar-coordinate system with a bright point at its centre (see Figure 14). In the focal plane of the observation telescope, a small opaque spot with a diameter slightly larger than of the projected bright point is placed on the optical axis, thus obscuring the bright point.
9.3.1.2.2.
When a test piece which exhibits a secondary image is placed between the telescope and the collimator, a second, less bright point appears at a certain distance from the centre of the polar-coordinate system. The secondary-image separation can be read out as the distance between the points seen through the observation telescope (see Figure 14). (The distance between the dark spot and the bright point at the centre of the polar-coordinate system represents the optical deviation.)
9.3.1.2.3.
Expression of results
The safety-glass pane is first examined by a simple scanning technique to establish the area giving the strongest secondary image. That area is then examined by the collimator telescope system at the appropriate angle of incidence. The maximum secondary-image separation is measured.
9.3.1.3.
The direction of observation in the horizontal plane must be maintained approximately normal to the trace of the windscreen in that plane.
9.3.2.
The measurements are performed according to tractor category in the zones defined in section 9.2.2.
9.3.2.1.
Tractor type
The test must be repeated if the windscreen is to be mounted on a tractor of a type which has a forward field of vision different from that of the tractor for which the windscreen has already been approved.
9.3.3.
Indices of difficulty of the secondary characteristics
9.3.3.1.
Nature of the material
Polished (plate) glass Float glass Sheet glass
Polished (plate) glass
Float glass
Sheet glass
1
1
2
9.3.3.2.
Other secondary characteristics
No other secondary characteristics are involved.
9.3.4.
Number of samples
Four samples must be submitted for testing.
9.3.5.
Interpretation of results
A type of windscreen is considered satisfactory as regards secondary-image separation if, in the four samples submitted for testing, separation of the primary and secondary image does not exceed a maximum value of 15m of an arc.
9.3.5.1.
No measurement must be carried out in a 100 mm-wide peripheral zone.
9.3.5.2.
In the case of divided windscreens no measurement may be performed within a band 35 mm in width, starting from the edge of the pane, which may be adjacent to the screen divider.
9.4.
Identification of colours test
When a windscreen is tinted in the zones defined in 9.2.5.2 or 9.2.5.3, four windscreens are tested for identifiability of the following colours:
white,
selective yellow,
red,
green,
blue,
amber.
10.
FIRE-RESISTANCE TEST
10.1.
Purpose and scope of application
This method enables the horizontal burning rate of materials used in the occupant compartment of tractors after exposure to a small flame to be determined. This method permits testing of materials and components of a tractor's interior equipment individually or in combination up to a thickness of 15 mm. It is used to judge the uniformity of production lots of such materials with respect to their burning behaviour. Because of the many differences between the real-world situation (application
and orientation within a tractor; conditions of use; ignition source, etc.) and the precise test conditions prescribed herein, this method cannot be considered as suitable for evaluation of all true in-tractor burning characteristics.
10.2.
Definitions
10.2.1.
Burning rate: the quotient of the burnt distance measured according to this method and the time taken to burn that distance.
It is expressed in millimetres per minute.
10.2.2.
Composite material: a material composed of several layers of similar or different materials intimately held together at their surface by cementing, bonding, cladding, welding, etc. When different materials are connected together intermittently (for example, by sewing, high-frequency welding, riveting), then in order to permit the preparation of individual samples in accordance with section 10.5 such materials are not considered as composite materials.
10.2.3.
Exposed side: the side which is facing towards the occupant compartment (passenger compartment) when the material is mounted in the tractor.
10.3.
Principle
A sample is held horizontally in a U-shaped holder and is exposed to the action of a defined low-energy flame for 15 seconds in a combustion chamber, the flame acting on the free end of the sample. The test determines whether and when the flame is extinguished or the time which the flame requires to proceed over a measured distance.
10.4.
Apparatus
10.4.1.
Combustion chamber (Figure 15), preferably of stainless steel, having the dimensions given in Figure 16. The front of the chamber contains a flame-resistant observation window, which may cover the entire front and which can be constructed as an access panel.
The bottom of the chamber has vent holes, and the top has a vent slot all around. The combustion chamber is placed on four feet, 10 mm high.
The chamber may have a hole at one end for the introduction of the sample holder containing the sample; in the opposite end, a hole is provided for the gas supply line. Melted material is caught in a pan (see Figure 17) which is placed on the bottom of the chamber between vent holes without covering any vent hole area.
10. 3. 89
Official Journal of the European Communities
10.4.2.
Sample holder, consisting of two U-shaped metal plates or frames of corrosion-proof material. Dimensions are given in Figure 18.
The lower plate is equipped with pins and the upper one with corresponding holes, in order to ensure a consistent holding of the sample. The pins also serve as measuring points at the beginning and end of the burning distance.
A support is provided in the form of heat-resistant wires 0,25 mm in diameter spanning the frame at 25 mm intervals over the bottom U-shaped frame (see Figure 19).
The plane of the lower side of samples must be 178 mm above the floor plate. The distance of the front edge of the sample holder from the end of the chamber must be 22 mm; the distance of the longitudinal sides of the sample holder from the sides of the chamber must be 50 mm (all inside dimensions). (See Figures 15 and 16.)
10.4.3.
Gas burner. The small ignition source is provided by a Bunsen burner having an inside diameter of 9,5 mm. It is so located in the test cabinet that the centre of its nozzle is 19 mm below the centre of the bottom edge of the open end of the sample (see Figure 16).
10.4.4.
Test gas. The gas supplied to the burner must have a calorific value of about 38 MJ/m³ (for example natural gas).
10.4.5.
Metal comb, at least 110 mm in length, with seven or eight smooth rounded teeth per 25 mm.
10.4.6.
Stop-watch, accurate to 0,5 second.
10.4.7.
Fume cupboard. The combustion chamber may be placed in a fume cupboard assembly provided that the latter's internal volume is at least 20 times, but not more than 110 times, greater than the volume of the combustion chamber and provided that no single height, width, or length dimension of the fume cupboard is greater than 2¹/2 times either of the other two dimensions.
Before the test, the vertical velocity of the air through the fume cupboard is measured 100 mm forward of and to the rear of the ultimate site of the combustion chamber. It must be between 0,10 and 0,30 m/s in order to avoid possible discomfort to the operator from combustion products. It is possible to use a fume cupboard with natural ventilation and an appropriate air velocity.
10.5.
Samples
10.5.1.
Shape and dimensions
The shape and dimensions of samples are given in Figure 20. The thickness of the sample corresponds to the thickness of the product to be tested. It must not be more than 13 mm. When sample taking so permits, the sample must have a constant section over its entire length. When the shape and dimensions of a product do not permit taking a sample of the given size, the following minimum dimensions must be observed:
(a) for samples having a width of 3 to 60 mm, the length must be 356 mm. In this case the material is tested over the product's width;
(b) for samples having a width of 60 to 100 mm, the length must be at least 138 mm. In this case the potential burning distance corresponds to the length of the sample, the measurement starting at the first measuring point;
(c) samples less than 60 mm wide and less than 356 mm long, and samples 60 to 100 mm wide and less than 138 mm long, cannot be tested according to the present method, nor can samples less than 3 mm wide.
10.5.2.
Sampling
At least five samples are to be taken from the material under test. In materials having burning rates differing according to the direction of the material (this being established by preliminary tests) the five (or more) samples are to be taken and placed in the test apparatus in such a way that the highest burning rate will be measured. When the material is supplied in set widths, a length of at least 500 mm covering the entire width is cut. From the piece so cut, the samples are to be taken at not less than 100 mm from the edge of the material and at points equidistant from each other.
Samples are to be taken in the same way from finished products when the shape of the product so permits. If the thickness of the product is over 13 mm it must be reduced to 13 mm by a mechanical process applied to the side which does not face the passenger compartment.
Composite materials (see 10.2.2) are to be tested as if they were homogeneous.
In the case of materials comprising superimposed layers of different composition which are not composite materials, all the layers of material included within a depth of 13 mm from the surface facing towards the passenger compartment are to be tested individually.
EWG:L777UME13G.96
FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 761 mm; 58 Zeilen; 4595 Zeichen;
Bediener: MARK Pr.: C;
Kunde: L 777 EN 13g - 43649
10. 3. 89
Official Journal of the European Communities
10.5.3.
Conditioning
The samples are to be conditioned for at least 24 hours, but no more than seven days, at a temperature of 23 ± 2 °C and a relative humidity of 50 ± 5 %, and maintained under these conditions until immediately prior to testing.
10.6.
Procedure
10.6.1.
Place samples with napped or tufted surfaces on a flat surface, and comb twice against the nap using the comb (10.4.5).
10.6.2.
Place the sample in the sample holder (10.4.2) so that the exposed side faces downwards, towards the flame.
10.6.3.
Adjust the gas flame to a height of 30 mm using the mark in the chamber, the air intake of the burner being closed. The flame must burn for at least one minute, for stabilization, before the first test is started.
10.6.4.
Push the sample holder into the combustion chamber so that the end of the sample is exposed to the flame, and after 15 seconds cut off the gas flow.
10.6.5.
Measurement of burning time starts at the moment when the foot of the flame passes the first measuring point. Observe the flame propagation on the side (upper or lower) which burns faster.
10.6.6.
Measurement of burning time is completed when the flame has come to the last measuring point or when the flame is extinguished before reaching that point. If the flame does not reach the last measuring point, measure the burnt distance up to the point where the flame was extinguished. Burnt distance is the part of the sample destroyed, on the surface or inside, by burning.
10.6.7.
If the sample does not ignite or does not continue burning after the burner has been extinguished, or the flame goes out before reaching the first measuring point, so that no burning time is measured, note in the test report that the burning is 0 mm/minute.
10.6.8.
When running a series of tests or performing repeat tests, make sure before starting a test that the temperature of the combustion chamber and sample-holder does not exceed 30 °C.
10.7.
Calculation
The burning rate, B, in millimetres per minute, is given by the formula:
B =
s
t
× 60
where:
s
is the burnt distance, in millimetres,
t
is the time, in seconds, taken to burn the distance s.
10.8.
Indices of difficulty of the secondary characteristics
No secondary chararcteristics are involved.
10.9.
Interpretation of results
Plastic-coated (2.3) and plastic safety glazing (2.4) are considered satisfactory from the point of view of burning behaviour (fire resistance) if the burn rate does not exceed 250 mm/minute.
11.
TESTING OF RESISTANCE TO CHEMICAL AGENTS
11.1.
Chemical agents to be used
11.1.1.
Non-abrasive soapy solution: 1 % by weight of potassium oleate in de-ionized water.
11.1.2.
Window-cleaning product: aqueous solution of isopropanol and dipropylene glycol monomethyl ether, each at a concentration of 5 to 10 % by weight, and of ammonium hydroxyde at a concentration of 1 to 5 % by weight.
11.1.3.
Non-dilute denatured alcohol: one part by volume of methyl alcohol in 10 parts by volume of ethyl alcohol.
11.1.4.
Reference gasoline mixture of 50 % by volume of toluene, 30 % by volume of 2,2,4-trimethylpentane, 15 % by volume of 2,4,4-trimethyl-1-pentane and 5 % by volume of ethyl alcohol.
11.1.5.
Reference kerosene: mixture of 50 % byvolume of n-octane and 50 % by volume of n-decane.
11.2.
Test method
Two 180×25 mm test pieces are each to be tested with chemical agents as provided for in section 11.1, a new test piece being used for each test and product. After each test the pieces are to be cleaned in accordance with the manufacturer's instruction, and then conditioned for 48 hours at a temperature of 23 ± 2 °C and a relative humidity of 50 ± 5 %. These conditions are to be maintained during the tests. The test pieces are to be completely immersed in the test liquid for one minute, withdrawn and then immediately dried with a (clean) absorbent cotton cloth.
11.3.
Indices of difficulty of the secondary characteristics
Colourless Tinted
Colourless
Tinted
Colouring of the plastic interlayer, or coating
1
2
No secondary characteristic is involved.
11.4.
Interpretation of the results
11.4.1.
The test for resistance to chemical agents is considered to be positive if the test pieces display no softening, stickiness, surface cracking or apparent loss of transparency.
11.4.2.
A series of test pieces submitted for component type-approval are considered satisfactory as regards resistance to chemical agents if one of the following conditions has been met:
11.4.2.1.
all the tests give satisfactory results;
11.4.2.2.
a test having given an unsatisfactory result, a further series of tests must be carried out on a new set of test pieces and give satisfactory results.
EWG:L777UME13H.96
FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 507 mm; 78 Zeilen; 4736 Zeichen;
Bediener: MARK Pr.: C;
Kunde: 43649 l777ume13h
(1) The minimum recommended torque for M 20 is 30 Nm.
(2) A suitable abrading instrument is supplied by Teledyne Taber (United States of America).(3) Suitable abrasive wheels may be obtained from Teledyne Taber (United States of America).(4) These test conditions exclude any condensation on the test pieces.(5) International Commission on Illumination. ANNEX III D TOUGHENED-GLASS WINDSCREENS 1.
DEFINITION OF TYPE
Toughened-glass windscreens are deemed to belong to different types if they differ in at least one of the following principal or secondary characteristics.
1.1.
The principal characteristics are as follows:
1.1.1.
the trade name or mark;
1.1.2.
the shape and dimensions.
Toughened-glass windscreens are considered as belonging to one or other of two groups for the purposes of the fragmentation and mechanical-properties tests, i.e.:
1.1.2.1.
flat windscreens, and
1.1.2.2.
curved windscreens;
1.1.3.
the thickness category in which the nominal thickness ´e' lies (a manufacturing tolerance of ± 0,2 mm being allowed):
- category I:
e § 4,5 mm
- category II:
4,5 mm <
e § 5,5 mm
- category III:
5,5 mm <
e § 6,5 mm
- category IV:
6,5 mm <
e
1.2.
The secondary characteristics are as follows:
1.2.1.
nature of the material (polished (plate) glass, float glass, sheet glass),
1.2.2.
colouring (colourless or tinted),
1.2.3.
the incorporation or absence of conductors,
1.2.4.
the incorporation or absence of obscuration bands.
2.
FRAGMENTATION TEST
2.1.
Indices of difficulty of the secondary characteristics
2.1.1.
Only the nature of the material is involved.
2.1.2.
Float glass and sheet glass are considered to have the same index of difficulty.
2.1.3.
The fragmentation tests must be repeated on transition from polished (plate) glass to float glass or sheet glass, and vice versa.
2.1.4.
The tests must be repeated if obscuration bands other than painted bands are used.
2.2.
Number of samples
Six samples from the smallest-developed-area series and six samples from the largest-
developed-area series, selected as prescibed in Annex III M, are to be tested.
2.3.
Different zones of glass
A toughened-glass windscreen must comprise two main zones, FI and FII. It may also comprise an intermediate zone, FIII.
These zones are as defined below:
2.3.1.
zone FI: peripheral zone of fine fragmentation, at least 7 cm wide, all round the edge of the windscreen and including an outer strip 2 cm wide not subjected to assessment;
2.3.2.
zone FII: visibility zone of varying fragmentation, always including a rectangular part at least 20 cm high and 50 cm long.
2.3.2.1.
The centre of the rectangle is inside a circle having a radius of 10 cm centred on the projection of the reference point.
2.3.2.2.
In the case of tractors for which it is not possible to determine the reference point, the position of the visibility zone must be indicated in the test report.
2.3.2.3.
The height of the above rectangle may be reduced to 15 cm for windscreens which are less than
44 cm high;
2.3.3.
zone FIII: intermediate zone, not more than 5 cm wide, between zones FI and FII.
2.4.
Test method
The method used is that described in section 1 of Annex III C.
2.5.
Points of impact (see Annex III N, Figure 2).
2.5.1.
The points of impact are selected as follows:
point 1: in the central part of zone FII in an area of high or low strees;
point 2: in zone FIII, as near as possible to the vertical plane of symmetry of zone FII;
points 3 and 3m: 3 cm from the edges of one median of the sample; when there is a tong mark, one of the breakage points shall be near the edge bearing the tong mark and the other near the opposite edge;
point 4: at the place where the radius of curvature is smallest on the longest median;
point 5: 3 cm from the edge of the sample at the place where the radius of curvature of the edge is smallest, either to the left or to the right.
2.5.2.
A fragmentation test is performed at each of the points 1, 2, 3, 3m, 4 and 5.
2.6.
Interpretation of results
2.6.1.
A test is deemed to have given a satisfactory result if fragmentation satisfies all the conditions given in points 2.6.1.1, 2.6.1.2 and 2.6.1.3 below.
2.6.1.1.
Zone FI
2.6.1.1.1.
The number of fragments in any 5×5 cm square is not less than 40 nor more than 350; however, in the case of a count of less than 40, if the number of fragments in any 10×10 cm square containing the 5×5 cm square is not less than 160, this is acceptable.
2.6.1.1.2.
For the purposes of the above rule, a fragment extending across a side of a square counts as half a fragment.
2.6.1.1.3.
Fragmentation is not checked in a strip 2 cm wide round the edge of the samples, this strip representing the frame of the glass, nor within a radius of 7,5 cm from the point of impact.
2.6.1.1.4.
A maximum of three fragments of an area exceeding 3 cm² is allowed. No two of these fragments must be contained within the same 10 cm diameter circle.
2.6.1.1.5.
Elongated fragments may be permitted provided that their ends are not knife-edged and that their length does not exceed 7,5 cm, except in the case provided for in point 2.6.2.2 below. If these elongated fragments extend to the edge of the glass, they must not form an angle of more than 45° with it.
2.6.1.2.
Zone FII
2.6.1.2.1.
The residual visibility after shattering is checked in the rectangular area defined in point 2.3.2. In that rectangle the aggregate surface area of the fragments of more than 2 cm² must represent not less than 15 % of the area of the rectangle; however, in the case of windscreens less than 44 cm high, or whose angle of installation is less than 15° from the vertical, the visibility percentage must be equal to 10 % at least of the surface of the corresponding rectangle.
2.6.1.2.2.
No fragment must have an area of more than 16 cm² except in the case provided for in point 2.6.2.2.
2.6.1.2.3.
Within a radius of 10 cm from the point of impact, but only in that part of the circle which is included in zone FII, three fragments having an area of more than 16 cm² but less than 25 cm² are allowed.
2.6.1.2.4.
Fragments must be substantially regular in shape and free from points of the type described in point 2.6.1.2.4.1. However, not more than 10 irregular fragments are allowed in any 50×20 cm rectangle and not more than 25 over the whole surface of the windscreen.
No such fragment must present a point more than 35 mm long measured in accordance with point 2.6.1.2.4.1.
2.6.1.2.4.1.
A fragment is considered as an irregular fragment if it cannot be inscribed in a circle of 40 mm in diameter, if it has at least one point more than 15 mm long when measured from the top of the point to the section whose width is equal to the glazing thickness, and if it has one or more points having a top angle smaller than 40°.
2.6.1.2.5.
Fragments of elongated shape are allowed in zone FII as a whole, provided they do not exceed 10 cm in length, except in the case provided for in point 2.6.2.2.
2.6.1.3.
Zone FIII
Fragmentation in this zone must have characteristics intermediate between those of the fragmentations respectively allowed for the two neighbouring zones (FI and FII).
2.6.2.
A windscreen submitted for component type-approval is considered satisfactory from the point of view of fragmentation if at least one of the following conditions is fulfilled:
2.6.2.1.
when all the tests carried out using the points of impact defined in point 2.5.1 have given a satisfactory result;
2.6.2.2.
when one test among all those carried out using the points of impact prescribed in point 2.5.1 has given an unsatisfactory result, taking account of deviations which do not exceed the following limits:
zone FI: not more than five fragments between 7,5 and 15 cm long;
zone FII: not more than three fragments of between 16 and 20 cm² in area located outside the circle having a radius of 10 cm centred on the point of impact;
zone FIII: not more than four fragments between 10 and 17,5 cm long,
and is repeated on a new sample, which either conforms to the requirements of section 2.6.1 or presents deviations within the above specified limits.
2.6.2.3.
when two tests among all the tests carried out using the points of impact prescribed in point 2.5.1 have given an unsatisfactory result for deviations not exceeding the limits specified in point 2.6.2.2 and a further series of tests carried out on a new set of samples conform to the requirements of section 2.6.1, or not more than two samples of the new set present deviations within the above specified limits of point 2.6.2.2.
2.6.3.
If the abovementioned deviations are found, they must be noted in the test report and photographs of the relevant parts of the windscreen attached to the report.
3.
HEADFORM TEST
3.1.
Indices of difficulty of the secondary characteristics
No secondary characteristic is involved.
3.2.
Number of samples
3.2.1.
For each group of toughened-glass windscreens, four samples having approximately the smallest developed area and four samples having approximately the largest developed area, all eight samples being of the same types as those selected for the fragmentation tests (see 2.2) are subjected to testing.
3.2.2.
Alternatively, at the discretion of the laboratory conducting the tests, for each category of windscreen thickness, six test pieces of the dimension (1 100×500 mm) + 5/-2 mm are subjected to testing.
3.3.
Test method
3.3.1.
The method used is that described in section 3 of Annex III C.
3.3.2.
The height of drop is 1,50 m + 0/-5 mm.
3.4.
Interpretation of results
3.4.1.
The test is deemed to have given a satisfactory result if the windscreen or the test piece is fractured.
3.4.2.
A set of samples submitted for component type-approval are considered satisfactory from the point of view of the headform test if either of the two following conditions is fulfilled:
3.4.2.1.
all the tests have given a satisfactory result;
3.4.2.2.
a test having given an unsatisfactory result, a further series of tests must be carried out on a new set of samples and give satisfactory results.
4.
OPTICAL QUALITIES
The requirements concerning optical qualities set out in section 9 of Annex III C apply to every type of windscreen.
EWG:L777UMBE14.95
FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 761 mm; 151 Zeilen; 9859 Zeichen;
Bediener: MARK Pr.: C;
Kunde: 43649 Montan England 14
ANNEX III E UNIFORMLY TOUGHENED-GLASS PANES OTHER THAN WINDSCREENS (¹) 1.
DEFINITION OF TYPE
Uniformly toughened glass panes, are deemed to belong to different types if they differ in at least one of the following principal or secondary characteristics.
1.1.
The principal characteristics are as follows:
1.1.1.
the trade name mark;
1.1.2.
the nature of the toughening process (thermal or chemical);
1.1.3.
the shape category; two categories are distinguished:
1.1.3.1.
flat glass panes,
1.1.3.2.
flat and curved glass panes.
1.1.4.
The thickness category in which the nominal thickness ´e' lies (a manufacturing tolerance of ± 0,2 mm being allowed):
- category III: 3,5 mm < e § 3.5
- category III: 3,5 mm < e § 4.5
- category III: 4,5 mm < e § 6.5
- category IV: 6,5 mm < e
1.2.
The secondary characteristics are as follows:
1.2.1.
nature of the material (polished (plate) glass, float glass, sheet glass),
1.2.2.
colouring (colourless or tinted),
1.2.3.
the incorporation or absence of conductors.
2.
FRAGMENTATION TEST
2.1.
Indices of difficulty of the secondary characteristics
Material
Index of difficulty
Plate glass
2
Float glass
1
Sheet glass
1
No other secondary characteristics are involved.
2.2
Selection of samples
2.2.1.
Samples of each shape category and of each thickness category difficult to produce are selected according to the following criteria for testing:
2.2.1.1.
in the case of flat glass panes, two sets of samples are provided, corresponding to:
2.2.1.1.1.
the largest developed area,
2.2.1.1.2.
the smallest angle between two adjacent sides.
2.2.1.2.
In the case of flat and curved glass panes, three sets of samples are provided, corresponding to:
2.2.1.2.1.
the largest developed area,
2.2.1.2.2.
the smallest angle between two adjacent sides,
2.2.1.2.3.
the largest height of segment.
2.2.2.
Tests carried out on samples corresponding to the largest area, S, are considered to be applicable to any other area smaller than S + 5 %.
2.2.3.
If the samples submitted present an angle, g, smaller than 30°, the tests are considered as applicable to all glass panes produced having an angle greater than g -5°.
If the samples submitted present an angle, g, greater than or equal to 30°, the tests are considered as applicable to all glass panes produced having an angle equal to or greater than 30°.
2.2.4.
If the height of segment, h, of the samples submitted is greater than 100 mm, the tests are considered as applicable to all glass panes produced having a height of segment smaller than h + 30 mm.
If the height of segment of the samples submitted is less than or equal to 100 mm, the tests are considered as applicable to all glass panes having a height of segment less than or equal to 100 mm.
2.3.
Number of samples per set
The number of samples in each group shall be as follows, according to the shape category defined in point 1.1.3 above:
Kind of glass pane
Number of samples
Flat (two sets)
4
Flat and curved (three sets)
5
2.4.
Test method
2.4.1.
The method used is that described in section 1 Annex III C.
2.5.
Points of impact (see Annex III N, Figure 3)
2.5.1.
For flat glass panes and curved glass panes the points of impact represented respectively in Annex
III N, Figures 3a and 3b on the one hand, and in Annex III N, Figure 3c on the other hand, are as follows:
point 1: 3 cm from the edges of the glass pane in the part where the radius of curvature of the edge is smallest;
point 2: 3 cm from the edge of one of the medians, the side (if any) of the glass pane bearing tong marks being selected;
point 3: in the geometric centre of the glass;
point 4: for curved glass panes only; this point is selected on the largest median in that part of the pane where the radius of curvature is smallest.
2.5.2.
Only one test is carried out at each prescribed point of impact.
2.6.
Interpretation of results
2.6.1.
A test is deemed to have given a satisfactory result if fragmentation satisfies the following conditions:
2.6.1.1.
the number of fragments in any 5×5 cm² square is not less than 40 or more than 400, or, in the case of glazing not more than 3,5 mm thick, 450.
2.6.1.2.
For the purpose of the above rule, a fragment extending across a side of a square counts as half a fragment.
2.6.1.3.
Fragmentation is not checked in a strip 2 cm wide round the edge of the samples, this strip representing the frame of the glass; nor within a radius of 7,5 cm from the point of impact.
2.6.1.4.
Fragments of an area exceeding 3 cm² are not allowed except in the parts defined in point 2.6.1.3.
2.6.1.5.
A few fragments of elongated shape are allowed, provided that:
- their ends are not knife-edged,
- if they extend to the edge of the glass pane they do not form an angle of more than 45° with it,
and if, except in the case provided for in point 2.6.2.2. below if their length does not exceed 7,5 cm.
2.6.2.
A set of samples submitted for component type-approval are considered satisfactory from the point of view of fragmentation if at least one of the following conditions is fulfilled:
2.6.2.1.
when all tests carried out using the points of impact prescribed in point 2.5.1 have given a satisfactory result;
2.6.2.2.
when one test among all those carried out using the points of impact prescribed in point 2.5.1. has given an unsatisfactory result, taking account of deviations which do not exceed the following limits:
- not more than five fragments between 6 and 7,5 cm long,
- not more than five fragments between 7,5 and 10 cm long,
and is repeated on a new sample which either conforms to the requirements of section 2.6.1 or presents deviations within the above specified limits.
2.6.2.3.
When two tests among all the tests carried out using the points of impact prescribed in point 2.5.1 have given an unsatisfactory result, taking account of deviations not exceeding the limits specified in point 2.6.2.2, and a further series of tests carried out on a new set of samples conform to the prescriptions of section 2.6.1. or not more than two samples of the new set present deviations within the above specified limits of point 2.6.2.2.
2.6.3.
If the abovementioned deviations are found, they must be noted in the test report and photographs of the relevant parts of the glass pane attached to the report.
3.
MECHANICAL STRENGTH TEST
3.1.
227-g-ball test
3.1.1.
Indices of difficulty of the secondary characteristics.
Material
Index of
difficulty
Colouring
Index of
difficulty
Polished glass
2
colourless
1
Float glass
1
tinted
2
Sheet glass
1
The other secondary characteristic (namely, incorporation or absence of conductors) is not involved.
3.1.2.
Number of test pieces
Six test pieces are subjected to testing for each thickness category defined in point 1.1.4 above.
3.1.3.
Test method
3.1.3.1.
The test method used is that described in section 2.1 of Annex III C.
3.1.3.2.
The height of drop (from the underface of the ball to the upper surface of the test piece) is indicated in the following table, according to thickness of the glass pane:
Nominal thickness of glass pane (e)
Height of drop
e § 3,5 mm
2,0 m + 5/-0 mm
3,5 mm < e
2,5 m + 5/-0 mm
3.1.4.
Interpretation of results
3.1.4.1.
The test is deemed to have given a satisfactory result if the test piece does not break.
3.1.4.2.
A set of test pieces submitted for component type-approval are considered satisfactory from the point of view of mechanical strength if at least one of the following conditions is fulfilled:
3.1.4.2.1.
when not more than one test has given an unsatisfactory result,
3.1.4.2.2.
when two tests having given unsatisfactory results, a further series of tests carried out on a new set of six test pieces give satisfactory results.
4.
OPTICAL QUALITIES
4.1.
The requirements concerning regular light transmittance set out in section 9.1 of Annex III C apply to uniformly toughened glass panes or parts of glass panes located at places which are essential to the driver's vision.
EWG:L777UMBE15.95
FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 760 mm; 166 Zeilen; 8068 Zeichen;
Bediener: JUTT Pr.: C;
Kunde: L 777 England 15
(1) This type of uniformly toughened-glass pane can also be used for windscreens for tractors. ANNEX III F ORDINARY LAMINATED-GLASS WINDSCREENS 1.
DEFINITION OF TYPE
Ordinary laminated-glass windscreens are deemed to belong to different types if they differ in at least one of the following principal or secondary characteristics.
1.1.
The principal characteristics are as follows:
1.1.1.
the trade name or mark;
1.1.2.
the shape and dimensions.
Ordinary laminated-glass windscreens are deemed to belong to one group for the purposes of tests of mechanical properties and of resistance to the environment;
1.1.3.
the number of layers of glass;
1.1.4.
the nominal thickness ´e' of the windscreen, a manufacturing tolerance of 0,2 n mm (n being the number of layers of glass in the windscreen) above or below the nominal value being allowed;
1.1.5.
the nominal thickness of the interlayer or interlayers;
1.1.6.
the nature and type of the interlayer or interlayers (e.g. PVB or other plastic-material interlayer or interlayers).
1.2
The secondary characteristics are as follows:
1.2.1.
the nature of the material (polished (plate) glass, float glass, sheet glass),
1.2.2.
the colouring (total or partial) of the interlayer or interlayers (colourless or tinted),
1.2.3.
the colouring of the glass (colourless or tinted),
1.2.4.
the incorporation or absence of conductors,
1.2.5.
the incorporation or absence of obscuration bands.
2.
GENERAL
2.1.
In the case of ordinary laminated-glass windscreens, tests other than headform tests (section 3.2) and tests of optical qualities are conducted on flat test pieces which are either cut from actual windscreens or are specially made for the purpose. In either case the test pieces must in all respects be rigorously representative of the production windscreens for which component type-approval is sought.
2.2.
Before each test, the test pieces must be stored for not less than four hours at a temperature of 23 ± 2 °C. The tests must take place as soon as possible after the test pieces have been taken out of the receptacle in which they were stored.
3.
HEADFORM TEST
3.1.
Indices of difficulty of the secondary characteristics
No secondary characteristic is involved.
3.2.
Headform test on a complete windscreen
3.2.1.
Number of samples
Four samples from the smallest-developed-area series and four samples from the largest-developed-area series, selected in accordance with the provisions of Annex III M are tested.
3.2.2.
Test method
3.2.2.1.
The method used is that described in point 3.3.2 of Annexe III C.
3.2.2.2.
The drop height is 1,5 m+0/-5 mm.
3.2.3.
Interpretation of results
3.2.3.1.
This test is deemed to have given a satisfactory result if the following conditions are fulfilled:
3.2.3.1.1.
the sample breaks displaying numerous circular cracks centred approximately on the point of impact, the cracks nearest to the point of impact being not more than 80 mm from it;
3.2.3.1.2.
the layers of glass must remain adhering to the plastic-material interlayer. One or more partial separations from the interlayer with a distance of less than 4 mm in breadth, on either side of the crack, are permitted outside a circle of 60 mm in diameter centred on the point of impact.
3.2.3.1.3.
On the impact side:
3.2.3.1.3.1.
the interlayer must not be laid bare over an area of more than 20 cm²,
3.2.3.1.3.2.
a tear in the interlayer up to a length of 35 mm is allowed.
3.2.3.2.
A set of samples submitted for approval are considered satisfactory from the point of view of the headform test if one of the following two conditions is met:
3.2.3.2.1.
all the tests give satisfactory results, or
3.2.3.2.2.
one test having given an unsatisfactory result, a further series of tests carried out on a new set of samples give satisfactory results.
3.3.
Head form test on flat test pieces
3.3.1.
Number of test pieces
Six flat test pieces measuring (1 100 mm × 500 mm) +5/-2 mm are subjected to testing.
3.3.2.
Test method
3.3.2.1.
The method used is that described in point 3.3.1 of Annex III C.
3.3.2.2.
The height of drop is 4 m + 25/-0 mm.
3.3.3.
Interpretation of results
3.3.3.1.
This test is deemed to have given a satisfactory result if the following conditions are fulfilled:
3.3.3.1.1.
the test piece yields and breaks, displaying numerous circular cracks centred approximately on the point of impact;
3.3.3.1.2.
tears in the interlayer are allowed provided that the manikin's head does not pass through the test piece;
3.3.3.1.3.
no large fragments of glass become detached from the interlayer.
3.3.3.2.
a set of test pieces submitted for approval are considered satisfactory from the point of view of the headform test if one of the following two conditions is met:
3.3.3.2.1.
all the tests give satisfactory results, or
3.3.3.2.2.
a test having given an unsatisfactory result, a further series of tests must be carried out on a new set of test pieces and give satisfactory results.
4.
MECHANICAL STRENGTH TEST
4.1.
Indices of difficulty of the secondary characteristics
No secondary characteristic is involved.
4.2.
2 260-g-ball test
4.2.1.
Number of test pieces
Six square test pieces of 300 mm + 10/-0 mm side are subjected to testing.
4.2.2.
Test method
4.2.2.1.
The method used is that described in section 2.2 of Annex III C.
4.2.2.2.
The height of drop (from the underface of the ball to the upper face of the test piece) is
4 m + 25/-0 mm.
EWG:L777UMBE16.96
FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 511 mm; 88 Zeilen; 5342 Zeichen;
Bediener: MARK Pr.: C;
Kunde: L 777 Umbe 16
10. 3. 89
Official Journal of the European Communities
4.2.3.
Interpretation of results
4.2.3.1.
The test is deemed to have given a satisfactory result if the ball does not pass through the glazing within five seconds from the moment of impact.
4.2.3.2.
A set of test pieces submitted for component type-approval is considered satisfactory from the point of view of the 2 260-g-ball test if one of the following two conditions is met:
4.2.3.2.1.
all the tests give satisfactory results, or
4.2.3.2.2.
one test having given an unsatisfactory result, a further series of tests must be carried out on a new set of test pieces and give satisfactory results.
4.3.
227-g-ball test
4.3.1.
Indices of difficulty of the secondary characteristics
No secondary characteristic is involved.
4.3.2.
Number of test pieces
20 square test pieces of 300 mm + 10/-0 mm side are subjected to testing.
4.3.3.
Test method
4.3.3.1.
The method used is that described in section 2.1 of Annex III C. 10 specimens are tested at a temperature of +40 ± 2 °C and 10 at a temperature of -20 ± 2 °C.
4.3.3.2.
The height of drop for the various thickness categories and the mass of the detached fragments are given in the table below:
+ 40 °C
-20 °C
Thickness of
test piece
Height
of fall
Maximum
permitted
mass of the
fragments
Height
of fall
Maximum
permitted
mass of the
fragments
mm
m (*)
g
m (*)
g
4,5 < e 9 4,5
4,5 < e 9 5,5
5,5 < e 9 6,5
4,5 < e > 6,5
9
10
11
12
12
15
20
25
8,5
9
9,5
10
12
15
20
25
(*) A tolerance of + 25/-0 mm is allowed in height of fall.
4.3.4.
Interpretation of results
4.3.4.1.
the test is considered to have given a satisfactory result if the following conditions are met:
- the ball does not pass through the test piece,
- the test piece does not break into several pieces,
- if the interlayer ist not torn, the weight of fragments detached from the side of the glass opposite to the point of impact must not exceed the appropriate values specified in point 4.3.3.2.
4.3.4.2.
A set of test pieces submitted for component type-approval are considered satisfactory from the point of view of the 227-g-ball test if one of the following conditions is met:
4.3.4.2.1.
not less than eight tests at each test temperature give a satisfactory result, or
4.3.4.2.2.
more than two tests at each test temperature having given an unsatisfactory result, a further series of tests must be carried out on a new set of test pieces and give satisfactory results.
5.
TEST OF RESISTANCE TO THE ENVIRONMENT
5.1.
Test of resistance to abrasion
5.1.1.
Indices of difficulty and test method
The requirements of section 4 of Annex III C apply, the test being continued for 1 000 cycles.
5.1.2.
Interpretation of results
The safety-glass pane is considered satisfactory with respect to abrasion resistance if the light scatter as a result of abrasion of the test piece does not exceed 2 %.
5.2.
Test of resistance to high temperature
The requirements of section 5 of Annex III C apply.
5.3.
Resistance-to-radiation test
5.3.1.
General requirement
This test is performed only if the laboratory deems it useful in the light of the information in its possession concerning the interlayer.
5.3.2.
The requirement of section 6 of Annex III C apply.
5.4.
Resistance-to-humidity test
The requirement of section 7 of Annex III C apply.
6.
OPTICAL QUALITIES
The requirement concerning optical qualities set out in section 9 of Annex III C apply to every type of windscreen.
EWG:L777UME16A.96
FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 511 mm; 94 Zeilen; 3445 Zeichen;
Bediener: MARK Pr.: C;
Kunde: 43649 L ...
ANNEX III G LAMINATED-GLASS PANES OTHER THAN WINDSCREENS (¹) 1.
DEFINITION OF TYPE
Laminated-glass panes other than windscreens are deemed to belong to different types if they differ in at least one of the following principal or secondary characteristics.
1.1.
The principal characteristics are as follows:
1.1.1.
the trade name or mark;
1.1.2.
the thickness category of the pane in which the nominal thickness ´e' lies, a manufacturing tolerance of ± 0,2 n mm, (n being the number of layers of glass in the pane) being allowed:
- category III: 6,5 mm < e § 5,5 mm,
- category III: 5,5 mm < e § 6,5 mm,
- category III: 6,5 mm < e
1.1.3.
the nominal thickness of the interlayer or interlayers;
1.1.4.
the nature and type of the interlayer or interlayers, e.g. PVB or other plastic-material interlayer or interlayers;
1.1.5.
any special treatment which one of the layers of glass may have undergone.
1.2.
The secondary characteristics are as follows:
1.2.1.
the nature of the material (polished (plate) glass, float glass, sheet glass),
1.2.2.
the colouring (total or partial) of the interlayer or interlayers (colourless or tinted),
1.2.3.
the colouring of the glass (colourless or tinted).
2.
GENERAL
2.1.
In the case of laminated-glass panes other than windscreens, the tests are conducted on flat test pieces which are either cut from actual glass panes or are specially made. In either case the test pieces must in all respects be rigorously representative of the glass panes for the production of which component type-approval is sought.
2.2.
Before each test, the test pieces of laminated glass must be stored for not less than 4 hours at a temperature of 23 ± 2 °C. The tests are performed on the test pieces as soon as the pieces have been taken out of the receptacle in which they were stored.
2.3.
The provisions of this Annex are considered to be met if the glazing submitted for component type-approval is of the same composition as a windscreen already approved under the provisions of Annex III F, III H or III I.
3.
HEADFORM TEST
3.1.
Indices of difficulty of the secondary characteristics
No secondary characteristic is involved.
3.2.
Number of test pieces
Six flat test pieces measuring 1 100 ×500 mm (+ 25/-0 mm) are subjected to testing.
3.3.
Test method
3.3.1.
The method used is that described in section 3 of Annex III C.
3.3.2.
The height of drop is 1,50 m + 0/-5 mm. This is increased to 4 m + 25/-0 mm for glass panes used as tractor windscreens.
3.4.
Interpretation of results
3.4.1.
This test is deemed to have given a satisfactory result if the following conditions are met:
3.4.1.1.
the test piece yields and breaks, displaying numerous circular cracks centred approximately on the point of impact;
(¹) This type of laminated-glass pane can also be used for windscreens for tractors.
3.4.1.2.
tears in the interlayer are allowed, but the manikin's head must not pass through;
3.4.1.3.
no large fragments of glass become detached from the interlayer.
3.4.2.
A set of test pieces subjected to component type-approval testing are considered satisfactory from the point of view of the headform test if one of the following two conditions is met:
3.4.2.1.
all the tests give satisfactory results, or
3.4.2.2.
a test having given an unsatisfactory result, a further series of tests must be carried out on a new set of test pieces and give satisfactory results.
4.
MECHANICAL STRENGTH TEST - 227-g-BALL TEST
4.1.
Indices of difficulty of the secondary characteristics
No secondary characteristic is involved.
4.2.
Number of test pieces
Four flat square test pieces of side 300 mm (+ 10/-0 mm) must be subjected to tests.
4.3.
Test method
4.3.1.
The method used is that described in section 2.1 of Annex III C.
4.3.2.
The height of drop (from the underface of the ball to the upper face of the test piece) is as indicated in the following table as a function of nominal thickness:
Nominal thickness
Height of drop
5,5 mm 9 e 9 5,5 mm
5,5 mm 9 e 9 6,5 mm
6,5 mm 9 e
5 m
6 m
7 m
aa
A
a
A
s
+ 25 mm/-0 mm
4.4.
Interpretation of results
4.4.1.
The test is considered to have given a satisfactory result if the following conditions are met:
- the ball does not pass through the test piece,
- the test piece does not break into several fragments,
- the total weight of the few fragments which may be produced on the side opposite to the point of impact does not exceed 15 g.
4.4.2.
A set of test pieces subjected to component type-approval testing are considered satisfactory from the point of view of mechanical strength if one of the following conditions is met:
4.4.2.1.
all the tests have given a satisfactory result, or
4.4.2.2.
not more than two tests having given an unsatisfactory result, a further series of tests must be carried out on a new set of test pieces and give satisfactory results.
5.
TEST OF RESISTANCE TO THE ENVIRONMENT
5.1.
Test of resistance to abrasion
5.1.1.
Indices of difficulty and test method
The requirements of section 4 of Annex III C apply, the test being continued for 1 000 cycles.
5.1.2.
Interpretation of results
The safety-glass pane is considered satisfactory form the point of view of abrasion resistance if the light scatter as a result of abrasion of the test piece does not exceed 2 %.
5.2.
Test of resistance to high temperature
The requirements of section 5 of Annex III C apply.
5.3.
Resistance-to-radiation test
5.3.1.
General requirement
This test is performed only if the laboratory deems it useful in the light of the information in its possession concerning the interlayer.
5.3.2.
The requirements of section 6 of Annex III C apply.
5.4.
Resistance-to-humidity test
5.4.1.
The requirements of section 7 of Annex III C apply.
6.
OPTICAL QUALITIES
6.1.
Light transmittance
The provisions concerning the regular light transmittance set out in section 9.1 of Annex III C apply to glass panes other than windscreens, or parts of glass panes located at places which are essential to the driver's vision.
EWG:L777UMBE17.96
FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 761 mm; 111 Zeilen; 6053 Zeichen;
Bediener: MARK Pr.: C;
Kunde: 43649 L 777
ANNEX III H TREATED LAMINATED-GLASS WINDSCREENS 1.
DEFINITION OF TYPE
Treated laminated-glass windscreens are deemed to belong to different types if they differ in at least one of the following principal or secondary characteristics.
1.1.
The principal characteristics are as follows:
1.1.1.
the trade name or mark;
1.1.2.
the shape and dimensions.
Treated laminated-glass windscreens are deemed to belong to one group for the purposes of the fragmentation, mechanical properties and resistance to the environment tests;
1.1.3.
the number of layers of glass;
1.1.4.
the nominal thickness ´e' of the windscreen, a manufacturing tolerance of 0,2 n mm, (n being the number of layers of glass in the windscrean) above and below the nominal value being allowed;
1.1.5.
any special treatment which one or more layers of glass may have undergone;
1.1.6.
the nominal thickness of the interlayer or interlayers;
1.1.7.
the nature and type of the interlayer or interlayers (e.g. PVB or other plastic-material interlayer or interlayers).
1.2.
The secondary characteristics are as follows:
1.2.1.
the nature of the material (polished (plate) glass, float glass, sheet glass),
1.2.2.
the colouring (total or partial) of the interlayer or interlayers (colourless or tinted),
1.2.3.
the colouring of the glass (colourless or tinted),
1.2.4.
the incorporation or absence of conductors,
1.2.5.
the incorporation or absence of obscuration bands.
2.
GENERAL
2.1.
In the case of treated laminated-glass windscreens, tests other than the headform test on a complete windscreen and tests of optical qualities are conducted on samples and/or flat test pieces which are specially made for the purpose. However, the test pieces must in all respects be rigorously representative of the production windscreens for which component type-approval is sought.
2.2.
Before each test, the test pieces or samples must be stored for not less than 4 hours at a temperature of 23 ± 2 °C. The tests must take place as soon as possible after the test pieces or samples have been taken out of the receptacle in which they were stored.
3.
TESTS PRESCRIBED
Treated laminated-glass windscreans are to be subjected to:
3.1.
the tests prescribed in Annex III F for ordinary laminated-glass windscreens,
3.2.
the fragmentation test described in section 4 below.
4.
FRAGMENTATION TEST
4.1.
Indices of difficulty of the secondary characteristics
Material
Index of difficulty
Plate glass
2
Float glass
1
Sheet glass
1
10. 3. 89
Official Journal of the European Communities
4.2.
Number of test pieces or samples
One test piece measuring 1 100 ×500 mm (+ 5/-2 mm) or one sample for each point of impact is subjected to testing.
4.3.
Test method
The method used is that described in section 1 of Annex III C.
4.4.
Impact point or points
The glass pane is struck on each of the outer treated sheets in the centre of the test piece or sample.
4.5.
Interpretation of results
4.5.1.
For each point of impact the fragmentation test is considered to have given a satisfactory result if the total surface of fragments having a surface area of more than 2 cm² comprised in a rectangle as defined in point 2.3.2 of Annex III D represents not less than 15 % of the surface of that rectangle.
4.5.1.1.
In the case of a sample:
4.5.1.1.1.
the centre of the rectangle is situated within a circle having a radius of 10 cm centred on the projection of the reference point as defined in point 1.2 of the Annex ´field of vision' to Directive 74/347/EEC on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to the field of vision and windscreen wipers for wheeled agricultural or forestry tractors.
4.5.1.1.2.
In the case of tractors for which it is not possible to determine the reference point, the position of the visibility zone must be indicated in the test report.
4.5.1.1.3.
The height of the rectangle may be reduced to 15 cm for windscreens which are less than 44 cm high or whose angle of installation is less than 15° from the vertical; the percentage of visibility must be equal to 10 % at least of the area of the corresponding rectangle.
4.5.1.2.
In the case of a test piece, the centre of the rectangle must be situated on the greater axis of the test piece at 450 mm from one of its edges.
4.5.2.
The test piece(s) or sample(s) submitted for component type-approval are considered satisfactory from the point of view of fragmentation if either of the following conditions is met:
4.5.2.1.
the test gives a satisfactory result for each point of impact, or
4.5.2.2.
the test having been repeated on a new set of four test pieces for each point of impact for which it had originally given an unsatisfactory result, the four new tests performed at the same impact points must all give a satisfactory result.
EWG:L777UMBE18.96
FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 507 mm; 80 Zeilen; 4776 Zeichen;
Bediener: MARK Pr.: C;
Kunde: L 777 England 18
ANNEX III I SAFETY-GLASS PANES FACED WITH PLASTIC MATERIAL ON THE INSIDE 1.
DEFINITION OF TYPE
Safety glazing materials, as defined in Annexes III D to III H, if coated on the inner face with a layer of plastic material, must conform not only to the requirements of the appropriate Annexes but also to the following requirements.
2.
TEST OF RESISTANCE TO ABRASION
2.1.
Indices of difficulty and test method
The plastic coating is to be subjected to a test for 100 cycles in accordance with the requirements specified in section 4 of Annex III C.
2.2.
Interpretation of results
The plastic coating is considered satisfactory with respect to abrasion resistance if the light scatter as a result of abrasion of the test piece does not exceed 4 %.
3.
RESISTANCE-TO-HUMIDITY TEST
3.1.
In the case of plastic-coated toughened safety glazing material a restistance-to-humidity test is to be performed.
3.2.
The requirements of section 7 of Annex III C apply.
4.
TEST OF RESISTANCE TO TEMPERATURE CHANGES
The requirements of section 8 of Annex III C apply.
5.
FIRE-RESISTANCE TEST
The requirements of section 10 of Annex III C apply.
6.
TEST OF RESISTANCE TO CHEMICALS
The requirements of section 11 of Annex III C apply.
EWG:L777UMBE19.95
FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 253 mm; 24 Zeilen; 1281 Zeichen;
Bediener: MARK Pr.: C;
Kunde: ................................
ANNEX III J GLASS-PLASTIC WINDSCREENS 1.
DEFINITION OF TYPE
Glass-plastic windscreens are considered to belong to different types if they differ in at least one of the following principal or secondary characteristics.
1.1.
The principal characteristics are as follows:
1.1.1.
the trade name or mark;
1.1.2.
the shape and dimensions.
Glass-plastic windscreens are deemed to belong to a group for the purposes of tests of mechanical strength, resistance to the environment, resistance to temperature changes and resistance to chemical agents;
1.1.3.
the number of plastic layers;
1.1.4.
the nominal thickness ´e' of the windscreen, a manufacturing tolerance of p 0,2 mm being allowed;
1.1.5.
the nominal thickness of the layer of glass;
1.1.6.
the nominal thickness of the layer(s) of plastic acting as interlayer(s);
1.1.7.
the nature and type of the layer(s) of plastic acting as interlayer(s) (e. g. PVB or other material) and of the plastic layer situated on the inner face;
1.1.8.
any special treatment the glass pane may have undergone.
1.2.
The secondary characteristics are as follows:
1.2.1.
the nature of the material (plate glass, float glass, sheet glass),
1.2.2.
the colouring (total or partial) of any layer(s) of plastic (colourless or tinted),
1.2.3.
the colouring of the glass (colourless or tinted),
1.2.4.
the incorporation or absence of conductors,
1.2.5.
the incorporation or absence of obscuration bands.
2.
GENERAL
2.1.
In the case of glass-plastic windscreens, tests other than headform tests (3.2) and tests of optical qualities are conducted on flat test pieces which are either cut from actual windscreens or are specially made for the purpose. In either case the test pieces must in all respects be rigorously representative of the production windscreens for which component type-approval is sought.
2.2.
Before each test, the test pieces must be stored for not less than 4 hours at a temperature of 23 p 2 gC. The tests must take place as soon as possible after the test pieces have been taken out of the receptacle in which they were stored.
3.
HEADFORM TEST
3.1.
Indices of difficulty of the secondary characteristics
No secondary characteristic is involved.
3.2.
Headform test on a complete windscreen
3.2.1.
Number of samples
Four samples from the series having the smallest developed area and four samples from the series having the largest developed area, selected in accordance with the provisions of Annex III M, are tested.
3.2.2.
Test method
3.2.2.1.
The method used is that described in point 3.3.2 of Annex III C.
3.2.2.2.
The height of drop is 1,50 m +0/-5 mm.
3.2.3.
Interpretation of results
3.2.3.1.
This test is considered to have given a satisfactory result if the following conditions are met:
3.2.3.1.1.
the layer of glass breaks, displaying numerous circular cracks centred approximately on the point of impact, the cracks nearest to the point of impact being not more than 80 mm from it;
3.2.3.1.2.
the layer of glass remains adhering to the plastic material interlayer. One or more partial separations from the interlayer not more than 4 mm in breadth may be allowed on either side of the crack outside a circle 60 mm in diameter centred on the point of impact;
3.2.3.1.3.
a tear in the interlayer of a length up to 35 mm is allowed on the impact side.
3.2.3.2.
A set of test pieces submitted for component type-approval are considered satisfactory with respect to the headform test if one of the following two conditions is met:
3.2.3.2.1.
all the tests give satisfactory results, or
3.2.3.2.2.
a test having given an unsatisfactory result, a further series of tests must be carried out on a new set of test pieces and give satisfactory results.
3.3.
Headform test on flat test pieces
3.3.1.
Number of test pieces
Six flat test pieces measuring 1 100×500 mm (+5/-2 mm) are subjected to testing.
3.3.2.
Test method
3.3.2.1.
The method used is that described in point 3.3.1 of Annex III C.
3.3.2.2.
The height of drop is 4 m +25/-0 mm.
3.3.3.
Interpretation of results
3.3.3.1.
This test is considered to have given a satisfactory result if the following conditions are met:
3.3.3.1.1.
the layer of glass yields and breaks, displaying numerous circular cracks centred approximately on the point of impact;
3.3.3.1.2.
tears in the interlayer are allowed, but the manikin's head must not pass through;
3.3.3.1.3.
no large fragment of glass becomes detached from the interlayer.
3.3.3.2.
A set of test pieces submitted for component type-approval are considered satisfactory with respect to the headform test if one of the following conditions is met:
3.3.3.2.1.
all the tests give satisfactory results, or
3.3.3.2.2.
a test having given an unsatisfactory result, a further series of tests must be carried out on a new set of test pieces and give satisfactory results.
4.
MECHANICAL STRENGTH TEST
4.1.
Indices of difficulty, test method and interpretation of results
The requirements of section 4 of Annex III F apply.
4.2.
However the third requirement set out in point 4.3.4.1 of Annex III F is not relevant.
5.
TEST OF RESISTANCE TO THE ENVIRONMENT
5.1.
Test of resistance to abrasion
5.1.1.
Test of resistance to abrasion on the outer face
5.1.1.1.
The requirements of section 5.1 of Annex III F apply.
5.1.2.
Test of resistance to abrasion on the inner face
5.1.2.1.
The requirements of section 2 of Annex III I apply.
5.2.
Test of resistance to high temperature
The requirements of section 5 of Annex III C apply.
5.3.
Resistance-to-radiation test
The requirements of section 6 of Annex III C apply.
5.4.
Resistance-to-humidity test
The requirements of section 7 of Annex III C apply.
5.5.
Test of resistance to temperature changes
The requirements of section 8 of Annex III C apply.
6.
OPTICAL QUALITIES
The requirements concerning optical qualities set out in section 9 of Annex III C apply to each type of windscreen.
7.
FIRE-RESISTANCE TEST
The requirements of section 10 of Annex III C apply.
8.
TEST OF RESISTANCE TO CHEMICALS
The requirements of section 11 of Annex III C apply.
EWG:L777UMBE20.95
FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 761 mm; 102 Zeilen; 6118 Zeichen;
Bediener: MARK Pr.: C;
Kunde: ................................
ANNEX III K GLASS-PLASTIC PANES OTHER THAN WINDSCREENS (¹) 1.
DEFINITION OF TYPE
Glass-plastic panes other than windscreens are considered to belong to different types if they differ in at least one of the following principal or secondary characteristics.
1.1.
The principal characteristics are as follows:
1.1.1.
the trade name or mark;
1.1.2.
the thickness category applicable to the nominal thickness ´e', a manufacturing tolerance of ± 0,2 mm being allowed:
- category III: 3,5 mm < e § 3,5 mm
- category III: 3,5 mm < e § 4,5 mm
- category III: 4,5 mm < e
1.1.3.
the nominal thickness of the layer(s) of plastic material acting as interlayer(s);
1.1.4.
the nominal thickness of the glass pane;
1.1.5.
the type of the layer(s) of plastic material acting as interlayer(s) (e.g. PVB or other material) and of the plastic layer on the inner face;
1.1.6.
any special treatment which the layer of glass may have undergone.
1.2.
The secondary characteristics are as follows:
1.2.1.
the nature of the material (plate glass, float glass, sheet glass),
1.2.2.
the colouring (total or partial) of any layer(s) of plastic (colourless or tinted),
1.2.3.
the colouring of the glass (colourless or tinted).
2.
GENERAL
2.1.
In the case of glass-plastic panes other than windscreens the tests are conducted on flat test pieces which are either cut from normal glass panes or are specially made. In either case the test pieces must in all respects be rigorously representative of the production glass panes for which component type-approval is sought.
2.2.
Before each test, the test pieces of glass-plastic panes must be stored for not less than 4 hours at a temperature of 23 ± 2 °C. The tests must take place as soon as possible after the test pieces have been taken out of the receptacle in which they were stored.
2.3.
The provisions of this Annex are considered to be met if the glass pane submitted for component type-approval has the same composition as that of a windscreen already approved under the provisions of Annex III J.
3.
HEADFORM TEST
3.1.
Indices of difficulty of the secondary characteristics
No secondary characterisitic is involved.
3.2.
Number of test pieces
Six flat test pieces measuring 1 100×500 mm (+ 5/-2 mm) are subjected to testing.
3.3.
Test method
3.3.1.
The method used is that described in section 3 of Annex III C.
3.3.2.
The height of drop is 1,50 m + 0/-5 mm. (This height is increased to 4 m + 25/-0 mm for glass panes used as tractor windscreens.)
3.4.
Interpretation of results
3.4.1.
This test is considered to have given a satisfactory result if the following conditions are met:
(¹) This type of glass-plastic pane can also be used for windscreens for tractors.
3.4.1.1.
the layer of glass breaks, displaying numerous cracks;
3.4.1.2.
tears in the interlayer are allowed, provided that the manikin's head does not pass through the test piece;
3.4.1.3.
no large fragment of glass becomes detached from the interlayer.
3.4.2.
A set of test pieces submitted for component type-approval are considered satisfactory with respect to the headform test if one of the following conditions is met:
3.4.2.1.
all the tests give satisfactory results, or
3.4.2.2.
a test having given an unsatisfactory result, a further series of tests must be carried out on a new set of test pieces and give satisfactory results.
4.
MECHANICAL STRENGTH TEST - 227-g-BALL TEST
4.1.
The provisions of section 4 of Annex III G apply, with the exception of the table in point 4.3.2, which is replaced by:
Nominal thickness
Height of drop
5,5 mm 9 e 9 3,5 mm
3,5 mm < e 9 4,5 mm
5,5 mm 9 e > 4,5 mm
5 m
6 m
7 m
aa
A
a
A
s
+ 25/-0 mm
4.2.
However the requirement in the third indent of point 4.4.1 of Annex III G is not relevant.
5.
TEST OF RESISTANCE TO THE ENVIRONMENT
5.1.
Test of resistance to abrasion
5.1.1.
Test of resistance to abrasion on the outer face
The requirements of section 5.1 of Annex III G apply.
5.1.2.
Test of resistance to abrasion on the inner face
The requirements of section 2.1 of Annex III I apply.
5.2.
Test of resistance to high temperature
The requirements of section5 of Annex III C apply.
5.3.
Resistance-to-radiation test
The requirements of section 6 of Annex III C apply.
5.4.
Resistance-to-humidity test
The requirements of section 7 of Annex III C apply.
5.5.
Test of resistance to temperature changes
The requirements of section 8 of Annex III C apply.
6.
OPTICAL QUALITIES
The requirements concerning the regular light transmittance set out in section 9.1 of Annex III C apply to glass panes or parts of glass panes located at places which are essential to the driver's vision.
7.
FIRE-RESISTANCE TEST
The requirements of section 10 of Annex III C apply.
8.
TEST RESISTANCE TO CHEMICALS
The requirements of section 11 of Annex III C apply.
EWG:L777UMBE21.96
FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 507 mm; 95 Zeilen; 4820 Zeichen;
Bediener: MARK Pr.: C;
Kunde: 43649 engl. 21
ANNEX III L DOUBLE-GLAZED UNITS 1.
DEFINITION OF TYPE
Double-glazed units are considered to belong to different types if they differ in at least one of the following principal or secondary characteristics.
1.1.
The principal characteristics are as follows:
1.1.1.
the trade name or mark;
1.1.2.
the composition of the double-glazed unit (symmetrical, asymmetrical);
1.1.3.
the type of each component glass pane as defined in section 1 of Annex III E, III G or III K;
1.1.4.
the nominal width of the gap between the two glass panes;
1.1.5.
the type of sealing (organic, or glass to glass/glass to metal).
1.2.
The secondary characteristics are:
1.2.1.
The secondary characteristics of each component glass pane, as defined in section 1.2 of Annex III E,
III G or III K.
2.
GENERAL
2.1.
Each component glass pane forming the double-glazed unit must either be type-approved or subjected to the requirements set out in the relevant Annex (III E, III G or III K).
2.2.
Tests carried out on double-glazed units having a nominal width of gap ´e' are considered to
be applicable to all double-glazed units having the same characteristics and a nominal width of gap ´e'
p 3 mm. However, the applicant for component type-approval may submit for the tests the sample having the smallest gap and the sample having the largest gap.
2.3.
In the case of double-glazed units having at least one laminated-glass pane or one glass-plastic pane, the test pieces are stored for at least 4 hours prior to the test at a temperature of 23 p 2 gC. The tests must take place immediately after the test pieces are taken out of the receptacle in which they were stored.
3.
HEADFORM TEST
3.1.
Index of difficulty of the secondary characteristics
No secondary characteristic is involved.
3.2.
Number of test pieces
Six test pieces measuring 1 100 mm×500 mm (+5/-22 mm) subjected to testing for each thickness category of the component panes and each gap thickness as defined in point 1.1.4 above.
3.3.
Test method
3.3.1.
The method used is that described in section 3 of Annex III C.
3.3.2.
The height of drop is 1,5 m (+0/-5 mm).
3.3.3.
In the case of asymetrical double-glazing three tests on each side shall be carried out.
3.4.
Interpretation of results
3.4.1.
Double glazing comprising two panes of uniformly toughened glass.
The test is considered to have given a satisfactory result if both components break.
3.4.2.
Double glazing comprising two panes of laminated glass other than windscreens.
The test is considered to have given a satisfactory result if the following conditions are fulfilled:
3.4.2.1.
both components of the test piece yield and break, displaying numerous circular cracks centred approximately on the point of impact;
3.4.2.2.
tears in the interlayers are allowed but the manikin's head must not pass through;
3.4.2.3.
no large fragments of glass become detached from the interlayer.
3.4.3.
Double glazing consisting of a uniformly toughened glass pane and of a laminated-glass pane or glass-plastic pane other than windscreens.
This test is considered to have given a satisfactory result if the following conditions are met:
3.4.3.1.
the toughened-glass pane breaks;
3.4.3.2.
the laminated-glass pane or glass-plastic pane yields and breaks, displaying numerous circular cracks centred approximately on the point of impact;
3.4.3.3.
tears in the interlayer(s) are allowed provided that the manikin's head does not pass through the test piece;
3.4.3.4.
no large fragment of glass becomes detached from the interlayer.
3.4.4.
A set of test pieces submitted for component type-approval are considered satisfactory with respect to behaviour under head impact if one of the following two conditions is met:
3.4.4.1.
all the tests give satisfactory results.
3.4.4.2.
a test having given an unsatisfactory result, a further series of tests must be carried out on a new set of test pieces and give satisfactory results.
4.
OPTICAL QUALITIES
The requirement concerning the regular light transmittance set out in section 9.1 of Annex III C apply to double-glazed units or parts of double-glazed units located at places which are essential to the driver's vision.
EWG:L777UMBE22.95
FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 507 mm; 64 Zeilen; 4229 Zeichen;
Bediener: JUTT Pr.: C;
Kunde: L 777 EN 22 - 43649
ANNEX III M GROUPING OF WINDSCREENS FOR COMPONENT TYPE-APPROVAL TESTING 1.
The features taken into account are:
1.1.
the developed area of the windscreen;
1.2.
the height of segment;
1.3.
the curvature.
2.
A group is made up of a thickness class.
3.
Classification is performed in ascending order of developed area. The five largest and the five smallest developed areas are selected, and numbered as follows:
1 for the next smallest after 4
1 for the largest
1 for the smallest
2 for the next smallest after 1
2 for the next largest after 1
3 for the next smallest after 2
3 for the next largest after 2
4 for the next smallest after 3
4 for the next largest after 3
5 for the next smallest after 4
5 for the next largest after 4
4.
Within each of the two series defined in point 3 above, the heights of segment are indicated as follows:
1 for the greatest height of segment,
2 for the next smallest,
3 for the next smallest, etc.
5.
Within each of the two series defined in point 3 above, the radii of curvature are indicated as follows:
1 for the smallest radius of curvature,
2 for the next greatest,
3 for the next greatest, etc.
6.
The numbers awarded to each windscreen in the two series defined in point 3 above are added together.
6.1.
That windscreen among the five largest which has the smallest total and that windscreen among the five smallest which has the smallest total are selected for the full tests defined in Annex III D, III F, III H, III I or III J.
6.2
The other windscreens in the same series are tested to verify the optical qualities defined in section 9 of Annex III C.
7.
A few windscreens having significantly different parameters of shape and/or radius of curvature from the extremes of the selected group may also be tested if the technical service conducting the tests considers that the parameters in question are likely to have appreciable adverse effects.
8.
The limits of the group are determined by developed area of windscreen. Where a windscreen submitted for component type-approval has a developed area outside the approved limits and/or has a significantly greater height of segment or a significantly smaller radius of curvature, it is considered to be of a new type and subjected to additional tests if the technical service deems such tests technically necessary, having regard to the information already in its possession concerning the product and the material used.
9.
Should any other windscreen model subsequently be manufactured by the holder of component type-approval in a thickness class already approved:
9.1.
it must be ascertained whether that model can be included among the five largest or the five smallest selected for component type-approval of the group in question;
9.2.
numbering by the procedures defined in points 3, 4 and 5 above is performed again;
9.3.
if the sum of the numbers awarded to the windscreen newly incorporated among the five largest or the five smallest windscreens:
9.3.1.
is found to be the smallest, the following tests are performed:
9.3.1.1.
toughened-glass windscreen:
9.3.1.1.1.
fragmentation,
9.3.1.1.2.
headform impact,
9.3.1.1.3.
optical distortion,
9.3.1.1.4.
secondary-image separation,
9.3.1.1.5.
light transmission;
9.3.1.2.
Laminated-glass or glass-plastic windscreen:
9.3.1.2.1.
headform impact,
9.3.1.2.2.
optical distortion,
9.3.1.2.3.
secondary-image separation,
9.3.1.2.4.
light transmission;
9.3.1.3.
Treated laminated-glass windscreen: the tests specified in sections 9.3.1.1.1, 9.3.1.1.2 and 9.3.1.2;
9.3.1.4.
Plastic-faced windscreen: the tests specified in section 9.3.1.1 or 9.3.1.2 as appropriate;
9.3.2.
is found not to be the smallest, only the tests prescribed for verifying the optical qualities defined in section 9 of Annex III C.
EWG:L777UMBE23.96
FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 507 mm; 72 Zeilen; 3825 Zeichen;
Bediener: MARK Pr.: C;
Kunde: L 777 umbe 23
ANNEX III N MEASUREMENT OF THE HEIGHTS OF SEGMENT AND POSITION OF THE POINTS OF IMPACT ANNEX III O CHECKS ON CONFORMITY OF PRODUCTION 1.
DEFINITIONS
For the purposes of this Annex:
1.1.
´type of product' means all glass panes having the same principal characteristics;
1.2.
´thickness class' means all glass panes having the thickness of component parts within the permitted tolerances;
1.3.
´production unit' means all production facilities of one or several types of glass panes established in the same place; it may include several production lines;
1.4.
´shift' means a period of production carried out by the same production line during daily working hours;
1.5.
´production run' means a continuous period of production of the same type of product in the same shift;
1.6.
´Ps' means the number of glass panes of the same type of product produced by the same shift;
1.7.
´Pr' means the number of glass panes of the same type of product produced during a production run.
2.
TESTS
The glass panes are subjected to the following tests:
2.1.
Toughened-glass windscreens
2.1.1.
Fragmentation test in accordance with the requirements of section 2 of Annex III D.
2.1.2.
Light transmission measurement in accordance with the requirements of section 9.1 of
Annex III C.
2.1.3.
Optical distortion test in accordance with the requirement of section 9.2 of Annex III C.
2.1.4.
Secondary image separation test in accordance with the requirements of section 9.3 of
Annex III C.
2.2.
Uniformly toughened glass panes
2.2.1.
Fragmentation test in accordance with the requirements of section 2 of Annex III E.
2.2.2.
Light transmission measurement in accordance with the requirements of section 9.1 of
Annex III C.
2.2.3.
In the case of glass panes used as windscreens:
2.2.3.1.
Optical distortion test in accordance with the requirements of section 9.2 of Annex III C.
2.2.3.2.
Secondary image separation test in accordance with the requirements of section 9.3 of
Annex III C.
2.3.
Ordinary laminated-glass windscreens and glass-plastic windscreens
2.3.1.
Headform test in accordance with the requirements of section 3 of Annex III F.
2.3.2.
2 260-g-ball test in accordance with the requirements of section 4.2 of Annex III F and section 2.2 of Annex III C.
2.3.3.
Test of resistance to high temperature in accordance with the requirements of section 5 of
Annex III C.
2.3.4.
Light transmission measurement in accordance with the requirements of section 9.1 of
Annex III C.
2.3.5.
Optical distortion test in accordance with the requirements of section 9.2 of Annex III C.
2.3.6.
Secondary image separation test in accordance with the requirements of section 9.3 of Annex
III C.
2.3.7.
In the case of glass-plastic windscreens only:
2.3.7.1.
Test of resistance to abrasion in accordance with the requirements of section 2.1 of Annex III I.
2.3.7.2.
Resistance-to-humidity test in accordance with the requirements of section 3 of Annex III I.
2.3.7.3.
Test of resistance to chemicals in accordance with the requirements of section 11 of Annex III C.
2.4.
Ordinary lamirated-glass and glass-plastic panes other than windscreens
2.4.1.
227-g-ball impact test in accordance with the requirements of section 4 of Annex III G.
2.4.2.
Test of resistance to high temperature in accordance with the requirements of section 5 of
Annex III C.
2.4.3.
Light transmission measurement in accordance with the requirements of section 9.1 of Annex III C.
2.4.4.
In the case of glass-plastic panes only:
2.4.4.1.
Test of resistance to abrasion in accordance with the requirements of point 2.1 of Annex III I.
2.4.4.2.
Resistance-to-humidity test in accordance with the requirements of section 3 of Annex III I.
2.4.4.3.
Test of resistance to chemicals in accordance with the requirements of section 11 of Annex III C.
2.4.5.
The above provisions are considered to be met if the corresponding tests have been carried out on a windscreen of the same composition.
2.5.
Treated laminated-glass windscreens
2.5.1.
In addition to the tests described in section 2.3, a fragmentation test is to be carried out in accordance with the requirements of section 4 of Annex III H.
2.6.
Glass panes faced with plastic material
In addition to the tests prescribed in the various sections of this Annex, the following tests are to be carried out:
2.6.1.
Tests of resistance to abrasion in accordance with the requirements of point 2.1 of Annex III I.
2.6.2.
Resistance-to-humidity test in accordance with the requirements of section 3 of Annex III I.
2.6.3.
Test of resistance to chemicals in accordance with the requirements of section 11 of Annex III C.
2.7.
Double-glazed units
The tests to be performed are those specified in this Annex for each glass pane composing the double-glazed unit, with the same frequency and the same requirements.
3.
FREQUENCY OF TESTS AND RESULTS
3.1.
Fragmentation
3.1.1.
Tests
3.1.1.1.
A first series of tests consisting of a break at each impact point specified by this Directive are to be carried out with photographic prints at the beginning of the production of each new type of glass pane to determine the most severe break point.
However, for toughened-glass windscreens, this first series of tests are to be carried out only if the annual production of this type of glass pane exceeds 200 units.
3.1.1.2.
During the production run the check test is to be carried out using the break point as determined in point 3.1.1.1.
3.1.1.3.
A check is to be carried out at the beginning of each production run or following a change of colour.
3.1.1.4.
During the production run the check tests are to be carried out at the following minimum frequency:
Toughened-glass
windscreens
Toughened-glass panes
other than windscreens
Treated laminated-
glass windscreens
Ps 9 200: one break
per production run
Pr 9 500: one per shift
0,1 % per type
Ps > 200: one break every four
hours of production
Pr > 500: two per shift
3.1.1.5.
A check test is to be carried out at the end of the production run on one of the last glass panes manufactured.
3.1.1.6.
for Pr < 20, only one fragmentation test per production run need be carried out.
EWG:L777UMBE25.95
FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 511 mm; 107 Zeilen; 6041 Zeichen;
Bediener: JUTT Pr.: C;
Kunde: L 777 England 25
ANNEX III P MODEL Name of administration
ANNEX TO THE EEC TYPE-APPROVAL CERTIFICATE FOR A TRACTOR IN RESPECT OF THE WINDSCREEN AND OTHER GLASS PANES
(Articles 4 (2) and 10 of Council Directive 74/150/EEC of 4 March 1974 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to the type-approval of wheeled agricultural and forestry tractors)
EEC type-approval No: .
Extension No: .
1.
Make (name of undertaking) of tractor: .
2.
Type and where appropriate commercial name of tractor: .
3.
Name and address of manufacturer: .
.
4.
Name and address of manufacturer's authorized representative (if any): .
.
5.
Description of type of windscreen and other glass panes (toughened, laminated, plastic, glass-plastic flat, curved, etc.).
6.
EEC component type-approval number of the windscreen and other panes: .
7.
Date on which tractor was submitted for EEC type-approval: .
8.
Technical service resonsible for type-approval: .
9.
Date of report issued by that service: .
10.
Number of report issued by that service: .
11.
EEC component type-approval for the windscreen and other glass panes is granted/refused (¹).
12.
Place: .
13.
Date: .
14.
Signature: .
15.
The following documents bearing the EEC type-approval number given above are attached to this document:
................................... dimensioned drawings;
................................... sketch or photograph of the windscreen and other glass panes in the tractor cab.
These data are supplied to the competent authorities of the other Member States at their specific request.
16.
Remarks: .
.
.
.
.
(¹) Delete where inapplicable.
EWG:L777UMBE26.96
FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 253 mm; 42 Zeilen; 1662 Zeichen;
Bediener: MARK Pr.: C;
Kunde: 43649
ANNEX IV MECHANICAL COUPLINGS BETWEEN TRACTOR AND TOWED VEHICLE AND VERTICAL LOAD ON THE COUPLING POINT 1.
Definitions
1.1.
´Mechanical coupling between tractor and towed vehicle' means the components installed on the tractor and on the towed vehicle in order to provide the mechanical coupling between those vehicles.
Only mechanical coupling components for tractors are covered in this Directive.
Among the various types of mechanical coupling components for tractors a basic distinction is made between:
- clevis type (see Figures 1 and 2 of Appendix 1),
- towing hook (see Figure 3 of Appendix 1),
- tractor drawbar (see Figure 4 of Appendix 1).
1.2.
´Type of mechanical coupling between tractor and towed vehicle' means parts which do not differ from one another in such essential respects as:
1.2.1.
nature of mechanical coupling component,
1.2.2.
drawbar rings (40 mm and/or 50 mm diameter),
1.2.3.
external shape, dimensions or mode of operation (e.g. automatic or non-automatic),
1.2.4.
material,
1.2.5.
value of D as defined in Appendix 2 for the test performed using the dynamic method or the trailer mass as defined in Appendix 3 for tests performed using the static method, and also the vertical load on the coupling point S.
1.3.
´Reference centre of mechanical coupling' means the point on the pin axis which is equidistant from the wings in the case of a fork and the point resulting from the interesection of the plane of symmetry of the hook with the generatrix of the concave part of the hook at the level of contact with the ring when this is in the traction position.
1.4.
´Height above ground of mechanical coupling (h)' means the distance between the horizontal plane through the reference centre of the mechanical coupling and the horizontal plane on which the wheels of the tractor are resting.
1.5.
´Projection of mechanical coupling (c)' means the distance between the reference centre of the mechanical coupling component and the vertical plane passing through the axle on which the rear wheels of the tractor are mounted.
1.6.
´Vertical load on the coupling point (S)' means the load transmitted, under static conditions on the reference centre of the mechanical coupling.
1.7.
´Automatic' means a mechanical coupling component which closes and secures itself when the sliding mechanism for the drawbar rings is actuated, without further action.
1.8.
´Wheelbase of tractor (l)' means the distance between the vertical planes perpendicular to the median longitudinal plane of the tractor passing through the axles of the tractor.
1.9.
´Weight on the front axle of the unladen tractor (a)' means that part of the weight of the tractor, which, under static conditions, is transmitted on the ground by the front axle of the tractor.
2.
General requirements
2.1.
The mechanical coupling components may be designed to function automatically or non-automatically.
2.2.
The mechanical coupling components on the tractor must conform to the dimensional and strength requirements in point 3.1 and section 3.2 and the requirements for the vertical load on the coupling point in section 3.3.
2.3.
The mechanical coupling components must be so designed and made that in normal use they will continue to function satisfactorily and retain the characteristics prescribed by this Directive.
2.4.
All parts of mechanical coupling components must be made of materials of a quality sufficient to withstand the tests referred to in section 3.2. and must have durable strength characteristics.
2.5.
All the couplings and their locks must be easy to engage and release and must be so designed that under normal operating conditions no accidental de-coupling is possible.
In automatic coupling components the locked position must be secured in a form-locking manner by two independently functioning safety devices. However, the latter may be released using the same control device.
2.6.
The drawbar ring must be capable of tilting horizontally at least 60° on both sides of the longitudinal axis of a non-built-in coupling device. In addition, vertical mobility of 20° upwards and downwards is required at all times. (See also Appendix 1.)
The angles of articulation must not be attained at the same time.
2.7.
The jaw must permit the drawbar rings to swivel axially at least 90° to the right or left around the longitudinal axis of the coupling with a fixed braking momentum of between 30 and 150 Nm.
The towing hook must allow the drawbar ring to swivel axially at least 20° to the right or left around the longitudinal axis of the hook.
3.
Special requirements
3.1.
Dimensions
The dimensions of the mechanical coupling components on the tractor must comply with Appendix 1, Figures 1 to 4. Any dimensions may be chosen if not shown in these figures.
3.2.
Strength
3.2.1.
For the purposes of checking their strength the mechanical coupling components must undergo a dynamic test under the conditions set out in Appendix 2 or a static test under the conditions set out in Appendix 3.
3.2.2.
The test must not cause any permanent deformation, breaks or tears.
3.3.
Vertical load on the coupling point (S)
3.3.1.
The maximum static vertical load is laid down by the manufacturer. In no case, however, must it exceed 3 tonnes.
3.3.2.
Conditions of acceptance:
3.3.2.1.
The permissible static vertical load must not exceed the technically permissible static vertical load recommended by the manufacturer of the tractor nor the static vertical load laid down for the towing device pursuant to EEC component type-approval.
3.3.2.2.
The requirements of section 2 of Annex I to Directive 74/151/EEC must be complied with, but the maximum load on the rear axle must not be exceeded.
3.4.
Height above the ground of the coupling device (h)
(see figure below).
3.4.1.
All tractors must be fitted with a coupling device, the height above the ground of which must be in accordance with one of the following relationships:
h1 9 (ma-0,2 mt) l-S.c or h2 9 (m1a-0,2 m1t) l-S.c
h1 9
(ma-0,2 mt) l-S.c
0,8 (0,8 mt + S)
or h2 9
(m1a-0,2 mlt) l-S.c
0,8 (0,8 mlt + S)
where:
mt:
mass of the tractor (see Annex I, point 1.6),
m1t:
mass of the tractor (see Annex I, point 1.6) with ballast weight on the front axle,
ma:
weight on the front axle of the unladen tractor (see Annex IV, point 1.9),
mla:
weight on the front axle of the tractor (see Annex IV, point 1.9) with ballast weight on the front axle,
l:
tractor wheelbase (see Annex IV, point 1.8),
S:
vertical load on the coupling point (see Annex IV, point 1.6),
c:
distance between the reference centre of the mechanical coupling and the vertical plane passing through the axle of the rear wheels of the tractor (see Annex IV, point 1.5).
4.
Application for EEC component type-approval
4.1.
An application for EEC component type-approval for a tractor with respect to the coupling device must be submitted by the manufacturer of the device or by his authorized representative.
4.2.
For each type of mechanical coupling component the application must be accompanied by the following documents and particulars:
- scale drawings of the coupling device (three copies). These drawings must in particular show the required dimensions in detail as well as the measurements for mounting the device,
- a short technical description of the coupling device specifying the type of construction and the material used,
- a statement of the value of D as referred to in Appendix 2 for the dynamic test or the value of T (traction force) as referred to in Appendix 3 for the static test, and also the vertical load on the coupling point S,
- one or more sample devices as required by the technical service.
5.
Inscriptions
5.1.
Every mechanical coupling component conforming to the type for which EEC component type-approval has been granted must bear the following inscriptions:
5.1.1.
trade name or mark;
5.1.2.
EEC component type-approval mark conforming to the model in Appendix 4;
5.1.3.
where the strength is checked in accordance with Appendix 2 (dynamic test):
permissible value of D,
static vertical load value of S;
5.1.4.
where the strength is checked in accordance with Appendix 3 (static test):
towable mass and vertical load on the coupling point, S.
5.2.
The data must be clearly visible, easily legible and durable.
6.
Instructions for use
All mechanical couplings must be accompanied by the manufacturer's instructions for use. These instructions must include the EEC component type-approved number and also the values of D or T depending on which test was performed on the coupling.EWG:L777UMBE27.96
FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 1015 mm; 134 Zeilen; 8682 Zeichen;
Bediener: MARK Pr.: C;
Kunde: 43649
10. 3. 89
Official Journal of the European Communities
Appendix 1 DRAWINGS OF MECHANICAL COUPLING COMPONENTS
10. 3. 89
Official Journal of the European Communities
Appendix 2 DYNAMIC TEST METHOD
1.
TEST PROCEDURE
The strength of the mechanical coupling is to be established by alternating traction on a test bed.
This method describes the fatigue test to be used on the complete mechanical coupling device, i.e. when fitted with all the parts needed for its installation the mechanical coupling is mounted and tested on a test bed.
The alternating forces are applied as far as possible sinusoidally (alternating and/or rising) with a load cycle depending on the material involved. No tears or breaks may occur during the test.
2.
TEST CRITERIA
The horizontal force components in the longitudinal axis of the vehicle together with the vertical force components form the basis of the test loads.
In so far as they are of secondary importance, horizontal force components at right angles to the longitudinal axis of the vehicle and also moments are not to be taken into consideration.
The horizontal force components in the longitudinal axis of the vehicle are represented by a mathematically established representative force, the value D.
The following equation applied to the mechanical coupling:
D = g · MT + MR
D = g ·
MT · MR
MT + MR
Where:
MT = the technically permissible total mass of the tractor,
MR = the technically permissible total mass of the towed vehicles,
g
= 9,81 m/s².
The vertical force components at right angles to the track are expressed by the static vertical load S.
The technically permissible loads are given by the manufacturer.
3.
TEST PROCEDURE
3.1.
General requirements
The test force is applied to the mechanical coupling device being tested by means of an appropriate standard drawbar ring beneath an angle formed by the position of the vertical test load Fv vis-à-vis the horizontal test load Fh in the direction of the median longitudinal plane passing from top front to bottom rear.
The test force is applied at the usual point of contact between the mechanical coupling device and the drawbar ring.
The play between the coupling device and the ring must be kept to a minimum.
In principle the test force is applied in an alternating manner around the zero point. With an alternating test force the resulting load is equal to zero.
Should the design of the coupling device (e.g. excessive play, towing hook) make it impossible to carry out the test with an alternating test load, the test load may also be applied on a rising basis in the direction of traction or pressure, whichever is the greater.
Where the test is carried out with a rising force curve, the test load is equal to the upper (highest) load, and the lower (smallest) load should not exceed 5 % of the upper load.
Care should be taken in the alternating force test to ensure that by suitable mounting of the test apparatus and choice of power conduction system no additional moments or forces arising at right angles to the test force are introduced; the angular error for the direction of force in the alternating force test should not exceed ± 1,5°; and for the rising force test the angle is set in the upper load position.
The test frequency must not exceed 30 Hz. For components made of steel or steel casting the load cycle amounts to 2 · 10(. The subsequent tear test is carried out using the colour penetration method or similar method.
If springs and/or dampers are incorporated into the coupling parts, they are not to be removed during the test but may be replaced if, during the test, they are subject to strain under conditions which would not obtain during normal operation (e.g. heat action) and become damaged. Their behaviour before, during and after the test must be described in the test report.
3.2.
Test forces
The test force consists in geometrical terms of the horizontal and vertical test components as follows:
F = wFh2 + Fv2
F =
w
Fh2 + Fv2
where:
Fh = ± 0,6 · D in the case of alternating force,
or
Fh = 1,0 · D in the case of rising force (traction or pressure),
Fv
= g · 1,5 · S
S
= static drawbar load (vertical force components on the track).
EWG:L777UMBE29.96
FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 507 mm; 68 Zeilen; 4127 Zeichen;
Bediener: MARK Pr.: C;
Kunde: L 777 England 29
10. 3. 89
Official Journal of the European Communities
Appendix 3 COUPLING DEVICE
STATIC TEST METHOD
1.
TEST SPECIFICATIONS
1.1.
General
1.1.1.
Subject to a check on its construction characteristics, the towing device must undergo static tests in accordance with the requirements of points 1.2, 1.3 and 1.4.
1.2.
Test preparation
The tests must be carried out on a special machine, with the towing device and any structure coupling it to the body of the agricultural tractor attached to a rigid structure by means of the same components used to mount it on the agricultural tractor.
1.3.
Test instruments
The instruments used to record loads applied and movements must have the following degree of accuracy:
- loads applied ± 50 daN,
- movements ± 0,01 mm.
1.4.
Test procedure
1.4.1.
The coupling device must first be subjected to a pre-traction load which does not exceed 15 % of the traction test load defined in point 1.4.2.
1.4.1.1.
The operation described in section 1.4.1 must be repeated at least twice, starting with a zero load, which is gradually increased until the value prescribed in section 1.4.1 is reached, and then decreased to 500 daN; the settling load must be maintained for at least 60 seconds.
1.4.2.
The data recorded for plotting the load/deformation curve under traction, or the graph of that curve provided by the printer linked to the traction machine, must be based on the application of increasing loads only, starting from 500 daN, in relation to the reference centre of the coupling device.
There must be no breaks for values up to and including the traction test load which is established as
1,5 times the technically permissible trailer mass; in addition, the load/deformation curve must show a smooth progression, without irregularities, in the interval between 500 daN and ¹/3 of the maximum traction load.
1.4.2.1.
Permanent deformation is recorded on the load/deformation curve in relation to the load of 500 daN after the test load has been brought back to that value.
1.4.2.2.
The permanent deformation value recorded must not exceed 25 % of the maximum elastic deformation occurring.
1.5.
The test referred to in section 1.4.2 must be preceded by a test in which an initial load of three times the maximum permissible vertical load recommended by the manufacturer is applied in a gradually increasing manner, starting from an initial load of 500 daN, to the reference centre of the coupling device.
During the test, deformation of the coupling device must not exceed 10 % of the maximum elastic deformation occuring.
The check is carried out after removing the vertical load and returning to the initial load of
500 daN.
EWG:L777UMBE30.95
FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 253 mm; 42 Zeilen; 2666 Zeichen;
Bediener: MARK Pr.: C;
Kunde:L 777 England 30
10. 3. 89
Official Journal of the European Communities
Appendix 4 COMPONENT TYPE-APPROVAL MARK
The EEC component type-approval mark consists of:
- a rectangle surrounding the lower-case letter ´e', followed by the distinguishing letter(s) or number of the Member State which has granted the component type-approval:
- IRL
1
for Germany,
2
for France
3
for Italy,
4
for the Netherlands,
6
for Belgium,
9
for Spain,
11
for the United Kindom,
13
for Luxembourg,
18
for Denmark,
IRL
for Ireland,
EL
for Greece,
21
for Portugal.
- an EEC component type-approval number, which corresponds to the number of the EEC component type-approval certificate issued for the type of coupling device in question as regards its strength and dimensions, placed in any convenient position below and near the rectangle,
- by the capital letter ´D' or ´S' according to which test was performed on the mechanical coupling (dynamic test = D and static test = S) above the rectangle surrounding the lower-case letter ´e'.
The coupling bearing the EEC component type-approval mark shown above is a device for which EEC component type-approval was granted in Germany (e 1) under the number 88-563 and on which a dynamic strength test (D) was performed.
EWG:L777UMBE31.96
FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 253 mm; 43 Zeilen; 1251 Zeichen;
Bediener: MARK Pr.: C;
Kunde: 43649
10. 3. 89
Official Journal of the European Communities
Appendix 5 MODEL EEC COMPONENT TYPE-APPROVAL CERTIFICATE
Name of administration
Notification concerning the granting, refusal, withdrawal or extension of EEC component type-approval with regard to the strength and dimensions and vertical load on the coupling point of a type of coupling device (clevis type, towing hook tractor drawbar)
EEC component type-approval No: .
. extension (¹)
1.
Trade name or mark: .
.
2.
Type of coupling device (clevis type, towing hook, tractor drawbar) (²):
3.
Name and address of manufacturer of coupling device: .
.
4.
If applicable, name and address of authorized representative of manufacturer of coupling device: .
.
5.
The coupling device was subjected to a dynamic/static (²) test and approved for the following values:
5.1.
Dynamic test:
value of D: . (kN)
vertical load on the coupling point: . (daN)
5.2.
Static test:
towable mass: . (kg)
vertical load on the coupling point: . (daN)
6.
Submitted for EEC component type-approval on: .
7.
Technical service responsible for carrying out the tests: .
8.
Date and number of test report: .
9.
EEC component type-approval in respect of the mechanical coupling is granted/refused (²): .
10.
Place: .
11.
Date: .
12.
The following documents, bearing the component type-approval number shown above, are attached to this certificate (e.g. test report, drawings, etc.). This information is to be made available to the competent services of the other Member States only by express request: .
.
13.
Remarks: .
.
14.
Signature: .
(¹) If applicable, state whether this is the first, second, etc., extension of the original EEC component type-approval.
(²) Delete where inapplicable.
EWG:L777UMBE32.96
FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 253 mm; 41 Zeilen; 1719 Zeichen;
Bediener: MARK Pr.: C;
Kunde: L 777 England 32
10. 3. 89
Official Journal of the European Communities
Appendix 6 CONDITIONS FOR GRANTING EEC TYPE-APPROVAL
1.
The application for EEC type-approval of a tractor, with regard to the strength and dimensions of a coupling device, is submitted by the tractor manufacturer or by his authorized representative.
2.
A tractor representative of the tractor type to be approved, on which a coupling device, duly approved, is mounted is submitted to the technical services responsible for conducting the type-approval tests.
3.
The technical service responsible for conducting the type-approval tests checks whether the approved type of coupling device is suitable for mounting on the type of tractor for which type-approval is requested. In particular, it ascertains that the attachment of the coupling device corresponds to that which was tested when the EEC component type-approval was granted.
4.
The holder of the EEC type-approval may ask for its extension for other types of coupling device.
5.
The competent authorities grant such extension on the following conditions:
5.1.
the new type of coupling device has received EEC component type-approval;
5.2.
it is suitable for mounting on the type of tractor for which the extension of the EEC type-approval is requested;
5.3.
the attachment of the coupling device on the tractor corresponds to that which was presented when EEC component type-approval was granted.
6.
A certificate, of which a model is shown in Appendix 5, is annexed to the EEC type-approval certificate for each type-approval or type-approval extension which has been granted or refused.
7.
If the application for EEC type-approval for a type of tractor is made at the same time as the request for EEC component type-approval for a type of coupling device on a tractor for which EEC type-approval is requested, then points 2 and 3 are unnecessary.
EWG:L777UMBE33.95
FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 253 mm; 23 Zeilen; 1881 Zeichen;
Bediener: MARK Pr.: C;
Kunde: L777UMBE33 - 43649
10. 3. 89
Official Journal of the European Communities
Appendix 7 MODEL
Name of administration
ANNEX TO THE EEC TYPE-APPROVAL CERTIFICATE FOR A TRACTOR TYPE WITH REGARD TO THE COUPLING DEVICE AND THE STRENGTH OF ITS ATTACHMENT TO THE TRACTOR
(Articles 4 (2) and 10 of Council Directive 74/150/EEC of 4 March 1974 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to the type-approval of wheeled agricultural or forestry tractors)
EEC type-approval No: .
. extension (¹)
1.
Trade name or mark of tractor: .
2.
Tractor type and trade name: .
3.
Name and address of tractor manufacturer: .
.
4.
If applicable, name and address of manufacturer's authorized representative: .
.
5.
Trade name or mark of coupling device: .
.
6.
Type(s) of coupling device(s):
7.
EEC mark and EEC component type-approval number: .
8.
Extension of EEC type-approval to the following type(s) of coupling: .
.
9.
Permissible static vertical load on the coupling point: . daN
10.
Tractor submitted for EEC type-approval testing on: .
11.
Technical service responsibile for EEC type-approval tests: .
12.
Date of test report issued by that technical service: .
13.
Number of test report issued by that service: .
14.
EEC type-approval with regard to the coupling device and the strength of its attachment to the tractor has been granted/refused (²).
15.
The extension of the EEC type-approval with regard to the coupling device and the strength of its attachment to the tractor has been granted/refused (²).
16.
Place: .
17.
Date: .
18.
Signature: .
(¹) If applicable, state whether this is the first, second, etc. extension of the original EEC type-approval.
(²) Delete where inapplicable.
EWG:L777UMBE34.96
FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 253 mm; 40 Zeilen; 1677 Zeichen;
Bediener: MARK Pr.: C;
Kunde: 43647
ANNEX V LOCATION AND METHOD OF AFFIXING STATUTORY PLATES AND INSCRIPTIONS ON THE BODY OF THE TRACTOR 1.
GENERAL
1.1.
All agricultural or forestry tractors must be provided with the plate and inscriptions described in the following sections. The plate and inscriptions are attached either by the manufacturer or by his authorized representative.
2.
MANUFACTURER'S PLATE
2.1.
A manufacturer's plate, modelled on that shown to the Appendix hereto, must be firmly attached in a conspicuous and readily accessible position on a part normally not subject to replacement in use. It must show clearly and indelibly the following information in the order listed.
2.1.1.
Name of manufacturer.
2.1.2.
Type of tractor (and version if necessary).
2.1.3.
EEC type-approval number.
This number is composed of a small letter ´e' followed in the order given, by the distinguishing number or letters of the country which granted the EEC type-approval (1 for Germany, 2 for France, 3 for Italy, 4 for the Netherlands, 6 for Belgium, 9 for Spain, 11 for the United Kingdom, 13 for Luxembourg, 18 for Denmark, 21 for Portugal, EL for Greece, IRL for Ireland) and by the type-approval certificate for the type of vehicle. An asterisk is placed between the letter ´e' and the distinguishing letters or number of the country which granted the EEC type-approval as well as between that number or the letters concerned and the EEC type-approval number.
2.1.4.
Tractor identification number.
2.1.5.
Minimum and maximum values for the maximum permitted laden mass of the tractor, depending om the possible types of tyre which may be fitted.
2.1.6.
Maximum permitted vehicle mass bearing on each tractor axle, according to the possible types of tyre which may be fitted; this information must be listed in order from front to rear.
2.1.7.
Technically permissible towable mass(es): as referred to in point 1.7 of Annex I.
2.1.8.
Member States may require for tractors placed on their markets, that the country of final assembly also be indicated in addition to the name of the manufacturer where the final assembly was carried out elsewhere than in the manufacturer's country, but not in a Member State of the Community.
2.2.
The manufacturer may give additional information below or to the side of the prescribed inscriptions, outside a clearly marked rectangle enclosing only the information prescribed in points 2.1.1 to 2.1.7 (see example of manufacturer's plate below).
3.
TRACTOR IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The tractor identification number is a fixed combination of characters assigned to each tractor by the manufacturer. Its purpose is to ensure that every tractor can be clearly identified over a period of 30 years through the intermediary of the manufacturer, without a need for reference following requirements.
3.1.
It must be marked on the manufacturer's plate, and also on the chassis, or other similar structure.
3.1.1.
It must wherever possible be entered on a single line.
3.1.2.
It must be marked on the chassis or other similar structure, on the front right-hand side of the vehicle.
3.1.3.
It must be placed in a clearly visible and accessible position by a method such as hammering or stamping, in such a way that it cannot be obliterated or deteriorate.
4.
CHARACTERS
4.1.
Roman letters and arabic numerals must be used for all of the markings provided for in sections 2 and 3. However, the roman letters used in the markings provided for in points 2.1.1 and 2.1.3 and section 3 must be capital letters.
4.2.
For the tractor identification number:
4.2.1.
use of the letters ´I' ´O' and ´Q' and dashes, asterisks and other special signs is not permitted;
4.2.2.
the minimum height of the letters and figures should be as follows:
4.2.2.1.
7 mm for characters marked directly on the chassis, frame or other similar structure of the tractor,
4.2.2.2.
4 mm for characters marked on the manufacturer's plate.
Example of manufacturer's plate
The following example in no way prejudices the data which may actually be entered on the manufacturer's plate: it is given solely for information purposes.
STELLA TRAKTORWERKE
Type: 846 E
EEC number: e * 1 * 1792
Identification number: GBS18041947
Total permissible mass (*):
4 820 to 6 310 kg
Permissible front axle load (*):
2 390 to 3 200 kg
Permissible rear axle load (*):
3 130 to 4 260 kg
(*) Depending on the tyres.
Permissible towable mass:
- unbraked towable mass:3 000 kg
- independently-braked towable mass:6 000 kg
- inertia-braked towable mass:3 000 kg
- towable mass fitted with an assisted braking system
(hydraulic or pneumatic):12 000 kg
EWG:L777UMBE35.96
FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 507 mm; 76 Zeilen; 4671 Zeichen;
Bediener: MARK Pr.: C;
Kunde: L 777 england 35
10. 3. 89
Official Journal of the European Communities
Appendix MODEL
Name of administration
ANNEX TO THE EEC TYPE-APROVAL CERTIFICATE FOR A TRACTOR TYPE WITH REGARD TO THE POSITION AND THE METHOD OF AFFIXING STATUTORY PLATES AND INSCRIPTIONS ON THE BODY OF THE TRACTOR
(Articles 4 (2) and 10 of Council Directive 74/150/EEC of 4 March 1974 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to the EEC type-approval of wheeled agricultural or forestry tractors)
EEC type-approval number: .
1.
Make of tractor or business name of manufacturer: .
2.
Type and, if appropriate, trade name of tractor: .
3.
Manufacturer's name and address: .
4.
If applicable, name and address of manufacturer's authorized representative: .
5.
Date of submission of tractor for EEC type-approval: .
6.
Technical service conducting the type-approval tests: .
7.
Date of report issued by that service: .
8.
Number of report issued by that service: .
9.
EEC type-approval for the location and method of affixing statutory plates and inscriptions on the body of the tractor is granted/refused (¹).
10.
Place: .
11.
Date: .
12.
Signature: .
13.
The following documents bearing the EEC type-approval number indicated above are attached to this certificate:
................................... dimensioned drawing;
................................... sketch or photograph of the location and method of affixing statutory plates and inscriptions on the body of the tractor.
The date must be supplied at the competent authorities of the other Member States if they so request.
14.
Remarks: .
.
.
.
(¹) Delete where inapplicable.
EWG:L777UMBE36.96
FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 253 mm; 38 Zeilen; 1621 Zeichen;
Bediener: MARK Pr.: C;
Kunde: England
ANNEX VI BRAKE CONTROL OF TOWED VEHICLES AND BRAKE COUPLING BETWEEN THE TRACTOR AND TOWED VEHICLES 1.
Where a tractor includes a trailer brake control, the control must be either hand- or foot-operated and it must be possible to moderate and operate it from the driver's seat, but it must not be affected by any operation of other controls.
Where the tractor is fitted with a pneumatic or hydraulic coupling system located between the tractor and the towed mass, only one single control should be fitted for the service braking of the vehicle combination.
2.
The braking systems used may be systems, the characteristics of which are as defined in Annex I to Directive 76/432/EEC relating to the braking devices of wheeled agricultural or forestry tractors.
The fitting must be designed and effected in such a way as to ensure that the operation of the tractor is not adversely affected in the event of the failure or the poor operation of the towed vehicle's breaking device or in the case of a breach in the coupling.
3.
Where the coupling between the tractor and the towed vehicle(s) is hydraulic or pneumatic it must also comply with one or other of the following conditions.
3.1.
Hydraulic coupling:
The hydraulic coupling must be of a single conduit type.
It must comply with ISO standard ISO/5676 of 1983, the projecting section being on the tractor.
Operation of the control must permit zero pressure to be delivered to the coupling head in the rest position; the working pressure must be no less than 10 and no more that 15 MPa.
It must not be possible to disconnect the source of power from the engine.
3.2.
Pneumatic coupling:
The coupling between the tractor and the towed vehicle(s) of a dual-conduit type: an automatic conduit and a direct braking conduit operates by an increase in pressure.
The coupling head must comply with ISO standard ISO 1728 of 1980.
Operation of the control must permit a working pressure of no less than 0,65 and no more than 0,8 MPa to be delivered to the coupling head.
EWG:L777UMBE37.96
FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 253 mm; 28 Zeilen; 2087 Zeichen;
Bediener: MARK Pr.: C;
Kunde: 43649 Montan England 37
10. 3. 89
Official Journal of the European Communities
Appendix MODEL
Name of administration
ANNEX TO THE EEC TYPE-APPROVAL CERTIFICATE FOR A TRACTOR TYPE WITH REGARD TO THE BRAKE CONTROL OF THE TOWED VEHICLE
(Articles 4 (2) and 10 of Council Directive 74/150/EEC of 4 March 1974 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to the EEC type-approval of wheeled agricultural or forestry tractors)
EEC type-approval number: .
1.
Make of tractor (or business name of manufacturer): .
.
2.
Type and where appropriate commercial name of tractor: .
3.
Manufacturer's name and address: .
4.
If applicable, name and address of manufacturer's authorized representative: .
.
5.
Description of component(s) and/or characteristic(s) of the brake control of the towed vehicle: .
.
6.
Date of submission of tractor for EEC type-approval: .
.
7.
Technical service conducting the type-approval tests: .
8.
Date of report issued by that service: .
.
9.
Number of report issued by that service: .
10.
EEC type-approval for the brake control of the towed vehicle granted/refused (¹):
11.
Place: .
12.
Date: .
13.
Signature: .
14.
The following documents, bearing the EEC type-approval number indicated above, are attached to this certificate:
.................... sketch or photograph of the relevant parts of the tractor.
These data must be supplied to the component authorities of the other Member States if they so request.
15.
Remarks: .
.
(¹) Delete where inapplicable.
EWG:L777UMBE38.96
FF: 7UEN; SETUP: 01; Hoehe: 253 mm; 39 Zeilen; 1480 Zeichen;
Bediener: MARK Pr.: C;
Kunde: 43649